Home

KXTA624 User Manual

1. 900 Caller ID Assignment Default Exchange line no 1 6 x All Selection T T T T T T All 1 2 3 4 5 6 Enable Disable 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment CODE no Parameter 6 digits max 0 9 Default All Not stored 1 2 3 4 5 902 Caller ID Modification 903 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls for Long Distance Calls Selection Default Change Default i Change Number of digits to be deleted 3 0 0 9 O no deletion Same as UU blank not stored 1 4 digits max 904 Caller ID Log Priority Selection Extension Selection Extension Selection jack no Number Name jack no Number Name Default All J 13 01 14 02 i 15 i 03 i 16 i 04 l 17 05 06 07 i i 08 i i 09 i i 10 11 12 i i 906 Caller ID SMDR Format Selection Without CID With CID Default Vv Change 1 12 Installation Section 2 Operations 2 1 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Caller ID Indication Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible line key as the Caller ID Indication button The Caller ID Indication button can be used in the following cases 1 Informing you that there is new caller information logged by lighting the indicator 2 Recording caller s information in memory during a conversation 3 Checking logged caller s infor
2. PLACE FOR OTHER FEATURES PLACE FOR OTHER FEATURES Printed in the United Kingdom PSQX1753ZA KK0999CM0 To expand the sub menu left click the mouse on the symbol located to the left of the selected text gt for version 3 Adobe Reader for version 4 Adobe Reader Panasonic KX TA624 Feature Programming Overview The KX TA624 has many new and changed features compared with the KX T30810 61610 This Guide is intended to assist installers who are already familiar with the KX T30810 61610 This Guide clearly shows the Changed and New features of the KX TA624 with reference to KX T30810 61610 Programming General overview only Main Section Sub Sections Programming Step SYSTEM FEATURES DATE TIME seinge yw o SPEED DIAL seting tne System Speedas o TME o HE 001 007 CO LINE OUTGOING CALLS 400 DIAL PULSE SPEED O G ASSIGNMENT 405 407 ARS LCR ASSIGNMENT 350 389 No 005 503 INCOMING RINGING MODE NORMAL T C Ring Pattern 408 410 Delayed Ring 411 413 DIL Direct In Line Enter Jack Must be used for call FWD DISA UCD FAX OGM 500 526 JACKS EXTENSIONS Transfer Mode 005 CALL BARRING COS TABLES EXTENSION GROUPS 600 Day 414 Night 415 Lunch 416 FEATURES 604 615 FAX DETECTION option required P5003 TAM EXTENSION Telephone Answer Machine
3. Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System Installation Manual MODEL NO KX TA624 I Ii HEH TH Please read this manual before connecting the Advanced Hybrid System System Highlights System Capacity Special System Points Basic System Extensions 8 Exchange lines 3 Expansion Maximum extensions 24 Maximum exchange lines 6 5 N System Expansion This system can expand the exchange lines and extension capacity by installing an optional card Hybrid This system can accept Panasonic analogue proprietary telephones Also single line devices such as single line telephones facsimiles and data terminals can be connected Calling from the outside Direct Inward System Access External callers can call extensions in the system If you install an optional card an outgoing message will greet the caller and give information about how to access an extension mr 3 22 Precautions FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 Chec
4. Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 os 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 25 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 75 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 Programming Tables 7 17 7 Programming Tables 355 Route 1 Exception Codes Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 05 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 DS 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 75 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 7 18 Programming Tables Programming Tables 356 Route 2 Exception Codes Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 os 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 1
5. SET e PROGRAM Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM To exit the Programming Mode When the display shows the initial programming mode MEMORY Programming is completed and the normal operation SETe e PROGRAM resumes Set the MEMORY switch to SET When storing data After pressing the STORE button to store data you will hear one of the following tones Confirmation tone 1 beep storage is completed Confirmation tone 2 beeps the data is the same as the last entry Alarm tone 3 beeps the entry is not valid 1 4 Operations 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions You can change the initial settings of your telephone Check the available items in the list and change the settings if required Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Idle Line Preference You can access any permitted idle exchange line to make a call directly by going off hook Prime Line Preference You can access a predetermined exchange line directly by going off hook No Line Preference You cannot access an exchange line by going off hook Choose default the exchange line using 9 or 0 or a line key SELECTION PROGRAMMING INPUT AUTO DIAL O Idle Line Preference 1 2 cmm g 2 exchange line no AUTO DIAL O Prime Line Preference Enter the exchange line UL number 1 through 6 AUTO DIAL O N
6. A Adjust the VOLUME Control lever to the desired setting MAX to MIN Operations 1 15 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Intercom Calling Allows you to make a call to another extension Using the handset Any Telephone F 2 Lift the handset Enter the extension number Talk Using the Speakerphone SP PHONE INTERCOM 9 SP PHONE Press SP PHONE Enter the extension number Talk Press SP PHONE or INTERCOM Using a DSS Direct Station Selection button S E y a a Ghia Lift the handset or press Press the flexible button Talk Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR assigned as a DSS button SP PHONE MONITOR After dialling an extension number you will hear one of the following tones Ringback tone Indicates the destination extension is being called Confirmation tone Indicates you can perform voice calling e g Paging Busy tone Indicates the destination extension is busy Do Not Disturb DND tone Indicates the destination extension has set the Do Not Disturb DND feature An extension number and a name if programmed are shown on a display PT during an intercom call You can assign a DSS button on a flexible button in Proprietary Telephone Settings The stored number can be displayed in the following way 1 Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM 2 Press the desired button while on hook The number will be displayed After checking the
7. TVNHON HVJ11O CAUTION Before touching the System Clear Switch and Reset Button put on a grounding strap After pressing the Reset Button return the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL F position in step 3 before the power indicator stops flashing Otherwise the system will not clear I Feature Reference Section 3 Features System Data Default Set 2 34 Installation Section 3 Features A 3 Features Absent Message Capability Allows an extension user to set a message which will be displayed at the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension s absence One of 6 messages can be programmed as desired which are available for any telephone single line telephone or proprietary telephone Setting or cancelling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers using a proprietary telephone with a LCD can see the message e The 6 messages are shown below means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an extension 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext extension number 4 Back at 9090 AM or PM hour minute 5 Out Until 4090 9090 day month 6 In a Meeting An extension user can only select one message at a time The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off hook E mp Operating Instructions Reference 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Showing Your Message on the
8. 1 16 2 2 Hold Alarm 1 38 1 39 2 2 Pulse to Tone Conversion 1 81 Reorder eu Uu DA DAF iY 2 2 Ringback aai iiu iu sss 1 16 2 2 Tone Call uu y ww GRY Y ddia YY 1 7 Ton Calls cee iu GW YN ethic ects 1 7 Transferring after paging Paging and Transfer 1 50 One Touch Transfer 9 nenn 1 43 Power Failure u ueueueeueuu 1 89 2 11 Screened un nn DD Un 1 42 to an Exchange Line neeesser 1 44 to an Extension naiari 1 42 Unscreened een ni I GW A a 1 42 Using a DSS button sesers 1 43 Without Transfer 1 43 1 102 With Transfer 1 43 1 102 Trunk Group G CO Key esce 1 10 Index 5 Memo Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME Under the copyright laws this manual may not be reproduced in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1999 Panasonic Business Systems U K Panasonic House Willoughby Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 8FP Printed in the United Kingdom PSQX1709YB CM1129SM Quick Reference Cards For Single Line Telephones MAKING CALLS e Intercom Calling Extension No e Operator Call or 9 Outside Calls Automatic Line Access 9 or Phone No e Outside Calls Individual Trunk Group Access Trunk Group No
9. 1 31 Denying Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Deny sssccisssscisscctesssccdenaccdantasastaa te Fn F oe 1 33 1 4 Receiving Calls seoesoseccscessoesscocsocecosssosessoccsssoesosscoosesoessscossssccssssssessse 1 34 Receivins Calls sci0 tuc ccanioncetta ane e EN 1 34 Handsfree Answerback essseseesesesseseesessresressersresrreseesesrreseeseeseresesss 1 35 lt Pick up a Call gt Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension Call Pickup 1 36 suoneuodo oiseg suoneuodo pooueApy suoneuodo Jo6eueJu 10 e19d09 Contents 1 5 During a Conversation ae UC Yd lt Placing a Call on Hold gt Placing a Call on Hold Call Hold een inai GG Y edd Cu 0a Placing a Call on Hold Exclusively Exclusive Hold Retrieving a Call on Hold Call Hold Retrieve oseese Placing a Call in System Parking Area Call Park oo eee lt Transferring Calls gt Transferring a Call to an Extension Call Transfer to Extension Transferring a Call to an Exchange Line Call Transfer to Exchange Line 0 eesesseseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseneeeenees Call nn SR Hn oa esinssussuuaieactancedmetnat an stasebaeeaateaes Call Splitin ce a ie ees Mie Md AO O eae A OG Paging cane RY GG Gyn So SY TC GU y SAD Gy YN Eg Turning the Microphone off Microphone Mute eee eeeeeeeeeee 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk ccssssccssssccssscccssscccsscssssssceseecsessecsees Forw
10. Extension Selection Extension Selection port no Enable Disable port no Enable Disable Default All 13 01 14 02 15 03 16 04 17 05 18 06 19 07 20 08 21 09 22 10 23 11 24 12 519 520 DISA OGM Mute Time UCD Group Selection O sec 2 sec 4 sec 6 sec Extension group no 1 8 Default fos 1 Change 521 522 523 UCD Busy Waiting Time UCD OGM Message Interval Time UCD Busy Mode Selection 1 32 minutes 1 59 seconds 30 sec 1 min 1 5 min 2 min Intercept Disconnect Default 10 minutes Vv A Change 524 525 UCD Intercept Mode UCD Ringing Time before Intercept Selection Intercept Disconnect 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec Default Vv A Change 526 UCD Ringing Time after Intercept Selection 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec Default v Change 7 36 Programming Tables Programming Tables 604 Extension Name Setting Extension name 10 character max Default All Not stored 600 Extension Group Assignment 8 Extension group no 1 Default All Group 1 z 2 9 as Oo E o 6 e jaa 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 x 7 37 Programming T
11. Item with a is only available on a Single Exchange Line key BLEF on DSS Button The Busy Lamp Field BLF indicator button is red when the corresponding extension is busy This is available for flexible line keys assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones and DSS buttons on the DSS console Appendix 2 3 2 3 Feature Number List Feature Numbers and Additional Required Digits FEATURE NUMBER ADDITIONAL REOUIRED DIGITS Absent Message Capability set cancel 75 1 6 0 Account Code Entry for an SLT 49 or Account code Call Forwarding set cancel 71 1 3 desired number 0 Call Forwarding Follow Me set cancel 71 5 8 EXTN extension no ff Call Hold Hold Mode 2 or 3 for an SLT 50 Call Hold Retrieve outside call intercom call 53 5 CO exchange line no EXTN Call Park Call Park Retrieve 36 56 0 9 Call Pickup Directed 4 EXTN Call Pickup Group 40 Call Pickup Deny set cancel 72 1 0 Call Retrieve from TAM 4 Call Waiting set cancel for extensions 732 1 0 Call Waiting set cancel for exchange lines 731 1 0 Conference 5 party 22 phone no CONF Data Line Security set cancel 730 1 0 Do Not Disturb DND set cancel 71 4 0 Doorphone Call calling door open 31 55 1 4 Electronic Extension Lockout set 77 0000 9999 twice Electronic Extension Lockout cancel 77 0000 9999 Executive Busy
12. 1 50 Emergency Call siisc ccses tenes cteeecudensicteseehe 1 21 Exchange Line Ringing Selection 1 6 Exclusive Hold eie Gu i yui 1 39 Idle Line Preference 1 5 Executive Busy Override eee eee 1 31 Initial Settings osioista irin eieiei 1 98 Exchange Line steoc niera 1 32 Day Night and Lunch Buttons Extension sm a R T 1 31 Assignment 00 cee eeeesecsecsteeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 100 Executive Busy Override Deny 1 33 Extension Lock Button Assignment 1 100 Extension Button Confirmation 1 81 Extension Number Assignment 1 99 Extension Feature Clear 1 82 One Touch Access Assignment Extension Lock Button seess 1 100 for System Features 1 99 Extension Password Set 1 97 One Touch Dialling Assignment 1 99 External Feature AcCeSS esec 1 79 To cancel after programming 1 100 Intercom Alert Assignment 1 7 Tone Calllu cites ew ecco lores vada ddu ones 1 7 Voice Call eu ion ets aarti dy dad 1 7 Intercom Calling oo eee eeceeceeeeereeereeeneees 1 16 Index 2 Last Number Redial eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 27 LED Indication osiinsa 2 3 Line K Gyn en HU YY Ydi 2 3 INTERCOM Button 2 3 Lever CONTRAST aai Gi fae God 1 14 RINGER volume soseer 1 15 VOLUME control seses 1 15 Line Call Transfer to Exchange Line 1 44 Data Line Security 0 eee eseces
13. Y A AA4 amp AA3 e A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy No Answer DISA Intercept Routing No Answer In these functions the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS The mailbox number is the same as its extension number The Voice Mail extension should set Data Line Security to prevent interference from system signals If KX TA624 cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX TVP100 select KX T1232 Follow the steps for a KX T1232 Connection Reference 2 8 Extension Connection Reguired System Programming 009 Extension Number Assignment 102 Voice Mail Port for KX TVP100 103 DTMF Integration for KX TVP100 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch 507 DISA Intercept Mode Related Feature References Call Forwarding Data Line Security Direct Inward System Access DISA Distinctive Dial Tones Extension Hunting Intercept Routing Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 Features 3 73 V W 3 Features Volume Control Allows a proprietary telephone user to adjust the following volumes
14. IN J7 118 mm p Paa a screw here SE Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME Under the copyright laws this manual may not be reproduced in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1999 Panasonic Business Systems U K Panasonic House Willoughby Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 8FP Printed in the United Kingdom PSOX1708YA KK1099CMO Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System KX TA624 Operating Instructions for the Caller ID Card KX TA62493 In this manual the suffix of each model number is omitted The Caller ID Card supports the following It receives the Caller ID service from the Local Exchange The Caller ID service provides a display proprietary telephone KX T7130 user with the caller s information such as the name and telephone number on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls A contract with a Telephone Company is required Incoming outside call information from the Caller ID service can be recorded in memory Also the extension user can call back the caller easily by checking the call log Contents Section 1 Installation 1 1 Caler ID Card Installation s i sssssssesessisiossssssossossssssssvosorssossssonsssostessssssi 1 2 1 2 System POatres gsccsicscseciccssccasessaccsvcsesssvesthccevcescossvsnsatovvesssensvecsetenasceess 1 4 C Calle o
15. The user can select the initial display number or name by program 904 Caller ID Log Priority Selection The displayed number is the caller s telephone number not the modified one Example With the caller s number only 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment 201 903 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls Deleted digits 3 Added number 1 lt Caller s telephone number gt lt Modified reference number gt 123 456 789 1456 789 001 System Speed Dialling Entry Speed dialling no 30 81 XX 1234 1456789 line access code account code match 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting Speed dialling no 30 Richard 904 Caller ID Log Priority Selection Name lt Display gt Richard The name and the number can be displayed T alternately by pressing Caller ID Selection button ig se 2 1 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Caller ID Selection Button Assignment 123456789 1 6 Installation 12 System Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR with the Caller ID Card When the Caller ID Card is installed a received caller s telephone number maximum 16 digits will be printed out after lt incoming gt or lt DISA incoming gt as shown below if the calling party has enabled Caller ID service Refer to the Installation Manual Section 3 Features Station Message Detai
16. 4 J x next 08 10 1 6 01 24 Enable Disable To continue Go to another port number To continue Go to another line number X Program address selection number 08 408 for day 09 409 for night 10 410 for lunch Exchange line number 1 through 6 x All exchange lines Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports Default All exchange lines all extension ports Enable LS e Feature References Section 3 Features Exchange Line Ringing Selection Uniform Call Distribution UCD Receiving Calls 4 48 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 411 413 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Assigns the ringing start time for extension s which were selected to ring in programs 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch in the day night and or lunch modes EE ES eee Peete Eee eee PE ee ee ey i NEXT Jor PREV lt lt lt To continue e annn anen AE RESES ES i Go to next or prev line number EG Hd Hu au To continue Go to next or prev port number 01 24 X Immdtly 10 20 30 sec 4 x weer 11 13 1 6 X To continue Go to another port number SELECT To continue Go to another line number X Program address selection number 11 411 for day 12 412 for night 13 413 for lunch Exchange line number 1 through 6 x All exchange lines
17. Disregarding the twenty first call x fo s so Guau e cls Lift the handset or press Dial 7370 Dial Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Incoming Log Off Operations 2 5 2 2 Telephone Features Checking Display Operation for the KX T7130 only When the Caller ID Indication button indicator is red there are new calls logged 1 Press the Caller ID Selection button to confirm the number of logged calls lt Example gt If there are 2 unchecked calls and 3 checked calls New 02 Old 03 The above information will be displayed for 3 seconds 01 0111111111 2 Press the Caller ID Indication button while on hook to see the incoming call information The new information that you have not checked will be displayed first 0209024773333 3 You can check another caller s information by pressing the Caller ID Indication button again After displaying all of the new information the old information you have already checked will be displayed To modify the telephone number use the HOLD button to erase from the first digit 0 to 9 X and PAUSE can be used to add numbers from the first digit To clear the displayed information press the TRANSFER button To clear all logged call information go off hook and press 70X The display shows as follows CID hog Cle
18. 417 Pause Time All exchange lines 1 5 seconds 418 Recall Time All exchange lines 100 milliseconds 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access All exchange lines Enable 5 4 Appendix 5 1 Default Values Address Program Default 420 Calling Party Control CPC Signal All exchange lines 00 Disable 421 CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls All exchange lines Disable 422 Disconnect Time 423 Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection All exchange lines 2 0 seconds All exchange lines Double 424 Reverse Polarity Circuit Assignment All exchange lines Disable 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection Without AA 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant All numbers Not Stored 502 OGM Mode Selection MODE 1 503 FAX Connection Disable 504 DISA Delayed Answer Time 3 seconds 505 DISA Waiting Time after OGM 5 seconds 506 DISA Busy Mode Disconnect 507 DISA Intercept Mode Intercept 508 DISA Ringing Time before Intercept 20 seconds 509 DISA Ringing Time after Intercept 20 seconds 510 DISA No Dial Mode DISA1 and DISA2 Intercept 513 Cyclic Tone Detection 4 Times 514 Fax Tone Detection 1 Time 515 Intercept Time for Internal DISA 3 seconds 516 DISA Incoming Assignment All extension ports Enable 517 DISA AA Wait Time 2
19. Hold Alarm i j Call Waiting Tone 2 Triple UN l l l ULN lt RING TONE gt Incoming Calls Single Hold Recall Intercom calls Incoming Calls Double i Hold Recall External calls l Incoming Calls Triple Timed Reminder Callback Ringing Camp on Recall Doorphone Ringing pe PLL PULL PL 2 2 Appendix 22 LED Indication The Light Emitting Diode LED indicates the line conditions using lighting patterns Flashing light patterns Flashing slowly 60 flash min _ Flashing moderately 120 flash min m H m E O ai oot KEES 240 flash min ls LED Indication on the INTERCOM Button The table below shows the lighting patterns for intercom line conditions INTERCOM button Off Idle Intercom Line Condition Green On Flashing Green Slowly Flashing Green Moderately You are using the line You are holding a line Intercom call exclusive hold Flashing Green Rapidly Incoming intercom doorphone call LED Indication on the Line Key The table below shows the lighting patterns for exchange line conditions Line Key Off Idle Green On You are using the line Flashing Green Slowly You are holding a line You are holding a line on exclusive hold Incoming call Exchange Line Condition Flashing Green Moderately Flashing Red Rapidly Red On Another person is using the line Flashing Red Slowly Another person is holding the line
20. Required only when the optional OGM FAX Detection Card is installed 4 2 System Programming 516 517 516 DISA Incoming Assignment I Enables or disables each extension to receive an outside call via the DISA feature If a DISA call is received at a disabled extension the DISA caller will hear a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically For example it may be convenient to disable the president s extension ae O a ae SE an continue a00 see Ba Gem mm 01 24 X Enable Disable To continue Extension port number 01 through 24 All extension ports Default All extension ports Enable If a call via the DISA feature is received by an extension group this program will not work for extensions in that extension group In this case disabled extensions will still ring Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 517 DISA AA Wait Time I Selects the time that the system waits for a second digit entry If the programmed time expires the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built in auto attendant number if a number is assigned in program 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant For example if a number is not dialled within the programmed time after dialling 1 the system will assume that 1 is the auto attendant number a00 w ea ron Coe 1 2 3 4 5 sec Default 2 seconds Feature Reference Se
21. The setting is as follows Lift receiver FWD DND or 71 91 or 92 after hearing a confirmation tone and dial tone FWD DND or 71 1 All Calls or 2 Busy or No Answer Voice mail extension number Replace receiver The cancelling is as follows Lift receiver FWD DND or 71 90 after hearing a confirmation tone and dial tone FWD DND or 71 0 Replace receiver PT SLT A flexible key can be assigned as the FWD DND button You will hear dial tone 3 if there are messages in your mailbox when you lift your receiver When you access voice mail you have to listen to all of the new messages If you do not listen to all of the messages dial tone 3 will be eliminated and you will not know there are messages in your mailbox the next time you lift your receiver IL 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone FWD DND Button Restoring the Message Button 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Forwarding a Call Call Forwarding All Calls Busy or No Answer See the Installation Manual Section 3 Intercept Routing See the Installation Manual Section 3 Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 1 86 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Calling Using Your Privileges from Another Extension Walking COS Allows you to use your calling privileges Call Barring Class of Service at another extension You may override restrictions which may be
22. glin ca ct mu aa a n BE Naas i To continue Jle NEXT SELECT STORE 01 16 X Enable Disable To continue SELECT Extension port number 01 through 16 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Disable Cannot be monitored ni Feature Reference Section 3 Features Room Monitor 613 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection Enables or disables the time limit programmed in 212 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit for each extension HU WN HYD AR A IG UN To continue JAA amp er ro 01 24 X Enable Disable To continue Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Disable gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration System Programming 4 75 614 4 2 System Programming 614 Internal Pulse Detection Enables or disables connecting a single line telephone SLT to receive pulse signals for each extension NEXT or PREV lt eons ase ee ey geo ae To continue OO be eer fom e 01 24 X a Disable To continue CO Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Enable If you select MODE 1 in program 207 Recall Timing Range Selection and Enable n in this program the system will distinguish between a pulse signal and hooking depending on the situation When you select
23. y 3 personal speed dial no Lift the handset or press Dial 3X Enter the personal speed SP PHONE MONITOR dial number 0 through 9 o Operations 1 25 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Dialling by Simply Going Off Hook Pickup Dialling Allows you to make an outgoing call by just going off hook single line telephone only Storing a phone number h pai 3 OH 7 cba Lift the handset or press Dial 742 Enter the phone number Dial Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone e You must dial a line access code 9 O or 81 through 86 as the first digit when storing an external phone number Setting Cancelling xX ZAI To set fo 3 e Q 7 JLo 2 geet y Ga Lift the handset or press To set Dial 741 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 740 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Dialling 2 N Lift the handset or press Wait for an answer SP PHONE MONITOR This feature will not work if you answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold Up to 32 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and x can be stored The x button is used as a PAUSE However in the account code verify all verify toll call barring and forced modes X is not regarded as a pause An account code must be stored by pressing x x and entering the account code after the line access code Dur
24. 2 3 4 XS 6 EJ 8 Q 10 11 12 13 14 15 Features A The ARS Interdigit timer is assigned in program 363 ARS Interdigit Time The codes are assigned in the following programs Host PBX access codes 403 Host PBX Access Codes Carrier excepted codes 300 Carrier Excepted Code Assignment 1st carrier access code 359 1st Carrier Selection Code Emergency call numbers are assigned in program 309 Emergency Dial Number Set Call Barring denied codes are assigned in program 302 305 Call Barring Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes Route 1 selection codes are assigned in program 351 Route 1 Selection Codes Leading Digits Route 1 exception codes are assigned in program 355 Route 1 Exception Codes Removing digits are assigned in program 360 ARS Modification Removed Digits and added numbers are in 361 ARS Modification Added Number The trunk group s assigned in program 364 is are automatically seized when making a call using the Automatic Exchange Line Access number 0 or 9 Route 2 selection codes are assigned in program 352 Route 2 Selection Codes Leading Digits Route 2 exception codes are assigned in program 356 Route 2 Exception Codes Route 3 selection codes are assigned in program 353 Route 3 Selection Codes Leading Digits Route 3 exception codes are
25. 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 iS 76 77 78 79 Continued 7 4 Programming Tables Programming Tables SPD no 001 System Speed Dialling Entry 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting Telephone number 32 digits max Name 16 characters max Default All Not stored 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Programming Tables 7 5 Programming Tables 009 Extension Number Assignment Selection Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3 Default Vv Change Extension Extension no 200 299 Extension no 100 499 Extension no 10 49 jack no Default Change Default Change Default Change 01 201 201 21 02 202 202 22 03 203 i 203 i 23 i 04 204 204 24 05 205 205 25 06 206 206 26 07 207 i 207 i 27 i 08 208 208 28 09 209 209 29 10 210 210 30 11 211 211 31 12 212 i 212 i 32 i 13 213 i 213 33 14 214 214 34 15 215 215 35 16 216 i 216 i 36 i
26. 7 Programming Tables 359 1st Carrier Selection Code BT Line Access Code Selection 1st carrier access code 4 digits max Default 121 British Telecom Line access code Change 360 ARS Modification 361 ARS Modification 364 Removed Digits Added Number ARS Trunk Group Eu a Trunk TRK group no Rowse Deleted digits Added no 20 digits max 1 6 X ED NEN 1121314516 X Default All routes 0 Route 1 131 Other routes Not stored All routes 1 ERESSE 2 GER EL DU DU 3 oe ee 4 Et 362 363 ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection ARS Interdigit Time Selection Disable Tone 1 Tone2 Tone 3 1 20 seconds Default Ud 5 seconds Change 381 Route 1 382 Route 2 383 Route 3 384 Route 4 Authorisation Code Authorisation Code Authorisation Code Authorisation Code line Authorisation code 19 digits max 0 9 Default All Not stored 1 2 3 4 3 6 x 7 22 Programming Tables 385 386 Route 1 Itemised Bill Route 2 Itemised Bill Programming Tables 387 Route 3 Itemised Bill 388 Route 4 Itemised Bill Exchange line Selection Selection Selection Selection no Enable Disable Enable Disab
27. A ag D gt 4 S S ov ob a n lt 1 DUE 2 DIE 1 E D E Extension port no Default All 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Tables 7 42 D E D iDIE 705 Door Opener Assignment Lunch iD E DIE iD E iD E 704 Door Opener Assignment Night 4 Door opener no E Enable D Disable iDIE i DIE 1 iD E iD E 703 Door Opener Assignment Day Vv E D E Programming Tables Extension port no 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Default All 708 Doorphone Ringing Time 7 43 Selection lt poe gg aS 5 Eg Z o lt Programming Tables Selection 706 Doorphone Ringing Tone Pattern Selection Double Selection Double Triple Single Doorphone no Default All 7 Programming Tables 803 Secret Speed Dialling 805 One Touch Dia
28. Added Number Route 1 131 Other routes Not stored 362 ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection Tone 1 363 ARS Interdigit Time 364 ARS Trunk Grorup 5 seconds Allroutes X All trunk TRK groups 381 384 Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes All exchange lines Not stored 385 388 Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill All exchange lines Disable 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment Extension ports 01 through 24 201 through 224 400 Exchange Line Connection Assignment All exchange lines Connect 401 Dial Mode All exchange lines DTMF Mode 402 Pulse Speed Selection All exchange lines Low Speed 403 Host PBX Access Codes All exchange lines Not stored 404 Trunk Group Assignment CO1 TRK GRP 1 CO2 TRK GRP 2 CO3 TRK GRP 3 CO4 TRK GRP 4 CO5 TRK GRP 5 CO6 TRK GRP 6 405 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day Night Lunch All exchange lines all extension ports Enable Day Night Lunch 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment All exchange lines all extension ports Enable Day Night Lunch Day Night Lunch 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment All exchange lines all extension ports Immdtly Day Night Lunch Day Night Lunch 414 416 Exchange Line Mode All exchange lines Normal Day Night Lunch Day Night Lunch
29. Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports Default All exchange lines all extension ports Immediately LES e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Receiving Calls System Programming 4 49 414 416 4 2 System Programming 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch Selects the mode of an incoming outside call on each exchange Line in the day night and lunch modes There are the following 5 modes Normal An incoming outside call will be received at the extension s assigned in programs 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch DIL An incoming outside call will be received at the assigned extension in this program DISA1 An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature A caller will hear a tone or an outgoing message DISA2 An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature A caller might hear OGM 2 for various configurations please see Cases 2 3 and 4 in Section 3 Features Outgoing Message OGM UCD An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the UCD feature lt To select Normal 400 ieee DISAOF UED NEXT or PREV are ee eee eee To continue eS EE 1 6 a need DISA1 DISA2 UCD To continue SELECT lt To select DIL gt SYMND ae eee yes d wor 6X Normal DIL O1 24 DISA1 DISA2 UCD To continue X Program address selection number
30. Low Speed 403 Host PBX Access Codes If the system is installed behind a host PBX each exchange line may reguire an access code to make an outside call Up to 8 access codes can be stored for each exchange line When the programmed codes are dialled the pause time assigned in program 417 Pause Time is automatically inserted and call barring is after the code ED FE HUU Lo lll y To continue Tomie STORE 1 6 Up to 8 access codes 1 or fe digits lt To continue z i ae line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Insert a for each code using the button on the overlay Examples e Access codes 81 82 on exchange line number 1 HOO OOOO name Default All exchange lines Not stored i To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one Rs Feature Reference Section 3 Features Host PBX Access System Programming 4 45 404 4 2 System Programming 404 Trunk Group Assignment is Assigns a maximum 6 trunk groups Each exchange line must be assigned to an trunk group For example if there are multiple telephone service companies available exchange lines can be grouped by company YN NF I Y y ee an continue 1 6 Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Trunk TRK group number 1 through 6 To continue Default Exchange line 1 through 6 Trunk group 1 through 6 Each exchange line can onl
31. Paging Deny Room Monitor Timed Reminder Voice Mail Integration np Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Cancelling the Feature Settings Extension Feature Clear 3 34 Features 3 Features E Extension Group The system supports 8 extension groups In an extension group the following features can be activated Group Call Pickup Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another member in the same group e Paging Group Any member of an extension group can make a voice announcement to another group member A hunting group DISA ring group or UCD group is a specific extension group The following operation as well as the features above can be activated for a hunting group DISA ring group or UCD group Hunting Group An extension group enabled in program 100 Hunting Group Set will perform the Extension Hunting feature See Extension Hunting in this section DISA Ring Group All extensions in a DISA ring group assigned as an auto attendant destination in program 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant will ring simultaneously Selecting DISA1 or DISA2 in programs 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch is required Also you must select With AA in program 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection UCD Group One extension group assigned as the UCD group in program 520 UCD Group can be the destination of in
32. Y 3 Removing and adding the number i Y No Does the caller s number match your area code y 4 Removing and adding the number y 5 Does the reference number match No a System Speed Dialling number No Y The number is displayed Note The explanation for 1 through 7 is on the next page Installation 1 5 1 2 1 T2 3 tg IS 6 7 System Features The Caller ID line is assigned in program 900 Caller ID Assignment Your area code is assigned in program 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment The caller s telephone number is modified according to program 902 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls The caller s telephone number is modified according to program 903 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls System Speed Dialling numbers are assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialling Entry When one of System Speed Dialling numbers includes the reference number the system regards them as a match A line access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 and or an account code assigned in program 310 Account Codes in the System Speed Dialling number are disregarded for the match The system checks the System Speed Dialling number after a line access code and or an account code with the reference number Assigning a name to a System Speed Dialling number is in program 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting
33. You can modify the door opener timer in System Programming The door opener will open the door even if a doorphone is not installed i See the Installation Manual Section 3 Door Opener 1 84 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 Allows you to use a Panasonic Voice Processing System KX TVP100 to forward your calls to a mailbox in the system A caller can leave a message in your mailbox If you use a proprietary telephone which has a MESSAGE button the button light will turn on to let you know you have messages If you use a single line telephone dial tone 3 will let you know you have messages when you go off hook If this feature is enabled the system automatically sends the Follow on ID to the Voice Mail Port before connecting the caller You must choose one of the following two settings for the Follow on ID format Setting A only sends the extension number to the Voice Mail Port Setting B sends 6 followed by the extension number 6 is used by a Panasonic KX TVP100 to force the VPS port into voice mail service The setting depends on the format required by your voice processing system Setting PT and SLT FWD DND or a PT 1 For an SLT Lift the handset For a PT Press Dial the setting number Dial Confirmation Hang up or press or press FWD DND For setting A Dial 91 tone and SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial 71 For
34. 310 Account Codes N Assigns up to 24 account codes which are compared with the code entered when Verify All or Verify Toll Call Barring is selected in program 605 Account Code Entry Mode If Verify All is selected an account code is reguired to make an outside call If Verify Toll Call Barring is selected an account code is only reguired to override call barring y Y uu Y HN FAU NEXT or PREV lt a ee To continue 3 Je sex STORE 01 24 4 digits 0 9 To continue ae o Default All codes Not stored To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one Feature References Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Call Barring Override by Account Codes 311 Automatic Pause Insertion Codes Assigns up to 40 automatic pause insertion codes which are checked with the outside outgoing call number When one of the codes is the same as the call number the pause time assigned in program 417 Pause Time is automatically inserted after the code If a second dial tone is sent from your Local Exchange it is convenient to assign the area code as the pause code Y y a FU FC y cu ena ese ni continue gog Gws sore mo 01 40 7 digits max x g earn To continue ISELECT SELECT lt Default All codes Not stored To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one System Programm
35. 5 8 a Disable To continue SELECT X Program address selection number 5 385 for Route 1 2 386 for Route 2 3 387 for Route 3 4 388 for Route 4 Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Disable lr Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment Assigns the itemised bill code for each extension for dividing a bill Be a Au a NEXT or PREV c ERS AA A ee To continue 3 Le o ext NEXT itemised bill code STORE eno 01 24 X 3 digits max 0 9 ISELECT lt t To continue Extension port number 01 through 16 x All extension ports Default Extension ports 01 through 24 201 through 224 np Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 43 400 401 4 2 System Programming 400 Exchange Line Connection Assignment Assigns which exchange line s is connected to the system or not gn neste EE E en aeee eR NEXT NEXT or PREV PREV lt te au a To continue HE ne seuc store 6 X I Not connect To continue Exchange line number 1 through 6 x All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Connect ESP e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Outside Calling 401 Dial Mode Selects the dialling mode DTMF Pulse or C BLK Call
36. 6 F8 7 F9 F10 9 A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature ll Operating Instructions References 1 3 Making Call Dialling with Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling 3 54 Features 3 Features P Pickup Dialling Allows a single line telephone user to make an outgoing call by going off hook if the user has stored the telephone number up to 32 digits beforehand This feature is also Known as Hot Line A rotary telephone cannot program this feature The user can set and cancel this feature If the feature is activated and the user goes off hook a dial tone will be generated for the delay time assigned in program 203 and then dialling will start During the delay time the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialling function i np Reguired System Programming 203 Pickup Dial Delay Time Operating Instructions Reference 1 3 Making Call Dialling by Simply Going Off Hook Pickup Dialling Polarity Reverse Detection The circuit in the system can detect an exchange line polarity reverse signal from the Local Exchange when trying to make an outside call This detects the start a called party goes off hook and end the called party goes on hook of an outgoing outside call The conversation time can be verified on the SMDR printout using this feature When an outside call is received the circuit can also detect the polarity reverse signal befor
37. DOORPHONE OPENER 700 709 Documentation Operating Instructions Section 1 Operations Section 2 Appendix Troubleshooting Installation Manual Section 1 Basic System Construction Section 2 Installation of System and all Options Section 3 Feature descriptions Section 4 System Programming steps Section 5 Default Tables for program steps Section 6 Troubleshooting Guide Section 7 Customer Data Programming Tables Programming note System Programming A Programming Password has replaced the PBX Program Switch KX T30810 61610 Password Default Setting 1234 Details in the Installation Manual Page 4 2 Data Clear Switch An internal Data Clear switch has been added to the CPU board Operation described in the Installation Manual Page 2 34 lof 6 CURRENT amp CHANGED Programming Steps with reference to the KX T30810 61610 KX T KX T KX TA Description Changed or Enhanced 30810 61610 624 Features be a o mw 0000 SS I 003 01 02 DSS Console Assignment DSS Console and Paired Telephone 004 DSS Console Assignment are now separate steps Pair Telephone No Dial Mode Call Blocking has been added DTMF Pulse i e DTMF is not sent to a pulse mode CO line when dialling from a MF telephone System Switching Mode Automatic Manual 007 System Switching Time Day of week amp Lunch Day Night Lunch Start End times added Flexible Outward Diallin
38. Door opener number 1 through 4 X All door openers Default All door openers 5 seconds n gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features Door Opener System Programming 4 81 800 4 2 System Programming 800 SMDR RS 232C Communication Parameters Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface RS 232C NL Code Selects the code for your printer or personal computer If your printer or New line personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return select CR If not select CR LF Baud Rate The baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer Word Length The word length code indicates how many bits compose a character Parity The parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make your selection depending on the reguirements of your printer or personal computer Stop Bit The stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select a value depending on the reguirements of your printer or personal computer lt Sets the new line code gt lt Sets the baud rate gt JAA sen as rors o CR LF CR 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 B lt oa the word ee gt lt a the aes gt lt a the stop bit a gt NEXT ISELECT STORE NEXT ISELECT STORE NEXT SELECT STORE store eno 7 8 bits Mark Sp
39. Doorphone Door Opener Card KX TA62460 Connector Location of Optional Cards The location of the optional cards is shown below Precaution To protect the printed circuit boards P boards from static electricity do not touch parts on the P boards in the main unit and on the optional cards If accessing the parts is required wear a grounding strap 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card KX TA62477 or 8 Extension Expansion Card KX TA62470 Connector The front covers are open OGM FAX Detection Card KX TA62491 Connector Caller ID Card KX TA62493 Connector NOTE Power off the system and unplug the AC cord before installing an optional card OGM FAX Detection Card Installation An optional OGM FAX Detection Card KX TA62491 can be installed to the system The OGM FAX Detection Card supports the following Direct Inward System Access DISA with OGM One of the system features An outgoing message greets the external caller and gives information so that the caller can access an extension s directly Facsimile detection When the system receives a facsimile transmission signal by DISA it automatically connects the specified facsimile extension 1 Remove the 2 screws Installation 2 19 2 15 OGM FAX Detection Card Installation 2 Open the bottom front cover Bottom front cover OGM FA
40. J If your proprietary telephone PT is not supplied with the FWD DND button it can be assigned to a flexible line key in the Proprietary Telephone Settings DND does not work for the following calls Hold recall or Timed Reminder A PT user in the DND mode can answer a call by pressing the corresponding flashing button If the Call Forwarding feature has already been set setting the DND feature will cancel Call Forwarding np Reguired System Programming 609 Do Not Disturb Override Related Feature References Call Forwarding Timed Reminder Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone FWD DND Forward Do Not Disturb Button 1 7 Useful Features Rejecting Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND 1 7 Useful Features Calling an Extension which Denies Receiving Calls Do Not Disturb Override Features 3 29 D 3 Features Up to 4 Door Openers can be connected to the system The door can be unlocked by a pre assigned extension users in programs 703 705 An optional Doorphone Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a user supplied door opener to the door to be opened Four openers can be installed The door opener will open the door even if a doorphone is not installed The door opener timer can be modified in program 709 I Connection Reference 2 16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Reguired
41. Outline of a UCD 1 When a number of calls have arrived 2 When the first call arrives at extension at the UCD group the first call arrives at A the second call arrives at extension B extension A first Calls have arrived at the UCD group Ca 3rd call in queue Qa 2nd call in queue 3rd call in queue gt 2nd call in queue gt UCD group Pron cnc nn sno nennn namnnnnn cp ennnen nennen 1st call in queue gt i Y m gt Extension B When extension B is UCD group NA N HED eee busy or Log Out has y i been set at extension B yw Extension A the call arrives at exten sion C When extension A is i y busy or Log Out has i been set at extension A the call arrives at exten z i sion B y y i Extension A Extension C Extension B When extension B is busy or Log Out has been set at extension B the call arrives at exten sion C 3 When the second call arrives at y i extension B the third call will arrive at extension C Extension C When extension C is busy or Log Out has been set at extension C the call arrives at exten sion A HD DF TEU eases cone SEESE 3 68 Features 3 Features U Flow chart of possible cases and results for UCD calls An outside line call is made The caller reaches the UCD group Busy Call gt o MA GM _ j
42. Reguired System Programming 606 Call Transfer to an Exchange Line Related Feature Reference Hold Limited Call Duration Operating Instructions Reference 1 5 During Conversation Transferring a Call to an Exchange Line Call Transfer to Exchange Line Call Transfer to Extension Allows an extension user to transfer a received call an intercom or an outside call to another extension Two types are available Screened Call Transfer Announces the call to another extension before completing the transfer Unscreened Call Transfer Immediately releases the call to another extension without an announcement I If the destination extension does not answer the call within the assigned time in program 201 the call will return to the transferring party An outside call can be transferred to an extension by simply pressing a DSS button It reguires program 005 If Music on Hold is enabled music is sent to the original external caller while being transferred Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold can be programmed by program 111 During a 5 party conference the user cannot transfer a call n gt Reguired System Programming 005 One Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button 111 Hold Music Selection 201 Transfer Recall Time Related Feature References Conference 5 party Hold Music on Hold Operating Instructions Reference 1 5 During Conversation Transferring a Call to an Extension Call Trans
43. Wn i DR a Fd debs CN AFR 4 81 800 SMDR RS 232C Communication Parameters 4 82 801 SMDR Parameter cccccccccsesesessssssssssssssessssssssssstsssssrsrseees 4 83 802 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing 4 83 803 Secret Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling Printing 4 84 804 System Data Dump sisscccssiivceacstsscicveasshossscavenss RS YS DAWR oh 4 84 805 SMDR Account Code Selection uuennennenneenn 4 85 806 SMDR Language Assignment eesceceereeceeeeeceteeeeeteeeesaes 4 86 995 ROM Version un dd i i NO 8 4 86 999 System Data Cleat an o y o Ru y DR 4 87 13 Section 5 5 1 5 2 Section 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 Section 7 Template Contents Appendix Default Values eo SF FY DYNO da 5 2 Specifications iin desgen Yda e nyd nn FYNO YO FYNN Yad oY ALUN ass FYNYD Ed 5 7 Troubleshooting While Installimne i casecisiacasisiseceosttiitecchavccsetinincecblanscavcteasbssseancspecatinseczcaaied 6 2 While Connecting Gi yndy diar Mn HF SYN S Ydy FE YSOL NND YDW 6 3 While Operatino su i YY Y Y GYN NT CWYD DN FON Ond NYD Y Y FF YNN 6 4 Programming Tables 14 Section 1 Basic System Construction 1 Basic System Construction The KX TA624 has a basic capacity of 8 extensions and 3 exchange lines It is capable of supporting Panasonic analogue proprietary telephones and single line devices such as single lin
44. suoneiodo ojosuo9 ssd Jo6eueJ 403240dO 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Cancelling Gy Z oaa a Lift the handset or press Dial 764 Dial the desired extension Dial SP PHONE MONITOR number 4 noon 7 amp Dial 762 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR Checking the time setting with a display PT only Gg GOO ame g Lift the handset or press Dial 764 Dial the desired extension Dial SP PHONE MONITOR number HOw obs Dial 763 Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR ILJ e 1 7 Useful Features Alarm Setting Timed Reminder See the Installation Manual Section 3 Timed Reminder h Confirmation tone and dial tone Confirmation tone and dial tone 1 92 Operations 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Outgoing Message OGM The operator or manager can record or play back the outgoing message This is played when a caller accesses the DISA or UCD feature Two Outgoing Messages OGM 1 and OGM 2 are available for DISA 1 DISA 2 UCD and UCD END To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM Recording a message a Dial 9 amp DB Lift the handset Dial 0 for both OGM 1 and OGM 2 Confirmation Record a message Dial 1 for OGM 1 tone Dial 2 for OGM 2 up to 30 seconds hy The STORE indicator light turns off Recording M AUTO DIAL 4 Y starts after the confirmation
45. 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Tables 7 24 Programming Tables 406 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Night x All Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Selection Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Disable Enable Enable Vv Extension port no Default All 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 25 Programming Tables Programming Tables 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Lunch All Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Selection Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Disable Enable Enable Vv Extension port no Default All 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Tables 7 26 Programming Tables 408 Flexibl
46. 120 Bell Frequency aY Ui GY neiii yN Cd FR 4 23 121 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection 4 23 122 Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Access 4 23 123 Break RatiO Ges ar e TU FT HT ets 4 24 124 SLT Ringing Mode Selection eee eeeeeseceseeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 4 24 125 Call Barring Check for X and 200 cee eecececeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeees 4 24 126 DSS Off Hook Mode sung i A RG Ag 4 25 127 Pickup Group Set an FN dd 4 25 200 Hold Recall Time cc cc ccccccessssecececececsesssseceeeeeeseeensnseaeees 4 26 201 Transfer Recall Time ccccccecsccecccececsssssseceeeceesesensrseaeees 4 26 202 Call Forwarding Start Time cccccccsscssssescesseccssescssnecsesnees 4 27 203 Pickup Dial Delay Times Gyd god SOFFA BWA 4 27 204 Call Duration Count Start Time eeeeeeeeeeees ii ieir eio 4 28 206 Dialling Start Pines is uw y Uf ED FA y NF 4 28 207 Recall Timing Range Selection 0 00 0 ceeeeeeeeeeceereeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 4 29 208 Interdisit TIME pps O acs such ee oli den ay ls a 4 29 210r DTME Yr Y ain fe cal Sires ots Sata N E te soak 4 30 211 No Dial Disconnection eana a e E 4 30 212 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit sssseseseseeeesseesssssessee 4 31 213 Bell Of Detection uu GG Y Y FF YN 4 31 300 Carrier Excepted Code Assignment ccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 32 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class 4 3
47. 5 310 Account Codes CODE no Account code 4 digits CODE no Account code 4 digits Default All Not stored 0l 13 02 14 03 15 04 16 05 17 06 18 07 19 08 20 09 21 10 22 11 23 12 24 7 12 Programming Tables 7 Programming Tables 311 Automatic Pause Insertion Codes CODE no Pause code 7 digits max CODE no Pause code 7 digits max Default All Not stored 0l 21 02 22 03 23 04 24 05 25 06 26 07 27 08 28 09 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40 312 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class Default Change Disable v COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 350 ARS Selection Default Exchange line no 1 6 All Selection All LAD BP Bh oe Bo te te A oe Enable Disable i Programming Tables 7 13 7 Programming Tables 351 Route 1 Selection Codes Leading Digits Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 05 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 25 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 7
48. All Extensions Group External or All Extensions amp External PT and SLT During a conversation 3 3 o For all extensions TRANSFER C For a PT 3 3 group no For a group 4 3 4 For external CR For an SLT i L 3 For all extensions a amp external For a PT Press TRANSFER Dial tone For all extensions Dial 330 For an SLT Press Recall For an extension group Dial 331 through 338 For external Dial 34 For all extensions amp external Dial 33 or 339 The other party is placed on hold e You may dial 339 instead of 33 2 re a a Confirmation tone Announce Wait for an answer Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE The held party and the paged extension are connected and can start a conversation J If the external paging access tone is set to Disable a splash tone from the external paging M equipment will not be heard after accessing external paging Refer to System Programming External Paging Access Tone SLT If Hold 3 is assigned in System Programming you must dial 50 after pressing the Recall button 1 50 Operations 1 5 During a Conversation Paging Deny A page sent to a built in speaker can be denied by any extension in the system Setting Cancelling a 20000 r 9 7 2 4 e 2 To cancel Ga Lift the handset or press To set Dial 7341 Hang up or press
49. Call Barring for each extension port This feature displays the account code of the called or calling party on the SMDR Option The user can enter any account code if needed Forced The user must always enter an account code The code can be any number Verify All The user must always enter an assigned account code in program 310 Account Codes to make an outside call Verify Toll Call Barring The user can enter an assigned account code in program 310 to override call barring The call barring COS numbers 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to the COS number 2 The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed RR EAA TNE TAEI TTE NExT or PREV lt I A E To continue OOF be eJ Gem E 01 24 X Option Forced Verify All Verify Toll To continue eect Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Option lr Feature References Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Call Barring Override by Account Codes System Programming 4 71 606 607 4 2 System Programming 606 Call Transfer to an Exchange Line Enables or disables transferring an intercom or outside call to any exchange line manually for each extension Hn ake ses NEXT or PREV lt _ gee a cece E ae To continue aoa see p Eic Em mm 01 24 X Enable Disable To continue caa Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extens
50. Caller s number provided by the Local Exchange 7149876543 Logged modified number 17149876543 Default Deleted digits 0 No deletion Added number 1 Program 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment is required for this program n To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one 1 10 Installation 904 906 1 3 System Programming 904 Caller ID Log Priority Selection Selects the first display of an incoming outside call by the Caller ID service Either the name or number can be selected if the Caller ID service supports both the name and number FI Y Y een es NEXT or PREV i lt J aa a a aaa al Dao To continue 2 o 4 neu seuect STORE O1 16 X Name t Number To continue eeuzcr lt Extension port number 01 through 16 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Name This program is available when your Caller ID service provides both the name and number If only the number is provided this program is not necessary 906 Caller ID SMDR Format Selects whether a Caller ID number is printed out or not on an SMDR printout edelle sec Bues sioe me Without CID With CID Without CID Not printed With CID Printed Default With CID Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service only the number is printed Installation 1 11 1 4 Programming Tables
51. Conference Tone 116 Conference Pattern Selection Related Feature References Conference 3 party Call Park Executive Busy Override Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone CONF Conference Button 1 7 Useful Features Conference 5 party Data Line Security Prevents an extension user from being interrupted by the Call Waiting and Executive Busy Override features This feature also prevents a ring tone or an alarm tone from being sent when a call is kept waiting longer than a pre determined time Data communication devices such as computers and facsimiles connected to an extension port can operate without interruptions I Related Feature References Call Waiting Executive Busy Override Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Data Line Security Features 3 21 3 Features Date and Time Setting A manager or operator can adjust the current time mr Reguired System Programming 000 Date and Time Setting Operating Instructions Reference 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Date and Time Setting Direct In Line DIL I Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to a specified extension This exchange line can be used by multiple extension users to make a call but can only be used by one extension to receive a call DIL can have a different destination
52. Dial Confirmation tone Hang up or press or press FWD DND To cancel Dial 0 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial 71 e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of l A calling extension that has Do Not Disturb DND Override enabled can call your a extension even if Do Not Disturb DND is set DND also blocks paging announcements If the Call Forwarding feature has already been set setting the DND feature will cancel Call Forwarding The Timed Reminder alarm and Hold Recall features override this feature PT _ A flexible line key on a proprietary telephone which is not provided with FWD DND button can be assigned as the FWD DND button PT If the Do Not Disturb DND mode is set you can still answer a call by pressing the line key PT The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows Off Both functions are not set Red DND mode Flashing red slowly FWD mode LE 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone FWD DND Button 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Forwarding a Call Call Forwarding 1 7 Useful Features Calling an Extension which Has Do Not Disturb Set Do Not Disturb Override See the Installation Manual Section 3 Do Not Disturb DND Operations 1 69 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Calling an Extension which H
53. Initial Settings Extension Number Assignment 3 42 Features 3 Features L Language Selection The selected language in program 615 is shown on the LCD display of a proprietary telephone during operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings but not used during System Programming The selected language in program 806 is used for an SMDR printout ll Reguired System Programming 615 LCD Language Assignment 806 SMDR Language Assignment Limited Call Duration The system disconnects outside outgoing calls when a specific timer expires The timer is in effect when making an outside call transferring an intercom call to an exchange line or forwarding an intercom call to an exchange line Limiting the time of the call can be assigned through System Programming I An alarm tone will be sent to both parties 15 seconds before the assigned time limit lr Reguired System Programming 212 Exchange line Duration Time Limit 613 Exchange line Duration Time Limit Selection Related Feature References Call Forwarding Call Transfer to Exchange line Line Access Keys A proprietary telephone PT user must assign one of the following 3 types of line keys to flexible line keys in the Proprietary Telephone Settings This permits making or receiving outside calls The default setting for the flexible line keys CO 1 CO 6 are Single Exchange Line S CO keys CO 1 corresponds to exchange line 1 CO 2 corresponds to e
54. Installation 2 19 Securing the Cords 1 Wrap the strap around all of the cords l 2 20 Closing the Front Cover 1 Replace the covers and tighten the screws 2 Tie together all of the connected cords and attach them to the wall so that the cords cannot be pulled out of the system Installation 2 31 2 21 Starting the System for the First Time 1 Set the Power Switch to the OFF position 2 Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet 3 Turn the Power Switch on The power indicator will light 4 Perform the following operation with a proprietary telephone connected to JACK 01 a Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM on the back of the telephone b Press X ff c Enter 1234 d Enter 999 e Press the NEXT SP PHONE button f Press the SELECT AUTO ANSWER MUTE button until All Para is displayed g Press the STORE AUTO DIAL STORE button h Press the END HOLD button i Set the MEMORY switch to SET on the back of the telephone The system will be initialised with the default values If the system does not work properly please see 2 23 System Data Clear CAUTION The system will continue to be powered even if the Power Switch is turned OFF The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the outlet is located installed near the eguipment and is easily accessible To AC outlet 4 2 32 Inst
55. PROGRAMMABLE BUTTON DSS PF DSS Direct Station Selection S Y One Touch Dialling Y Y CONF Conference FWD DND Forward Do Not Disturb SAVE Log In Log Out Single Exchange Line S CO Other Exchange Lines O CO Trunk Group G CO SISISISISISI SI S MESSAGE Message Waiting Day Night Lunch Extension Lock YY indicates that the feature is available To confirm the stored function data Press the button you want to confirm As to the buttons on your proprietary telephone please refer to your proprietary telephone manual 1 8 Operations 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Line Access Keys One of the following 3 types of line keys must be used to select an exchange line when making a call Trunk Group G CO key Other Exchange Lines O CO key Single Exchange Line S CO key A flexible line key can be assigned as a Line Access Key G CO O CO or S CO in Proprietary Telephone Settings Once a flexible line key is assigned as a Line Access Key it provides the line status using lighting patterns and colour indication Please refer to 2 2 LED Indication You can set the G CO and S CO keys on one telephone Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the key in the following priority S CO gt G CO I Single Exchange Line S CO Key A S CO key is an exchange line access key T
56. Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set Allows you to reset the proprietary telephone s settings to the default settings Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing default No Line Preference Preferred Line Assignment Incoming default Ringing Line Exchange Line Ringing Selection default Ring all exchange lines e Intercom Alert Assignment default Tone Call Call Waiting Tone Selection default Tone 1 OPERATION AUTO DIAL E STORE e This feature also cancels the Handsfree Answerback feature The operation of the AUTO ANSWER MUTE button in the Room Monitor feature is also affected i Operations 1 7 suoneuodo oiseg 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Changing the Flexible Buttons You can change the flexible buttons on your telephone to certain function buttons For example if your telephone has more line keys than available exchange lines you may change Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone the unused line keys to One Touch Dialling buttons etc The 4 types of flexible buttons are as follows Flexible Line Keys located on a PT only Flexible DSS Buttons located on a DSS Console only Programmable Feature PF Buttons located on a PT and DSS Console Flexible MESSAGE Buttons located on a PT Check the required operation first If your telephone is not provided with the button you want you can assign the button using this program FUNCTION
57. Reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before they are disconnected No operation is necessary Operations 1 89 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features The system supports one operator and one manager Any extension can be appointed as the operator and extension port 01 is appointed as the manager System Programming is required to assign the operator They can perform the following features 1 Date and Time Setting 2 Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL 3 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call 4 Outgoing Message OGM 5 Remote Extension Lock 6 Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting 7 Extension Password Set Manager only Date and Time Setting When the current time setting is wrong you can adjust it by the following procedure Setting o year month day day of the week Enter the year Enter the month Enter the day Enter the day of the week last 2 digits 01 through 12 01 through 31 0 For Sun 1 For Mon 2 For Tue 3 For Wed 4 For Thu 5 For Fri 6 For Sat AUTO DIAL hour minute o or 1 A STORE Enter the hour Enter the minute Dial 0 or 1 Press AUTO DIAL STORE 01 through 12 00 through 59 For AM Dial 0 For PM Dial 1 The STORE indicator light turns on Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM A
58. The tone can be disabled in program 707 This feature is not available for KX T7050 A single line telephone with a MUTE button can be used for monitoring but cannot be monitored Reguired System Programming 612 Room Monitor Assignment 707 Doorphone Access Tone Selection Related Feature Reference Doorphone Call Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Room Monitor Features 3 61 S 3 Features Secret Dialling Allows a proprietary telephone user to conceal all or part s of a System Speed Dialling number assigned in program 001 or One Touch Dialling number assigned to a flexible button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings which would normally appear on the display e When storing a number press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the numbers to be concealed One or more parts of a telephone number can be concealed Printing out the concealed number on a SMDR can be assigned in program 803 i mr Reguired System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Entry 803 Secret Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling Printing Related Feature References One Touch Dialling System Speed Dialling Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone One Touch Dialling Button 1 7 Useful Features Secret Dialling Self Extension Number Confirmation KX T7130 only Allows a display proprietary te
59. Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 in this manual To cancel the Call Forwarding features refer to Cancel in this feature Call Forwarding can only be extended to one target telephone For example extension A is forwarded to extension B and if extension B tries to set Call Forwarding to extension C an alarm tone is heard and the setting is rejected If extension B has already set Call Forwarding to extension C and extension A tries to set Call Forwarding to extension B the setting will be also rejected a ExtA x Ext A a Ext B 77 x A Ext C Ext B Ext C Yes If the destination extension has already set Do Not Disturb you cannot forward any calls to the extension There should be at least one extension that can receive calls in the same UCD group When a UCD extension which sets Call Forwarding function receives a call the call will not be forwarded and the system will search for an idle extension in the UCD group first But if the UCD extension is the last one that can receive the call it will be forwarded to the assigned extension by Call Forwarding Setting a new Call Forwarding function All Calls Busy or No Answer etc cancels any other Call Forwarding functions or the Do Not Disturb DND function If your entry is valid confirmation tone 1 1 beep is sent If your entry is the same as previously
60. _ S Double U0 JUL JUL JU1 UL JUL men y o a l 4 X Single Double Triple S Am To continue NEXT or PREV aH Doorphone number 1 through 4 X All doorphones Default All doorphones Triple When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone a tone is heard instead of a ringing IE e Feature References Section 3 Features Doorphone Call Ringing Pattern Selection 707 Doorphone Access Tone Selection Enables or disables sending a doorphone access tone to a monitored doorphone If enabled the access tone is heard from the doorphone when monitoring from a telephone starts aog ser MS E AX Enable WN TG Oa NEXT or PREV Prev Je Doorphone number 1 through 4 X All Default All doorphones Enable ILJ Feature References Section 3 Features Doorphone Call Room Monitor 4 80 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 70 709 708 Doorphone Ringing Time Sets the ringing time when making an intercom call from a doorphone OOS mes GEM E gt 4 sec To continue Doorphone number 1 through 4 x All dadan Default All doorphones 15 seconds mp Feature Reference Section 3 Features Doorphone Call 709 Door Opener Time Assigns the length of the door opener time The door is unlocked for the assigned period of time og seo ome 1 4 X 1 2 3 4 5 i sec efo continue NEXT or PREV ene re
61. amp 8 Ext Expansion Card KX TA62477 and 8 SLT Extn Expansion Card KX TA62474 Installing the KX TA62477 and KX TA62474 1 Install the KX TA62477 first and then the KX TA62474 g Screws 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card I KX TA62474 ay Extension Spacers Extension Connectors 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card KX TA62477 Extension Connectors Spacer Installation 2 29 2 18 i re Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Power failure transfer connects a specific single line telephone SLT to selected exchange lines in the event of system power failure as follows Exchange line 1 extension T R port 01 Exchange line 4 extension T R port 09 Connection of exchange lines 1 and 4 and the respective extensions reguire no auxiliary connection In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by a factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the Camp on Saved Number Redial Last Number Redial Call Park and Message Waiting memories The system automatically changes the current connection to the above connection when the power supply stops Proprietary telephones cannot be used during a power failure Therefore we recommend connecting SLTs in parallel with proprietary telephones connected to extension ports 01 and 09 Feature References Section 3 Features Power Failure Transfer Parallelled Telephone Connection 2 30
62. and the account code after a line access number If you want to conceal all or part of a System Speed Dialling number on the display enter I and J press the ICM button before and after the part you want to conceal Do not press the ICM button before and after a line access number 9 or 0 81 through 86 or an account code and are counted as one digit e Press or to scroll the display Rp Feature References Section 3 Features Secret Dialling System Speed Dialling 002 System Password Assigns the password required for entering the System Programming mode Also it is used to set an extension password aAA Cex M Ge so 4 digits 0000 9999 Default 1234 To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one i I Feature Reference Section 3 Features Extension Password System Password 4 6 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 003 004 003 DSS Console Port Assignment Assigns a maximum of 2 port numbers to connect the DSS console s OF e 02 16 To continue i NEXT for PREV Default All DSS consoles Disable Not stored Two DSS consoles cannot be assigned to the same port number Extension port 01 is the manager extension So please do not assign extension port 01 as the DSS console port To not assign an extension port number press the CLEAR button in the extension port number step The extensi
63. can be connected The music stops whenever a call comes in a page comes in or you go off hook Setting Cancelling When the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE MONITOR button is off Q nl e See the Installation Manual Section 3 Music on Hold Background Music BGM 1 80 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Extension Button Confirmation KX T7130 only You can confirm the values stored in the button using the LCD Checking Press the button you want to confirm REDIAL FWD DND MESSAGE co Cc Ca a LL Press Press PROGRAMMABLE Press Press Press flexible REDIAL FEATURE FWD DND MESSAGE line key DSS Console No a Cc Press DSS Press PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE e First set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off When the display exceeds 17 characters the amp mark will be displayed on the right side of the LCD After confirming the values stored in DSS buttons on the DSS Console return the MEMORY switch to the SET position N np See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Button Confirmation KX T7130 only Pulse to Tone Conversion Allows you to change the dialling mode from Pulse to Tone to access services that reguire tones such as computer based telephone services and Voice Mail Any Telephone phone no Pulse mode B desired no Tone mode Enter
64. e Call Forwarding to Exchange Line e Call Forwarding to Exchange Line 7 11 3 Line Access Code 9 or 0 or 81 86 Phone No 71413 Line Access Code 9 or 0 or 81 86 Phone No e Call Forwarding Cancel 7 1 o e Call Forwarding Cancel 7 1 0 Electronic Station Lockout Lock 7 7 Lock Code Twice Electronic Station Lockout Lock 7 7 Lock Code Twice e Electronic Station Lockout Unlock 7 7 Lock Code Electronic Station Lockout Unlock 7 7 Lock Code _ Message Waiting Set 7 0 1 Extension No e Message Waiting Set 7 0 1 Extension No e Message Waiting Cancel 7 o 2 Extension No UT e Message Waiting Cancel 7 o al Extension No IF e Do Not Disturb DND Set 7 1 4 e Do Not Disturb DND Set 7 1 e Do Not Disturb DND Cancel 7 0 e Do Not Disturb DND Cancel 7 a
65. seizing an ARS exchange line The ARS feature is enabled on an exchange line basis in program 350 ARS Selection The tone will stop after the first digit except for an account code is dialled Tonel ce a Tone2 Tone3 1 1 1 j 1 IEE sen E en Disable Tonel Tone2 Tone3 Default Tonel Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 363 ARS Interdigit Time i I Assigns the interdigit timer in seconds used while the system is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature HA heg A sons eo 1 20 Default 5 seconds This assignment should be the same as the interdigit timer assigned in program 208 Interdigit Time e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 40 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 364 364 ARS Trunk Group I Assigns trunk group s for each ARS route number Trunk groups are assigned in program 404 Trunk Group Assignment An exchange line in the assigned trunk group s is automatically seized when making an outside call using the Automatic Exchange Line Access number 9 or 0 and the dialled number is applied to one of the ARS route numbers sees sees HF teense se A NExT or PREV lt RH LA UN YA To continue Belk Es l 4 1 6 To continue SELECT lt Trunk TRK group number 1 through 6 All trunk TRK groups Defaul
66. 000 V This system should be installed with lightning protectors In addition grounding connection to earth ground is very important to protect the system 2 5 Frame Ground Connection Installation 2 1 2 7 Exchange Line Connection System Terminal Board Protective Earth Terminal padatan Frame Ground Installation Lightning 7 Protectors Aelita rie yn Sart eet ee se Ground CO Exchange line EXTN Extension line TEL Telephone Outside Installation If you install an extension outside of the main building the following precautions are recommended 1 Install the extension wire underground 2 Use a conduit to protect the wire Main Building Protectors CO Another Building le sr Man co Main EXTN PT Distribution Unit Frame EXTN Lightning Protector EXTN EXTN TEL TEL Earth Note The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO 2 8 Installation 2 7 Exchange Line Connection Installation of an Earth Rod Lightning Protectors Grounding Wire Underground Rod 1 Installation location of the earth rod Near the protector 2 Check obstructions None 3 Composition of the earth rod Metal 4 Depth of the earth rod More than 50 cm 5 Size of the grounding
67. 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Default Vv Change Programming Tables 7 9 7 Programming Tables 302 Call Barring Class 2 Denied Codes CODE no 303 Call Barring 304 Call Barring 305 Call Barring Class 3 Denied Codes Class 4 Denied Codes Class 5 Denied Codes Telephone no 11 digits Default All Not stored 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 7 10 Programming Tables Programming Tables 306 Call Barring Exception Codes Code no Telephone no 11 digits Code no Telephone no 11 digits Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 05 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 35 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 25 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 75 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 Programming Tables 7 11 7 Programming Tables 309 Emergency Dial Number Set CODE no Emergency no 11 digits max Default Code 01 999 Code 02 112 Other codes Not stored 1 2 3 4
68. 14 414 for day 15 415 for night 16 416 for lunch Exchange Line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All exchange lines Normal 4 50 System Programming 4 2 i System Programming 414 417 e You must select DISA 1 when the optional OGM FAX Detection card is not installed and if you want to use the internal DISA When you select UCD assign program 520 UCD Group to determine which extension group is assigned to the UCD group e When you select DISA1 DISA and or UCD assign program 502 OGM Mode Selection to determine which OGM will be used e Feature References Section 3 Features Direct In Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Outgoing Message OGM Uniform Call Distribution UCD 417 Pause Time Assigns the length of the pause time The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access code a host PBX access code programmed in 403 Host PBX Access Codes or a pause code assigned in 311 Automatic Pause Insertion Codes or can be manually inserted by the user using the PAUSE button gf cena eta cnn PE pete aE ET To continue 4 4 7 next sevect store 1 6 1 5 2 5 t 3 5 4 5 sec To continue SELECT Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines
69. 2 LN 1 Y IN 2 A Conference with two exchange lines CO 3 Free LN 3 Libre Called by Callback when free Exchange line recall Conference Conferencia Confirming key programming on the Conference button CO in Use LN en Uso The selected exchange line is busy CO Not Assigned LN No Asignada The desired exchange line is not available not assigned CW CO Off Desact Call Waiting disabled for outside calls CW CO On LN Activa Call Waiting enabled for outside calls CW Ext Off Desact Call Waiting disabled for intercom calls CW Ext On LE Ext Activa Call Waiting enabled for intercom calls Data Mode Off Modo Data Off Data Line Security is turned off Data Mode On Modo Data Act Data Line Security is turned on Day Mode Day mode status Time Day Night Lunch Service Do Not Disturb No molester Confirming the key programming on the FWD DND button Do Not Disturb DND has been set 2 8 Appendix 2 4 Display Example ENGLISH DISPLAY D Opener 1 On SPANISH DISPLAY Abrepuerta 1 Act DESCRIPTION Door 1 released Door Phone 1 Interfono I Making or receiving a doorphone call Ext201 amp CO 1 Ext201 Y LN 1 Conference with an extension and exchange line Ext201 amp Ext202 Ext201 Y Ex
70. 2 While Connecting If an extension does not operate properly disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on again The system is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug Exchange lines should be installed with lightning protectors For details refer to Section 2 7 Exchange Line Connection Installing Lightning Protectors Warning Static sensitive devices are used To protect printed circuit boards from static electricity do not touch connectors indicated to the left To discharge body static Side View touch ground or wear a grounding strap Warning Static sensitive connectors Installation 2 3 22 Unpack the box and check the items below 23 Protective Earth Terminal Unpacking Main Unit 1 Music Source Connector i AC Cord Order No POJPIE1Z Order No PSWAT206E 1 Installation Manual i Telephone Line Cords IDDU 2 conductor wiring 3 Operating Instructions 1 Order No PSJA1066Z Order No PSQX1709Y Telephone Line Cords Operating Instructions for 4 conductor wiring 8 the Caller ID Card 1 Order No PQJA151Z Order No PSQX1744Y Screws Wall Mounting 3 SLT
71. 3 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 00 0 ceeeeeeeeescecseeceseeeseeeeneecnaeceseeeses 3 3 Automatic Callback Busy Camp O ceeeeesceseeseeeneeseseeneeeees 3 4 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number 9 9 999 999 199 999 ne 3 4 Automatic Route Selection ARS ueeeeeeer I Finn 3 5 Busy Extension Signalling ccccccccsssssesseccssssscssssnesensscessccessceeenaes 3 10 Call ammod GY oa se Aa YD OY FN 3 11 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class eee 3 13 Call Barring for System Speed Dialling ee eeeeeeereeeneeeees 3 13 Call Barring Override by Account Codes 0 ceeceeeeceeeeeeeeceteeeeeeeees 3 14 Call BOrwardinng FR FFR RCH THY 3 15 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection e9 99 nennnnn 3 15 cC UP AME a y a MA ANSP aA it A 3 16 Call ACI 6 Y y Y ON GR Du gn A Ru 3 17 Call pH ui es RE GRUG dd GY UO 3 17 a Prj Contents Call Transfer to Exchange Line c ccssssscsssssesensnesssectecsaseeenseees 3 18 Call Transfer to Extension ue au eu Y do i Go 3 18 ein RT RO ec y RHI RW CN Y 3 19 Conference 3 patty de Gw Gedy GYN A a alee 3 20 Conference 2Darty i YY HR gywydd FY FYR dr Ood 3 21 Data Lime Security daid n FFF pd CYN FN Bn ode eee 3 21 Dat eand Time Sete ic o yd dd O UN GN 3 22 Dir ectIn Cime DU a y o Fw O a 3 22 Direct Inward System Access DISA 9e eee neenneinnennnennninnieo 3 22 Display Contrast
72. 5 9 5 10 Appendix Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 While Installing PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE Extension does not operate POSSIBLE SOLUTION Something is wrong with the printed circuit board Extension Card Something is wrong with the connection between the system and extension A telephone with an A A1 relay is connected Something is wrong with the extension Exchange the printed circuit board with another printed circuit board Take the extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord If the telephone works correctly the connection between the system and the extension must be repaired Use a 2 wire cord Set the A A1 relay switch on the telephone to the OUT or OFF position Take the extension and plug it into another extension port that is working If the telephone does not work replace the phone Improper reset operation Turn the Power Switch OFF and then ON Noise during external paging Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier A short shielded cable is recommended Volume distortion from external music source Excessive input level from external music source Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source Speed Dialling or One Touch
73. 877 467 disregarded applied to the call barring and ARS Default All codes Not stored x press the PAUSE button substitutes any number wild card a To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class Assigns the call barring class for System Speed Dialling numbers System Speed Dialling numbers can be assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialling Entry DAN Cex fees so oe Class 1 5 Boundary Class 1 through 5 Default Boundary Class 1 rep Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring for System Speed Dialling 4 32 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 302 305 302 305 Call Barring Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes Assigns up to 20 toll call numbers which are restricted to make outside calls on a class of service COS basis for each program fateh eee eee eg NEXT or PREV iS Ju FR mf Y dT md Fd gn J To continue EA ror stone eno 01 20 11 digits g 0 9 X eTo continue f X Program address selection number 2 302 for Class 2 3 303 for Class 3 4 304 for Class 4 5 305 for Class 5 Default All codes Not stored e x press the PAUSE button substitutes any number wild card Each phone number should consist of 11 digits i To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new
74. 9 DSS Console Features Day Night and Lunch Buttons Assignment Operator Manager only You can assign a DSS button as a Day Night or Lunch button Simply pressing the assigned button sets the day night or lunch mode DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL STORE Press the desired DSS button For Day mode Dial 4 Press AUTO DIAL STORE For Night mode Dial 5 For Lunch mode Dial 6 ll See the Installation Manual Section 3 Time Day Night Lunch Service Extension Lock Button Assignment Operator Manager only You can assign the Extension Lock button to a DSS button for the remote extension lock control feature PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone l E prenel d BW pene Repeat these steps AUTO DIAL i to program numbers STORE for other DSS buttons Press the desired Enter the desired Press AUTO DIAL STORE DSS button extension number To clear a button PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone AUTO DIAL cc 2 T STORE Press the DSS or PF button Press AUTO DIAL STORE which you wish to cancel The number is cancelled 1 100 Operations 1 9 DSS Console Features e DSS buttons can be changed to any of the following function buttons a Another DSS Button Every DSS button can be assigned to another extension number b One Touch Dialling Button c Day Button Operator M
75. Any Telephone 2 N Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR i If you do not answer within 4 callback ring signals within 10 seconds this feature will be M cancelled IL e See the Installation Manual Section 3 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 1 30 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Extension Allows you to connect to an existing intercom extension call System Programming is reguired to use this feature Any Telephone If you make an intercom call and while hearing a busy tone My qe A three party conference 3 is now established Confirmation tone optional To leave the conference Any Telephone y The other two parties Gba continue their conversation Hang up or press SP PHONE To terminate one party and talk to the other co INTERCOM A or Press the line key or INTERCOM Confirmation tone optional to which you wish to remain connected e If all three parties are extensions this operation is not possible This feature does not work when Data Line Security or Executive Busy Override Deny is set at either or both of the other parties When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call or vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all parties The tone can be disabled I L 1 3 Making Calls Denying Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Over
76. Black Green Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 KX T30865 KX T30865 4 conductor wiring gt is required Black Green Doorphone 3 KX T30865 Doorphone 4 KX T30865 Installation 2 23 2 16 _ Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Connecting Door Openers 1 While pressing the button below a hole with a screw driver insert the wire from the door opener into the hole Door opener 1 y Door opener 2 Door opener 3 2 Wrap the strap around all of the cords mw 2 20 Securing the Cords We recommend using the wire 0 4 mm 1 2 mm or the equivalent for wiring a The wire should be under 3 0 mm in diameter including the coating Door Opener ports are at SELV D 0 4 mm 1 2 mm D Under 3 0 mm IEN Required System Programming Section 4 System Programming 700 702 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 703 705 Door Opener Assignment Day Night Lunch Feature References Section 3 Features Door Opener Doorphone Call 2 24 Installation 2 17 Installing a 3 CO Line amp 8 Ext Expansion Card KX TA62477 and 8 SLT Extn Expansion Card KX TA62474 3 CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card Installation KX TA62477 To add 3 exchange lines exchange lines 4 through 6 and 8 extensions extension ports 09 through 16 use an optional 3
77. CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card KX TA62477 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card Installation KX TA62474 To add 8 extensions extension ports 17 through 24 use an optional 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card KX TA62474 This card can be installed directly to the system or to the KX TA62477 Only a single line telephone SLT can be connected to extension ports 17 through 24 a Installing the KX TA62477 1 Loosen the screws and open the top and bottom front covers 2 Remove the lower front panel with a suitable tool as shown below Cut the 6 areas marked with a circle Installation 2 25 2 17 Installing a 3 CO Line amp 8 Ext Expansion Card KX TA62477 and 8 SLT Extn Expansion Card KX TA62474 3 After cutting the areas be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth 4 First insert the plastic spacer into the hole on the KX TA62477 Attach the 2 extension connectors to the system install the KX TA62477 and secure the 2 extension spacers Extension Spacers 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card KX TA62477 Caller ID Card Connector a Aet acer Extension Connectors Sp 2 26 Installation 2 17 Installing a 3 CO Line amp 8 Ext Expansion Card KX TA62477 and 8 SLT Extn Expansion Card KX TA62474 5 Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 2 conductor wiring into the ports CO 4 through 6 on the card 2 7 Exchange Line Conne
78. Calling Party s Display Absent Message Capability 3 2 Features 3 Features A Account Code Entry An account code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the SMDR call record For incoming outside calls an account code is optional For outgoing outside calls there are 4 account input modes programmable in program 605 Option Forced Verify All and Verify Toll Option A 4 digit code may be entered during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation when a record is needed Forced A 4 digit code must be entered within 5 seconds after an exchange line is seized The code can be any number Verify All Enables to make an outside call if the code entered within 5 seconds after an extension user seizes an exchange line is the same as one of the account codes programmed in 310 Verify Toll Enables to override call barring temporarily by entering one of the account codes programmed in 310 within 5 seconds after an exchange line is seized Calls with COS numbers 3 through 5 will be treated as calls with COS number 2 Calls with COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be affected IZ Required System Programming 310 Account Codes 601 603 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Day Night Lunch 605 Account Code Entry Mode 805 SMDR Account Code Selection Related Feature References Station Message Detail Recordin
79. Dial Mode 513 Cyclic Tone Detection 514 FAX Tone Detection 516 DISA Incoming Assignment To set DISA timer values 504 DISA Delayed Answer Time 505 DISA Waiting Time after OGM 517 DISA AA Wait Time 519 DISA OGM Mute Time To enable the Intercept Routing feature 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 507 DISA Intercept Mode 508 DISA Ringing Time before Intercept 509 DISA Ringing Time after Intercept 515 Intercept Time for Internal DISA Related Feature References Extension Hunting Intercept Routing Outgoing Message OGM Features 3 23 D 3 DISA Operation Calling an extension by following the outgoing message from an External Party h h per na Enter the DISA phone number Ringback tone and Enter the extension number Ring back tone DISA outgoing message e You can dial the AA number instead Calling an extension without an outgoing message Internal DISA from an External Party h hi eh na Enter the DISA phone number Ringback tone Enter the extension number Ring back tone and one short beep e You can dial the AA number instead Features AA number A DISA built in auto attendant number assigned in program 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant 3 24 Features 3 Features Flow chart of possible cases and results for DISA calls An exchange line call is made il The c
80. E re 9 a a ae Lift the handset or press Dial 33 Confirmation tone Announce Wait for Talk SP PHONE MONITOR an answer e You may dial 339 instead of 33 If the pager is in use a busy tone will be heard The paged extension users hear a splash tone before the voice announcement You will hear a splash tone from the external pager External Pager Confirmation Tone at the paged side before the voice announcement The tone can be disabled You will hear a confirmation tone before making the voice announcement More than one person cannot use the paging feature at the same time You cannot page extensions which have set the DND or Paging Deny feature or which are in use N _ 1 7 Useful Features Rejecting Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND See the Installation Manual Section 3 Paging a Answering a Page Allows you to answer an announced page at any extension within the system Any Telephone my N Lift the handset or press Dial 43 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR e You will hear a confirmation tone when the page is answered PT If an outside call has been paged and transferred you can answer the call by pressing the corresponding line key whose indicator is flashing slowly i Operations 1 49 suoneuodo oiseg 1 5 During a Conversation Transferring after paging Paging and Transfer You can transfer a call using the paging function
81. EP See the Installation Manual Section 3 Absent Message Capability 1 58 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Conference 3 party During a 2 party conversation you can add a third party to make a 3 party conference The maximum number of extensions and exchange lines in a conference can be changed by System Programming Establishing a conference During a 2 party conversation Mp CONF Co CONF Ji A 3 party conference I phone no ae aq is now established Press CONF Enter the phone Talk to the Press CONF Confirmation number of the third party tone optional third party The CONF indicator light turns steady red The corresponding line ley or INTERCOM indicator light turns green You must dial the line access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 as the first digit when calling an external party The current party is placed on hold The CONF indicator light flashes red slowly During a 2 party conversation A 3 party conference f a i me 2 GOG noain Press Enter the phone number Talk tothe Press Dial 3 Confirmation Recall of the third party third party Recall tone optional e You must dial the line access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 as the first digit when calling an external party The other party is placed on hold Operations 1 59 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features To leave the conference Any telephone y G
82. Exchange Line O CO wv wv wv wv wv wv wv wv Trunk Group G CO MESSAGE Message Waiting Day Night Lunch Extension Lock Wf indicates that the feature is available I e Operating Instructions Reference 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Features 3 39 H 3 Features Handsfree Answerback Allows a proprietary telephone with a speakerphone to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset This feature performed by pressing the AUTO ANSWER MUTE button This feature does not work for incoming outside calls or doorphone calls a IEN Operating Instructions Reference 1 4 Receiving Calls Handsfree Answerback Handsfree Operation Allows a proprietary telephone user to dial and talk to the other party without lifting the handset Pressing one of the following buttons activates the handsfree mode when the SP PHONE MONITOR button indicator is off SP PHONE button MONITOR button INTERCOM button or line key The KX T7050 can perform handsfree dialling operations etc but cannot have a a handsfree conversation in Operating Instructions Reference 1 3 Making Calls Handsfree Operation lt Call Hold gt Allows an extension user to place an intercom and or outside call on hold The held call can be retrieved by the user who held it or by any other extension Call Hold Retrieve With a sing
83. Hang up or press and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR The assigned button indicator turns on ay pi b 4 gt AWE cha Lift the handset or press Dial 780 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Confirming the current mode with a display PT only When the telephone is idle B The display shows the current mode for 3 seconds Press suoneiedo ejosuo9 SSA Operations 1 95 Jobeueg 10 e19dO 1 8 in Operator Manager Service Features The day night lunch mode can be changed either automatically at a predetermined time default 9 00 a m for every day 5 30 p m for every night or manually at any time by System Programming Even if the automatic mode has been selected by System Programming the operator or manager can change the day night and lunch modes manually The following programs have separate day night and lunch programming 1 Delayed Ringing Assignment 2 Door Opener Assignment 3 Doorphone Ringing Assignment 4 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment 5 Flexible Ringing Assignment 6 Exchange Line Mode 7 Call Barring Class of Service COS Assignment If the lunch mode is set using feature number 783 in the automatic mode the mode will not be changed until the lunch mode is cancelled using feature number 780 The day and night modes are automatically changed at the programmed time even if feature number 780ff is not entered Feature nu
84. Hie Extension Reverse the connections of A B Connection between the Local Exchange and the system CAUSE Exchange lines are connected to H L e qe A B Exchange line o o b KX TA624 SOLUTION Reconnect the exchange lines to A B using 2 conductor wiring Troubleshooting 6 3 6 3 While Operating PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION When using the speakerphone with a proprietary telephone KX T7130 nothing is heard The HANDSET HEADSET selector on the KX T7130 is set to the HEADSET position Set the HANDSET HEADSET selector to the HANDSET position The unit does not ring The Ringer Volume Selector is set to OFF Set to HIGH or LOW During a power failure the extension connected to port number 01 or 09 does not operate A proprietary telephone is connected to the port Disconnect the proprietary telephone and connect a single line telephone Making an outside call cannot be performed The corresponding line key does not exist on the proprietary telephone Program the line key See the Flexible Button Assignment Operating Instructions 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone A tone type single line telephone SLT user cannot make a call There may be something wrong with a DTMF rec
85. If Hold 2 or Hold 3 is assigned in System Programming you must dial 50 after pressing the Recall button 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone CONF Conference Button 1 3 Making Calls Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Extension Executive Busy Override Exchange Line See the Installation Manual Section 3 Conference 3 party Operations 1 61 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Conference 5 party Allows you to establish a 5 party conference The members of a conference may be up to 5 extensions or 3 extensions and 2 exchange lines Establishing a conference phone no z CONF de qa Lift the handset or Dial 22x Enter the phone number Talk to the Press CONF press SP PHONE MONITOR of the first party first party The CONF indicator flashes red slowly The current call is placed on hold in the parking zone automatically Repeat these steps phone no 2 a5 a A 5 party conference is now established Enter the phone number Talk Press CONF Press CONF of the next party The CONF indicator turns on red The current call is placed on hold in the parking zone automatically 1 62 Operations 1 7 Useful Features To change to a 5 party conference during a 3 party conference During a 3 party conversation c gt 2 L phon
86. Instructions Reference 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Operator Call N eS Allows an extension user to call an operator within the system by dialling the feature number assigned in program 121 One extension can be assigned as the operator in program 008 If an operator is not assigned this feature is not available and a reorder tone will be heard Every extension user can reach the operator just by dialling the operator call number 0 or 9 assigned in program 121 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection Reguired System Programming 008 Operator Assignment 121 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection Related Feature Reference Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Operating Instructions Reference 1 3 Making Calls Calling an Operator Operator Call Features 3 47 O 3 Features Outgoing Message OGM Allows the extension assigned as an operator or manager to record up to 2 outgoing voice messages maximum 30 seconds each This message is played when a caller accesses the DISA or UCD feature An optional OGM FAX Detection Card is required to program the OGM The following are some examples of OGM and flow chart Case 1 Receives 2 calls at a time OGM for DISA Do not want customers to be kept waiting Outside Call To the designated destination To the designated destination Outside Call OGM1 This is A comp
87. International call using Route 2 trunk group number 1 lt Dialled number gt lt Modified number gt 9 00 44 1344 853941 mFFFFRFEFSE 1620 201 00 44 1344 853941 Example 7 Mobile telephone call using Route 3 trunk group number 2 lt Dialled number gt lt Modified number gt 9 07979 123456 m 07979 123456 System Programming is reguired to execute this feature If an extension user makes an outside call using the Automatic Line Access number 9 or 0 and the dialled number does not apply to any numbers assigned in programs 351 354 an exchange line which has selected Enable in program 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access is automatically seized Reguired System Programming 350 ARS Selection 351 354 Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes Leading Digits 355 358 Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes 359 1st Carrier Selection Code BT Line Access Code 360 ARS Modification Removed Digits 361 ARS Modification Added Number 362 ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection 363 ARS Interdigit Time 364 ARS Trunk Group 381 384 Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes 385 388 Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment Features 3 7 A 3 Features Flow chart of possible cases and results for ARS calls ual Is another 1 digit dialled within the ARS Interdigit Time No Each time a digit is dialled the system checks the Yes Reorder to
88. MODE is selected in program 110 and the RECALL button is pressed for longer than the time programmed in 418 this feature will not work The recall time must be assigned in program 418 as reguired by the host PBX or exchange line Reguired System Programming 110 Recall Key Mode 418 Recall Time Related Feature References Host PBX Access Recall Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features External Feature Access 3 38 Features 3 Features F Flexible Buttons A proprietary telephone PT user can change the flexible buttons on the telephone and DSS console to certain function buttons For example if the telephone has more line keys than available exchange lines the unused line keys may be changed to One Touch Dialling buttons etc The 4 types of flexible buttons are as follows Flexible line keys located on a PT only Flexible DSS Buttons located on a DSS Console only Programmable Feature PF Buttons located on a PT and DSS Console Flexible MESSAGE Buttons Check the required operation first If the telephone is not provided with the button assigning the button can be performed in the Proprietary Telephone Settings Programmable Button DSS PF wv wv wv Function S DSS Direct Station Selection One Touch Dialling CONF Conference FWD DND Forward Do Not Disturb SAVE Log In Log Out Single Exchange Line S CO Other
89. Not Disturb DND Cancel 1 0 PLACE FOR OTHER FEATURES PLACE FOR OTHER FEATURES EXTENSION PROGRAMMMING SETTING EXTENSION PROGRAMMMING SETTING e Personal Speed Dialling Store e Personal Speed Dialling Store 2 x Personal Speed Dial No 0 9 Phone No 2 x Personal Speed Dial No 0 9 Phone No e Call Waiting Outside calls Set 7 31111 e Call Waiting Outside calls Set 7 3 1 1 F Cancel 7 3 4 0 Cancel 7 3 1 0 e Call Waiting Intercom calls Set 7 3 2 1 e Call Waiting Intercom calls Set 7 3 2 1 Cancel 7 3 2 0 Cancel 7 3 2 0 e Call Forwarding All Calls 7 1 1 Extension No e Call Forwarding All Calls 7 1 L1 Extension No e Call Forwarding Busy No Answer 7 1 2 Extension No e Call Forwarding Busy No Answer 7 1 2 Extension No
90. Override Deny set cancel 733 O 1 Extension Number 200 299 External Feature Access 6 Log In Log Out 736 O 1 Message Waiting set cancel 70 1 EXTN 2 EXTN Message Waiting cancel all messages 70 O Operator Call 0 Outward Dialling Line Access Automatic 9 Line Access Trunk Group 8 1 6 1 Dial after dialling the TAM s extension number and hearing busy tone 2 4 Appendix 2 3 Feature Number List FEATURE NUMBER ADDITIONAL REOUIRED DIGITS Paging All extensions amp External 33 or 9 Paging External 34 Paging All extensions Group 33 0 1 8 Paging Answer 43 Paging Deny set cancel 734 1 0 Personal Speed Dialling 1X or 0 9 Personal Speed Dialling store 2x 0 9 phone no Personal Speed Dialling confirm 3x 0 9 Pickup Dialling Hot Line assign set cancel 74 2 phone no 1 0 for an SLT Redial Last Number for an SLT or 80 Room Monitor set cancel 735 1 0 Extension Feature Clear 79 System Speed Dialling for an SLT x 00 99 Timed Reminder set 76 hhmm 0 1 1 2 Timed Reminder cancel confirm 76 2 34 Timed Reminder Remote cancel 764 EXTN 762 Timed Reminder Remote check 764 EXTN 763 Timed Reminder Remote set 764 EXTN 76 hhmm 0 1 1 2 Time Service set cancel 78 1 3 0 Voice Mail Integration set cancel 719 1 2 0 Walking CO
91. This data is not deleted even when the system is reset If RECALL is manually sent out during a conversation to make another call without hanging up etc a call record will be printed and a new record started F will be printed at the beginning of the dial number on the new record When a host PBX code is entered will be printed between the code and dialled number The language used for an SMDR printout can be selected in program 806 nl Connection Reference 2 13 Printer and PC Connection Reguired System Programming 000 Date and Time Setting 204 Call Duration Count Start Time 800 SMDR RS 232C Communication Parameters 801 SMDR Parameter 802 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing 803 Secret Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling Printing 804 System Data Dump 805 SMDR Account Code Selection 806 SMDR Language Assignment Related Feature Reference Language Selection System Data Default Set This system can re initialise the system programmed data If all the programmed data is cleared the system will reset using the default settings by program 999 J The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5 1 Default Values a np Reguired System Programming 999 System Data Clear Installation Reference 2 23 System Data Clear 3 64 Features Features S T System Speed Dialling i The system supports 100 System Speed Dial numbers up to 32 di
92. User Guide 2 Order No POHE5004Z Order No PSOX1753Z Washers Wall Mounting 3 System Clear Leaflet i Order No XWG35FY Order No PSQW1412Y Pager Connector i Feature Number Leaflet i Order No PQJP1E1Z Order No PSQW1472Y Optional Cards For your reference KX TA62460 KX TA62474 KX TA62477 Screws Order No XYN3 F12FN Screws Order No XYN3 F8 Extension Bolts Order No PSHE1051Z Terminal Boxes Order No POJS1T30Z Extension Connectors Order No PSJP36A67Z Extension Connectors Order No PSJP36A67Z Telephone Line Cords 4 conductor wiring Order No PQJA48W Names and Locations Extension Ports Exchange Line Ports Power Switch 4 N N AC Inlet Spacer Order No PSHR1172Z Strap for cables Power Indicator Paging Port External Music Port Serial Interface RS 232C Side View 2 4 Installation 2 4 Wall Mounting This set is designed for wall mounting only The wall where the main unit is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the main unit If screws other than the ones supplied are used use screws with the same diameter as the ones enclosed Mounting on a Wooden Wall 1 Place the template on the last page on the wall to mark the screw positions Template tme 9 2 Install the screws included into the wall Drive the screw to this position
93. Using Individual Line Access Allows you to select the desired exchange line without dialling the line access code h _ oy co J o y yN o y chs Lift the handset Press the line key Dialtone Enter the phone number Talk Hang up or press or press assigned as a Single SP PHONE SP PHONE MONITOR Exchange Line key The display shows the phone number e The line key turns green I PT You may skip off hook and press the Single Exchange Line S CO key directly 1 18 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Making Outside Calls Using Individual Trunk Group Access Allows you to select an idle line within a designated trunk group Through System Programming exchange lines can be divided into 6 line groups PT and SLT co For a PT lp i i p 9 8 A For an SLT y a Gn Lift the handset For a PT Press the key assigned as Dialtone Enter the Talk Hang up or press the Trunk Group key phone number or press SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial 8 and the trunk group SP PHONE number 1 through 6 The display shows the phone number The line key turns green PT You may press the Trunk Group key directly without going off hook i Recall Allows you to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up While hearing any tone dialing or talking h K RECALL di y DYDY Press RECALL Dial tone Enter the phone number l System
94. YF 1 37 Call Splitting iei YG id WYF GG FFF Ri 1 47 Call Transf r sorcier 1 102 Call Transfer to Exchange Line 1 44 Call Transfer to Extension e e 1 42 Call Waititigious iiid sitions lean i FU GYT 1 45 Call Waiting Tone Selection oe 1 7 Camp On Automatic Callback Busy 1 30 Cancelling Alarm Setting Timed Reminder 1 72 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 1 30 BOM oss cascciescesedscestiersetecesesseesbienecarseasseescs 1 80 Call Forwarding 0 ee eeeeeeseeseceseceseeees 1 56 Call Pickup Deny cece eeeeseceseeeeeeees 1 37 Call Waiting G Fd dden 1 45 Data Line Security 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 1 77 Do Not Disturb DND c eee eeeeeees 1 69 Electronic Extension Lockout 1 91 Executive Busy Override Deny 1 33 Extension Feature Clear e 1 82 Handsfree Answerback nneseen 1 35 Message Waiting 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeseceteeeeeees 1 65 Microphone Mute 0 cece eeeeeceseeeeeeees 1 51 Pickup Dialling ias Hin Fns 1 26 Room Monitor 0 ec eeeceeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeees 1 76 Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting 1 95 Timed Reminder Remote 1 92 Voice Mail Integration eee 1 86 Checking Alarm Setting Timed Reminder 1 73 Extension Button 0 cceceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 81 Message Waiting eeeeeeesseeseceseeeeeeees 1 66 Personal Speed Dialling e
95. answer the page Answering a Page from any extension within the system The following types are available All Extensions Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built in speakers of proprietary telephones Group Makes a voice announcement to the designated extension group over the built in speakers of proprietary telephones An extension group is assigned in program 600 Extension Group Assignment External Makes a voice announcement over the external pager All Extensions amp Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built in External speakers of proprietary telephones and the external pager J An extension user can also transfer a call after paging Paging and Transfer Also pages can be denied Paging Deny An external pager user supplied must be connected beforehand One external pager can be connected to the system A confirmation tone is sent to the extensions before the voice announcement or answering A confirmation tone is sent to the external pager before the voice announcement The tone to the external pager can be disabled in program 106 An extension which has set the Do Not Disturb DND or Paging Deny feature or is in use cannot be paged IF Connection Reference 2 9 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection Required System Programming 106 External Paging Access Tone Related Feature References Extension Group Do Not Disturb DND Operating Instr
96. assigned in program 357 Route 3 Exception Codes Route 4 selection codes are assigned in program 354 Route 4 Selection Codes Leading Digits Route 4 exception codes are assigned in program 358 Route 4 Exception Codes The system repeats checking until 7 digits are dialled Features 3 9 B 3 Features Busy Extension Signalling When an extension user calls a busy extension the busy extension will hear a Call Waiting tone to know that a call is waiting J This feature is only available if the called extension has set the Call Waiting feature If the Call Waiting feature is activated the caller will hear a ringback tone If not the caller will hear a reorder tone IZ Related Feature Reference Call Waiting Operating Instructions Reference 1 3 Making Calls Sending a Call Waiting Tone to a Busy Extension Busy Extension Signalling She is on the line will send a Call Waiting tone I ve got another call Please hold 3 10 Features 3 Features C Call Barring I Call Barring is a system programmable feature that can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorised toll calls Every extension is programmed to belong to one of 5 classes of service COS Each COS is programmed to have a call barring class for day mode night mode and lunch mode There are 5 call barring COS numbers available Call barring COS number 1 is the highest class and the COS
97. buttons can be assigned to flexible buttons in the Proprietary Telephone Settings An account code can be stored into a One Touch Dialling button A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it in 2 One Touch Dialling buttons I np Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone One Touch Dialling button 1 3 Making Calls Dialling by Simply Pressing a Button One Touch Dialling 1 9 DSS Console Features Initial Settings 1 9 DSS Console Features One Touch Dialling 1 9 DSS Console Features One Touch Access for System Features 3 46 Features Features O Operator Manager Extension The system supports one operator Any extension can be designated as an operator in program 008 Extension port 01 is the system manager extension The extension assigned as an operator or manager has the ability to perform the following operations Setting the Date and Time Cancelling the Electronic Extension Lockout Setting Cancelling the Remote Extension Lock Setting Cancelling Confirming the Timed Reminder Wake up Call Remotely Recording and Playing the Outgoing Message Changing the Day Night Lunch Mode The manager extension can also perform System Programming and the following operation Setting the Extension Password Required System Programming 008 Operator Assignment Operating
98. coe go Ga eect iad lance en Hele FO 3 65 T Timed Reminder Su ee Od Yd Aes 3 65 Time Day Night Lunch Service escesccesseeeeseteeeeetseesoneeseeeeees 3 66 U _ Uniform Call Distribution UCD eueeeueueeeee I I HN 3 67 V Voice Mail Integration for KX TVPl100 eee eeeneieneiineenieeneunn 3 71 Vol m Contr l cau etek seh a ADN I YA AND ales 3 74 MW Werle co un a on GA GU ID GYN 3 74 Section 4 System Programming 4 1 Before System Programming ccsssccssssccssssccssscccsssscssssccsssssssoeses 4 2 4 2 System Programming ccccccccocssssssssssssssssscsssscssssesssscesssssesssssscssesecs 4 5 000 Date and Time Setting uu ludd ad GW Y UU CD oY 4 5 001 System Speed Dialling Entry 2 0 0 ee eeeceeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 002 System Password a sg O Fd Y Fa go 4 6 003 DSS Console Port Assignment eeeeeeceeceereeceeeeeeeneeeeeaes 4 7 004 Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console 4 7 005 One Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button 9e 9e een 4 8 006 Time Day Night Lunch Service Changing Mode 4 8 007 Time Day Night Lunch Service Start Time 4 9 008 Operator Assignment 9 29472222278592 88 889 88 mn nn 4 9 009 Extension Number Assignment cc ceeeececeereeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 10 010 LCD Time Display Selection cee eeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeteeeenteeeenes 4 11 011
99. directly to the wall Installation 2 21 2 16 _ Doorphone and Door Opener Connection 3 Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover To the terminal box q 4 Put the doorphone together and re install the screw Doorphone Door Opener Installation Attach the optional Doorphone Door Opener Card to the main unit connect the cord to the Doorphone Door Opener Card Connector and secure the screw Doorphone Connectors Screw a rp Door Opener Terminal Doorphone Door Opener Card KX TA62460 2 22 Installation 2 16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Wiring of the Doorphone 1 Connect the Doorphone Door Opener Card to the terminal boxes using 4 conductor modular connectors 2 Connect the wires of doorphones and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box 3 Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal box Va View of Doorphone Connector Port Doorphone 2 Doorphone gt r Hu Doorphone 4 Doorphone 3 N S
100. exchange line according to this assignment UCD END is automatically used when UCD is assigned in programs 414 416 Disconnect is selected in program 523 UCD Busy Mode and MODE4 is selected in this program DISA is automatically used when UCD is assigned in programs 414 416 Intercept is selected in program 523 and MODE6 is selected in this program If the optional OGM FAX Detection card is not installed this assignment should be MODE I LES e Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Outgoing Message OGM Uniform Call Distribution UCD System Programming 4 59 503 505 4 2 System Programming 503 FAX Connection Assigns one extension which can receive facsimile data when the system receives a FAX CNG tone via the DISA feature OOS mer SN co 5 O1 24 Default Disable Not assigned l e The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set a To unassign an extension port number press the CLEAR button in the extension port number step EES e Feature References Section 3 Features Data Line Security Direct Inward System Access DISA 504 DISA Delayed Answer Time Sets the time from a call being received and answered with the DISA feature FOE Ge es so se 0 3 6 12 sec Default 3 seconds n gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Ac
101. for KX TVP100 System Programming 4 15 103 4 2 System Programming 103 DTMF Integration for KX TVP100 Enables or disables the system to send codes DTMF signals to the extension s assigned as the Voice Mail Port in program 102 Voice Mail Port These DTMF signals indicate the state of the call busy answered ringing disconnected etc in addition to the normal call tones They also enable the Panasonic Voice Processing System VPS equipment KX TVP100 to immediately recognise the current state of the call and speed up the call handling 200 A ea res so Default El Disable Enable Disable The table on next page describes the codes DTMF signals call state and conditions for the DTMF integration operation Select Plan 1 or Plan 2 in program 009 Extension Number Assignment and select Enable in this program to enable the DTMF integration This feature greatly improves the performance of the Panasonic KX TVP100 Voice Processing Systems which have been programmed for Inband Signalling For more information about Inband Signalling refer to your Voice Processing System manual n gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 DTMF signals Code Call State Conditions 1 Ringback Tone When an extension a VPS has dialled is ringing 2 Busy Tone When an extension a VPS has dialled is busy 3 Re
102. in the day night and or lunch modes If the destination extension is in an extension group which has enabled the Extension Hunting feature in program 100 Hunting Group Set Extension Hunting Terminate or Circular in program 101 Hunting Type works when the extension is busy Reguired System Programming 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch Related Feature References Extension Hunting Time Day Night Lunch Service Direct Inward System Access DISA Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system The caller can have direct access to features such as Placing an incoming call to an extension extension group or operator The caller also has the option of dialling the route for an extension using a 1 digit number DISA built in auto attendant number via DISA calls The DISA feature operates without an optional card installed If an outgoing message OGM which greets a caller and gives information or fax detection is reguired an optional OGM FAX Detection Card must be installed The system can detect a FAX CNG tone according to program 514 An OGM can be programmed in program 502 Outgoing Message OGM in this section When a caller reaches a DISA line a message will greet the caller Two different DISA messages can be recorded by the operator or manager For example one message can be used in day mode and the o
103. members of a conference can be programmed in program 116 d The possible combinations through System Programming are 3 extensions 1 extension F and 2 external parties or 2 extensions and 1 external party e When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call or vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all 3 parties The tone can be disabled by program 105 A 3 party call can also be established by the Executive Busy Override feature IEN Required System Programming 105 Conference Tone 116 Conference Pattern Selection 606 Call Transfer to an Exchange Line Related Feature References Executive Busy Override e Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone CONF Conference Button 1 7 Useful Features Conference 3 party 3 20 Features 3 Features C D Conference 5 party Allows an extension user to establish a 5 party conference when 5 party C 2 E 5 is selected in program 116 J Up to 2 external parties can participate in a conference call All 5 parties can be extensions Only one 5 party conference can be established at one time When a 5 party conference is established a confirmation tone is sent to all parties The tone can be disabled by program 105 The Executive Busy Override and the Call Park features are not available during a 5 party conference mp Reguired System Programming 105
104. mode Log In Log Out Using the feature number Any Telephone Q WEAH To Log In fo Ui gt QMO ME reu cba Lift the handset For Log In mode Dial 7360 Confirmation tone Hang up or press or press For Log Out mode Dial 7361 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of i The default is Log In mode There should be at least one extension in the group that is logged in The last member of an extension group cannot log out PT The Log In Log Out button can be assigned to a flexible line key El lly 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Log In Log Out Button See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Hunting See the Installation Manual Section 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA See the Installation Manual Section 3 Uniform Call Distribution UCD See the Installation Manual Section 3 Log In Log Out Operations 1 75 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Room Monitor Allows you to monitor a room through a proprietary telephone with an AUTO ANSWER MUTE button The proprietary telephone you want to monitor should be set to allow monitoring beforehand You can also monitor through a doorphone You can use a proprietary telephone with an AUTO ANSWER MUTE button and single line telephone with a MUTE button fo
105. number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports 3 DSS console number 1 through 2 x Both DSS console numbers This program and 804 System Data Dump are not included a mp Feature Reference Section 3 Features System Data Default Set System Programming 4 87 4 88 System Programming Section 5 Appendix 5 1 Default Values Mode Address Program Default 000 Date and Time Setting 98 Jan I Thu 12 00 AM 001 System Speed Dialling Entry All speed dialling numbers Not stored 002 System Password 1234 003 DSS Console Port Assignment All DSS Consoles Disable 004 Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS DSS1 Disable DSS2 Disable Console 005 One Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button With Transfer 006 Time Day Night Lunch Service Changing Manual 007 Time Day Night Lunch Service Start Time Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 30 PM Lunch S None Lunch E None 008 Operator Assignment Jack 01 009 Extension Number Assignment Port 01 through 24 Extn 201 through 224 010 LCD Time Display Selection 12 HOUR 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting All System Speed Dialling numbers Not stored 012 100 Alternative Feature Numbering Plan Hunting Group Set All codes Not stored All extension groups D
106. number return the MEMORY switch to the SET position You can press a flexible button assigned as a DSS button directly to make an intercom call without going off hook It can be done by System Programming Ele PT PT PT 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone DSS Direct Station Selection Button 2 1 Tone Ring Tone List See the Installation Manual Section 3 Intercom Calling I 1 16 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Calling the Operator Operator Call Allows you to call the operator within the system One extension can be assigned as the operator Any Telephone I y ogo Lift the handset or press Dial 0 or 9 SP PHONE MONITOR If an operator is not assigned this feature is not available and you will hear reorder tone If the line access number is assigned to 0 by System Programming the operator call number will be changed to 9 See the Installation Manual Section 3 Operator Call Outside Calling PT N PT Allows you to make a call to an external party using one of the following line access methods 1 Making Outside Calls Using Automatic Line Access 2 Making Outside Calls Using Individual Line Access 3 Making Outside Calls Using Trunk Group Access An exchange line which is not assigned to a line key cannot be dialled Helpful hints
107. program 312 the user can make an outside call at the locked extension J The higher call barring class number will take precedence F For example if call barring COS number 3 is assigned to an extension and the extension lock boundary class is 4 the extension user is allowed to make a call with call barring COS number 4 np Reguired System Program Address 312 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class Related Feature References Extension Lock Call Barring Call Barring for System Speed Dialling Calls originated by System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the combination of the System Speed Dialling Boundary Class assigned in program 301 and the class of service COS assigned to each extension as follows System Speed Dialling Boundary Class COS No lt Example gt lJz popojps If the boundary is set to 1 A A A A A COS number 2 2 CIATIATIAU A The system will allow system 3 Cl A speed dialling for COS numbers 1 and 2 but check COS numbers 3 i CL PH 4 and 5 according to call barring 5 CICICICJA A allowed C checked mp Reguired System Programming 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class Related Feature Reference Call Barring Features 3 13 C 3 Features Call Barring Override by Account Codes Allows an extension user to override call barring temporarily to make a toll call from a toll restricted extension The user ca
108. programmed data confirmation tone 2 2 beeps is sent Refer to the Tone List in the Appendix Section 2 You can call the original extension from the Call Forwarding destination extension for example Boss Secretary working Camp On recall and Hold recall are not forwarded 1 52 Operations 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk PT A flexible line key on a proprietary telephone which is not provided with FWD DND button can be assigned as the FWD DND button PT The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows Off Both functions are not set Red DND mode Flashing red slowly FWD mode PT You can check the assignment by pressing the FWD DND button while on hook rE 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone FWD DND Button 1 7 Useful Features Rejecting Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND 1 7 Useful Features Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Forwarding All Calls You can re direct all of your calls to another extension Setting PT and SLT FWD DND S Cc For a PT fy y y a For an SLT LJ y Gla Lift the handset Fora PT Press FWD DND Dial 1 Enter the destination Dial Confirmation Hang up or press or press For an SLT Dial 71 extension number tone and SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone You may press the flexible bu
109. se 10 20 30 40 60 120 sec Default 20 seconds e Feature References Section 3 Features Intercept Routing Uniform Call Distribution UCD 4 68 System Programming Required only when the optional OGM FAX Detection Card is installed 4 2 System Programming 600 603 600 Extension Group Assignment Assigns an extension group for each extension For example by department or floor GENE PE a e a N NEXT or PREV ERR a ace To continue EE ber aS O1 24 X 1 8 To continue aes Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports Extension group number through 8 Default All extension ports Extension group 1 d e Every extension should belong to an extension group but cannot belong to more than one a group LS Feature References Section 3 Features Extension Group Extension Hunting 601 603 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Day Night Lunch Programs a class of service COS in the day night and or lunch modes for each extension There are 5 classes of service available for each extension CH naden a a NExT or PREV a EE cs stress ghee a To continue EE see 1 3 01 24 X To continue X Program address selection number 1 601 for day 2 602 for night 3 603 for lunch Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All extension ports COS 1 RSP Featu
110. sent Om Range 0 1500 milliseconds Recall Timing Range Sets the Range for Extensions SLT Mode 1 50 180 mS Interdigit Time Maximum time allowed between digits when dialling 20 secs out Options 5 10 15 secs Prior to disconnection DTMF Time Assigns the minimum duration Mode 80 mS 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 202 203 206 207 208 10 2 4 of 6 NEW Programming Steps with reference to the KX T30810 61610 Program Title Feature Description Default 211 No Dial Disconnection Call disconnects if 1 Digit is not dialled Enable within 20 seconds of seizing a CO Line disconnect CO Line Duration Limit Sets maximum CO call time Enabled Prog 613 Bell Off Detection Sets the wait time between bell signals from CO line 13 301 Call Barring System Speed Dial Assigns the call barring class for System Speed Dial Class 1 Boundary Class Numbers 309 Emergency Dial Number Set Stored Emergency telephone numbers override the Locations following COS Level Account Code Modes 01 999 02 112 Electronic Extension Lock 03 05 Not stored 310 Account Codes Assigns Account Codes for Verify All mode 01 24 Not stored i e 01 1234 311 Automatic Pause Insertion Codes 40 codes can be assigned as Pause Codes 01 40 Not Stored Pause duration prog step 417 is inserted after the i e 01 1234567 code 312 Call Barring Extension Lock COS level applied to Locked Extensi
111. ser ci 1 6 Enable Disable DTMF receiver number 1 and 2 for checking extension ports 01 through 08 3 and 4 for checking extension ports 09 through 16 5 and 6 for checking extension ports 17 through 24 Default All DTMF receivers Enable 108 Recall Mode for a Locked Extension Enables or disables a locked extension to send a recall signal during a conversation with an external party OE ser Ea fox oe Enable Disable Default Disable 4 18 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 109 110 109 CO Indicator Assignment Enables or disables an extension which was assigned not to ring in programs 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment to answer an incoming outside call The line key indicator will flash when an outside call is received If enabled an extension user can answer the call by pressing the flashing line key If disabled the user cannot answer the call even if they press the line key aoa Enable Disable Default Enable The extension must be a proprietary telephone with a line key and indicator 110 Recall Key Mode Assigns the sending of the recall signal mode MODE 1 or MODE 2 when the RECALL button on a proprietary telephone is pressed MODE 1 The recall signal is sent during the programmed time in 418 Recall Time MODE 2 The recall signal is sent while the RECALL button is pressed if the time the RECALL button was pressed is more than th
112. set at the extension Making a call Any Telephone At another extension h par S 4 y extension password extension no 1 Lift the handset Dial 7X Dial your extension Enter your Dial Confirmation Enter the or press password extension number tone and phone number SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone e You must dial a line access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 or press the line key when calling an external party l e Call Barring Class of Service COS is used to define the feature Each extension is assigned a a Call Barring COS number SLT A rotary telephone cannot use this feature lp 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Extension Password Set Manager only See the Installation Manual Section 3 Walking COS Operations 1 87 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Ringing Pattern Selection A different ringing pattern is used to distinguish intercom calls from incoming outside calls You can select the ringing pattern as follows in System Programming Exchange line 3 patterns A B or C Extension 3 patterns A B or C Doorphone 4 patterns A B C or D Is LE 2 1 Tone Ring Tone List See the Installation Manual Section 3 Ringing Pattern Selection Distinctive Dial Tones A distinctive dial tone will be heard from the handset if the extension user has previously activated a certain feature Dial Ton
113. the handsfree operation are noted in the Handsfree Operation feature Qesy PT PT ESP 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 1 3 Making Calls Handsfree Operation See the Installation Manual Section 3 Receiving Calls 1 34 Operations 1 4 Receiving Calls Handsfree Answerback Allows you to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset Setting When the SP PHONE and the AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicators are off AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator turns on Cancelling When the AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator is on AUTO ANSWER MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns off PT This feature does not work for incoming outside calls or doorphone calls i PT When an outside call is transferred to your extension this feature is overridden and a ring tone is heard rE 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Intercom Alert Assignment 1 7 Useful Features Room Monitor See the Installation Manual Section 3 Handsfree Answerback Operations 1 35 suoneuodo oiseg 1 4 Receiving Calls Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Allows you to answer an incoming call
114. the preferred exchange line you must go off hook and then press the line key whose indicator is flashing red guickly i Exchange Line Ringing Selection You can select whether the extension will ring or not when an outside call is received at your extension PROGRAMMING INPUT G exchange line no AUTO DIAL Enter the exchange line STORE numbers you want to ring 1 through 6 The Flexible Ringing Assignment should be set to Enable See the Installation Manual When an outside call is received at your extension but does not ring the line key will flash If you want to answer the outside call press the flashing line key i 1 6 Operations 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Intercom Alert Assignment The type of intercom alerting signal tone voice can be selected by programming Voice Call Call arrival is indicated by the caller announcing themselves through the speaker on the receiving extension Tone Call default Normal ringing is heard at the receiving extension SELECTION PROGRAMMING INPUT AUTO DIAL O Voice Call wW Go STORE Q Tone Call 4 E AUTO DIAL Cancels the Voice Call STORE Call Waiting Tone Selection You can select the type of call waiting tone either Tone 1 default or Tone 2 SELECTION PROGRAMMING INPUT AUTO DIAL O Tone 1 WHU GM STORE AUTO DIAL aa amp im 1 5 During a Conversation Call Waiting 2 1 Tone Ring Tone List
115. the top front cover Top front cover 4 Remove the 2 screws Bottom front cover 1 2 Installation 1 1 Caller ID Card Installation 6 Attach the Caller ID Card Caller ID Card for exchange lines 1 3 Install the Caller ID Card for exchange lines 4 6 here l Note Please do not damage this part 7 Insert the flat cable to the connector a Ce aA NA P ON Flat cable 8 Close the cover e Be sure the frame of the main unit is connected to the ground m Installation Manual a 2 5 Frame Ground Connection Installation 1 3 1 2 System Features Caller ID Provides a display proprietary telephone KX T7130 user with the caller s information such as the name and telephone number on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID service A contract with a Telephone Company is required z An optional Caller ID Card must be installed to the system All 6 exchange lines can be supported by installing 2 Caller ID Cards One Caller ID Card supports 3 exchange lines System Programming is reguired to execute this feature A display proprietary telephone user can record the caller s information ser 2 2 Telephone Features Call Log Incoming Up to 20 calls can be logged per extension Only the first 16 digits of the caller s information can be displayed on the LCD while a call is being received or during a conversation The first 13 digits are d
116. to Proprietary Telephone Settings Section 1 2 A rotary phone cannot use this feature Any Telephone Voice to Tone gt extension no Off hook Enter an extension number Confirmation tone 1 beep Dial X Ring back tone Tone to Voice l pe R J Off hook Enter an extension number Ring back tone Dial X Confirmation tone 1 beep L See the Installation Manual Section 3 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 1 82 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Doorphone Call Allows you to have a conversation with a visitor at your doorphone Up to 4 doorphones can be connected to the system Calling an extension from a doorphone Any Doorphone QOoo0000 popopo S000000 F p0o0000 goo0000 E 2 Press the Doorphone button for 1 second Wait for an answer and talk Answering a doorphone call Any Telephone When you hear the doorphone ring tone at the extension S a Lift the handset or press SP PHONE Calling a doorphone Any Telephone My amp og f Lift the handset or press Dial 31 Enter a doorphone number Confirmation tone Talk SP PHONE 1 through 4 An optional doorphone door opener card and doorphones are necessary for this feature If you do not answer an incoming doorphone call within 15 or 30 seconds the call will be cancelled You must program the extensions which can receive calls from each doorphone for the day night and lunch modes Any extension
117. to the night mode Time Day Night Lunch Service Operator Manager only Ouick access to the lunch mode Time Day Night Lunch Service Operator Manager only Ouick setting of the Remote Extension Lock Control Remote Extension Lock Control Operator Manager only The KX T7040 and Proprietary Telephone PT should be placed side by side on your desk A single line telephone cannot be paired with the KX T7040 For System Programming please refer to the Installation Manual Initial Settings i PF buttons are provided with no default settings while each DSS button has a default setting as follows DSS 01 24 extension numbers 201 224 DSS 25 32 no default settings To meet your various needs DSS buttons can be changed to other function buttons Every DSS or PF button can be assigned to another extension number telephone number or feature number Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position As to the buttons on your DSS Console please refer to your DSS Console manual 1 98 Operations 1 9 DSS Console Features Extension Number Assignment You can assign a desired number to a DSS button PT and DSS Console DSS Console Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone 7 AUTO DIAL 1 qc to program numbe
118. to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED How to replace the fuse Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover Precautions This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2 wire Loop calling unguarded clearing with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines and a payphone should not be connected as an extension Operation in Power Failure In the event of a power failure two single line telephones connected to extension ports 01 and 09 will be directly connected to the following Exchange lines Exchange line extension port 01 Exchange line 4 extension port 09 e Set the Dialling Mode Tone or Pulse of your telephone according to the Exchange line 999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency 999 and 112 service Satisfactory performance can not be guaranteed for every allowed combination of host and subsidiary apparatus 999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the Exchange line for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency 999 and 112 service During dialling this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line this is not a fault and we advise you not to call Fault Repair Service Prevention of access by user This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to aut
119. tone STORE Press AUTO DIAL STORE Confirmation tone The STORE indicator light turns steady red e If you exceed the time 30 seconds recording is stopped automatically Playing back a message d ek Dial 9 Dial 3 for OGM 1 Dial 4 for OGM 2 The STORE indicator light turns off The message is played back i Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position See the Installation Manual Section 3 Direct Inward System Access DISA See the Installation Manual Section 3 Uniform Call Distribution UCD See the Installation Manual Section 3 Outgoing Message OGM Operations 1 93 suoneiodo ojosuo9 ssd Jo6eueJ 10 e19d09 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Remote Extension Lock The operator or manager can remotely lock or unlock a particular extension You can prohibit outside calls Locking a Lift the handset or press Press the flexible key assigned SP PHONE MONITOR as the Station Lock button The Extension Lock button indicator turns red Unlocking cg Lift the handset or press Press the Station Lock button SP PHONE MONITOR whose indicator lights red e The Extension Lock button indicator turns off i e This feature overrides the Electronic Extension Lockout feature If Electronic Extension C Lockout has
120. user can call a doorphone The Call Waiting feature is not available with doorphone calls Doorphone 1 and Doorphone 2 cannot receive calls simultaneously When one is in use an extension user cannot have a conversation with the other This is the same for Doorphone 3 and Doorphone 4 Doorphones can also be used for the Room Monitor feature i 1 7 Useful Features Room Monitor See the Installation Manual Section 3 Doorphone Call a Operations 1 83 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Door Opener Allows you to unlock the door from your telephone Up to 4 door openers can be connected to the system To unlock the door from an assigned extension Any Telephone z bo a 2 BA eA Lift the handset or press Dial 55 Enter a door opener number Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR 1 through 4 tone SP PHONE MONITOR The door is left unlocked for 5 seconds default To unlock the door while talking to the doorphone PT and SLT 5 For a PT _ y i CR 5 ees G For a PT Dial 5 Hang up or press For an SLT Press Recall and dial 5 SP PHONE MONITOR The door is left unlocked for 5 seconds default An optional doorphone door opener card is necessary for this feature If you dial 5 again while the door is open the door will stay open for another 5 seconds default You can program the extensions which can open the doors for the day night and lunch modes
121. when the call is made 01344 853 PT You can program whether to print out the concealed number s on the call logging through System Programming PT Do not press the INTERCOM button before a line access number 9 0 or 81 through 86 i lp 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone One Touch Dialling Button 1 3 Making Calls Dialling by Simply Pressing a Button One Touch Dialling 1 3 Making Calls Dialling using System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling See the Installation Manual Section 3 Secret Dialling Operations 1 71 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Alarm Setting Timed Reminder You can receive a ringback at your telephone to remind you of a meeting or appointment Either once or daily everyday until cancelled is available at a pre set time At home you can also use this feature as a wake up call Setting Any Telephone y L6 hour minute Lift the handset or press Dial 76 Enter the hour Enter the minute For AM Dial 0 SP PHONE MONITOR 01 through 12 00 through 59 For PM Dial 1 eh a D Gba For a one time alarm Dial 1 Dial if Hang up or press For a daily alarm Dial 2 SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of i An alarm will be heard at the preset time and then the sett
122. when you need to override call barring You do not need to make an account code entry when receiving incoming calls You can clear and re enter a number by pressing x or the FWD DND button while entering an account code An account code can be stored into Auto Dialling One Touch Dialling Pickup Dialling System Personal Speed Dialling Call Forwarding to Exchange Line To store an account code X X must be entered before the account code Example Pickup Dialling Off hook 742 Line Access Code x x Account Code Phone Number ff On hook If the account code entered does not match the pre set account code in the verify all mode when making an outside call reorder tone is heard An account code has 4 digits 0 through 9 RECALL PAUSE etc cannot be used See the Installation Manual Section 3 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR See the Installation Manual Section 3 Account Code Entry See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Barring Override by Account Codes 1 68 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Rejecting Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND Allows you to prevent other parties from disturbing you Your extension will not receive intercom or outside calls DND TONE Setting Cancelling PT and SLT o as For a PT hy t B ja y v Q 7 4 Foran sir Gl Lift the handset For a PT Press To set Dial 4
123. wire Thickness more than 1 6 mm Note The above example is only a recommendation The length of the earth rod and reguired depth depend on the composition of the soil Installation 2 9 2 8 Extension Connection Extension ports 01 through 08 can be used for all kinds of telephones Telephone Wiring The maximum length of the extension line cord twisted cable which connects the system and the extension is as follows 6 0 5 mm 26 AWG Under 140 m 0 6 mm 24 AWG Under 229 m 0 8 mm 22 AWG Under 360 m Extension Loop Limit 40 O Panasonic Single Line Telephone 4 7 0 5 mm 26 AWG Under 698 m 0 6 mm 24 AWG Under 1128 m 0 8 mm 22 AWG Under 1798 m Extension Loop Limit 600 Q including set 0 5 mm 26 AWG Under 140 m 0 6 mm 24 AWG Under 229 m af 0 8 mm 22 AWG Under 360 m DSS Console R Extension Loop Limit 40 Q KX T7040 2 or 4 conductor wiring is reguired for each extension as listed below There are 4 pins possible for connection T Tip R Ring L Low and H High Telephone Wiring Single line telephones 1 pair wire A B Proprietary telephone 2 pair wire L H A B e g KX T7130 J If a telephone or answering machine with an A A1 relay i
124. 0 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 T5 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 7 14 Programming Tables Programming Tables 352 Route 2 Selection Codes Leading Digits Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 os 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 25 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 75 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 Programming Tables 7 15 7 Programming Tables 353 Route 3 Selection Codes Leading Digits Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 05 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 25 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 T5 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 7 16 Programming Tables Programming Tables 354 Route 4 Selection Codes Leading Digits
125. 00 ms Ability To Recognise Further Digits The KX TA624 is capable of accepting and acting upon routing information received from a proprietary telephone for 10 seconds after the latest routing information has been received Satisfies BS6450 Part 1 1993 Clause 13 5 Appendix 5 7 5 2 Specifications Maximum associated cable loss for EXTN port PT Max cable loss 0 34 dB 140 m max for 0 5 mm SLT Max cable loss 0 87 dB 698 m max for 0 5 mm Port to port loss Loss across switch PAS gt 1AS Loss 1 13 dB Not through fed system Send and receive loudness ratings on port to port basis Send loudness rating IAS gt PAS 3dB 0km Receive loudness rating PAS gt 1AS 6 dB 0km Extension 1AS port 3 ringers can be supported with extension wiring up to 698 m Notes e Extension ports 01 through 24 may be used for off premise extensions in which case cabling would be required by BS 6701 Part 1 1986 to be equipped with over voltage protection e When using separately approved extension telephones the best overall performance of the PBX system will be obtained by using extension telephones of impedance class A clause 4 3 2 1 of BS 6305 1982 Port Type Classification Port Name Brief Description Port Type Extn Port Connect to PT SLT 1 AS PSTN Port Connect to Network PAS Paging Port output External Paging 4F Ext Music Port input Ext
126. 01 0921234567 00 11 00 13 31 12 98 2 15PM 203 01 0921234567 00 11 00 201 31 12 98 2 26PM 203 01 F 0927654321 00 03 00 31 12 98 2 27PM 216 05 9 0924567123 00 13 55 31 12 98 3 25PM 02 lt UCD Waiting gt 00 11 48 Example of the SMDR printout format Explanation 1 Date shows the date of the call as Day Month Year 2 Time shows the time the call was started as Hour Minute AM or PM indicates a transferred call 3 Ext shows the extension number etc that engaged in the call 4 CO shows the exchange line number used for the call 5 Dial number Outgoing call Shows the called party s telephone number maximum 32 digits Valid digits are O through 9 ff X and P if the PAUSE button was pressed Received call Shows lt incoming gt An incoming call via the DISA feature is shown as lt DISA incoming gt via the DIL feature is shown as lt DIL incoming gt UCD waiting call Shows lt UCD waiting gt for an incoming call via the UCD feature When the UCD waiting call is answered it becomes a Received call and a new record is started Features 3 63 S 3 Features 6 Duration shows the duration of the call or the UCD call waiting time in Hours Minutes Seconds 7 Code shows the account code appended to the call account code index number e g 13 or the extension number which uses the Walking COS feature e g 201 e This system can store information of up to 64 calls n e
127. 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 31 Programming Tables Programming Tables All 10120130 10 20 30 I 10 20 30 I 10120130 I 1020130 I 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Lunch 1020130 I Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Selection I Immediately 10 10 seconds delay 20 20 seconds delay 30 30 seconds delay 120130 I 1 10 Extension port no Default All V 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Tables 7 32 Programming Tables 414 Exchange Line Mode 415 Exchange Line Mode 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch Exchange line Selection N Normal DIL Extension port no 01 24 D1 DISA1 D2 DISA2 U UCD no N DIL Extn no D1 D2 U N DIL Extn no D1 D2 U N DIL Extn no D1 D2 U Default All J 1 2 i i i 3 i i i 4 i i i 5 x 417 418 Pause Time Recall Time Selection seconds Selection milli
128. 1 5 seconds Feature Reference Section 3 Features Host PBX Access System Programming 4 51 418 419 4 2 System Programming 418 Recall Time Assigns the length of the recall time If your system is installed behind a host PBX External Feature Access is necessary to obtain its services To enable it select the required recall signal sending time for an ee line GDG A S NEXT or PREV i lt er SEE EERE To continue IL nex NEXT ISELECT STORE 1 6 X 80 100 160 300 600 900 1200 ms To continue gun Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines 100 milliseconds ay Feature References Section 3 Features External Feature Access Recall 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access Selects which exchange line can be seized automatically when an extension user dials the Automatic Line Access number 0 or 9 assigned in program 121 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection en ASC ND aoSy ee l To continue 4 J 2 nex sec stone 1 6 Enable Disable To continue fae Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Enable Rp Feature References Section 3 Features Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Outside Calling 4 52 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 420 420 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Assigns the requ
129. 1 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 25 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 75 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 Programming Tables 7 19 7 Programming Tables 357 Route 3 Exception Codes Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 05 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 DS 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 75 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 7 20 Programming Tables Programming Tables 358 Route 4 Exception Codes Code no Area code no 7 digits max Code no Area code no 7 digits max Default All Not stored 01 41 02 42 03 43 04 44 os 45 06 46 07 47 08 48 09 49 10 50 11 51 12 52 13 53 14 54 15 55 16 56 17 57 18 58 19 59 20 60 21 61 22 62 23 63 24 64 25 65 26 66 27 67 28 68 29 69 30 70 31 71 32 72 33 73 34 74 35 75 36 76 37 77 38 78 39 79 40 80 Programming Tables 7 21
130. 17 217 i 217 i 37 i 18 218 218 38 19 219 219 39 20 220 220 40 21 221 i 221 i 41 i 22 222 222 i 42 i 23 223 223 43 24 224 224 44 012 Alternative Feature Numbering Plan CODE no Feature no 10 digits max CODE no Feature no 10 digits max Default All Not stored 50 55 51 56 52 57 53 58 54 59 7 6 Programming Tables Programming Tables 100 Hunting Group Set Default Extension group no 1 8 all Selection T T T T T T T T All 1 2 3 4 516 78 X Diab v PP Enable an ae at a ae 101 Hunting Type Default Extension group no 1 8 X all Selection T T T T T T T T All Dee Qe a 6 A Bok Terminate Vv Ciroular o a 102 Voice Mail Port for KX TVP100 107 DTMF Receiver Check i Default Extn port no 07 08 15 16 all Default DTMF receiver no 1 6 Selection T T T T T T T T T All 07 08 15 1 All 13 2 ot Bes 4 eS 6 Disable I ee MU Enable i i i i J i i i i i 103 DTMF Integration for 104 105 106 External KX TVP100 Hold Mode Selection Conference Tone Paging Access Tone Selection Enable Disable Hold 1 Hold 2 Hold 3 Enable Disable Enable Disable Default y Vv A Vv Change 108 Recall Mode for a 109 CO Indicator 110 Locked Extension Assignment Recall Key Mode Selection
131. 2 302 305 Call Barring Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes 4 33 306 Call Barring Exception Codes 0 ceeeeeeececeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 34 309 Emergency Dial Number Set 00 0 0 eeeeeeseeeeceeeeeceteeeesteeeeeaes 4 34 310 Account Code sssi site inisini rnek iade iie i 4 35 311 Automatic Pause Insertion Codes cceceessccececeeeeeeeerseaeees 4 35 312 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class 4 36 11 Contents 350 ARS Selectiolln ete y un Du ube dU Du DL Y EU 4 37 351 354 Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes Leading Digits 4 37 355 358 Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes e en 4 38 359 1st Carrier Selection Code BT Line Access Code 4 38 360 ARS Modification Removed Digits ce eeeeeeseeeeeteeeees 4 39 361 ARS Modification Added Number een 4 39 362 ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection u eeeeneeenun 4 40 363 ARS Interdigit Eneas ddd HF UY 4 40 364 ARS Trunk Gron Se ee Gn Fy RE 4 41 381 384 Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes 4 42 385 388 Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill ee eeeeeeeee 4 43 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment 2 0 0 0 eeececeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 43 400 Exchange Line Connection Assignment c cceeseeeeseeeeeees 4 44 401 Dial Mod eu ne WY YT TN de GY HYF dees 4 44 402 Pulse Sp
132. 404 Trunk Group Assignment 405 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day Night Lunch 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 423 Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection Related Feature References Outside Calling Receiving Calls Ringing Pattern Selection Operating Instructions Reference 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Line Access Keys Log In Log Out Allows an extension user to Log In Goin or Log Out leave a hunting DISA ring or UCD group temporarily Extensions in the log out mode will not receive calls by Extension Hunting DISA or UCD but will receive other calls not like the Do Not Disturb DND feature The Log In Log Out button can be assigned to a flexible button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings The lighting patterns of the Log In Log Out button on a proprietary telephone and status are as follows Off Log In mode Red Log Out mode Log In Ng e There should be at least one extension that is in the Fa Log In mode in a group I Rs Related Feature References Direct Inward System Access DISA Extension Group Extension Hunting Uniform Call Distribution UCD Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Log In Log Out Button 1 7 Useful Features Joining or Leaving a Cal
133. 411 413 Outside Call DISA System KX TVP100 Intercept Extension Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 1 3 Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator on the corresponding proprietary telephone to notify to the user The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in their mailbox When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message A single line telephone user hears dial tone 3 Distinctive Dial Tones in this section when going off hook if there are messages in their mailbox They can call the voice mail extension to listen to their messages In this case they must listen to all of the messages Once they access voice mail dial tone 3 will be eliminated and not be heard next time they go off hook Therefore they will not know even if there are messages left 3 72 Features Features V I 2 Automated Attendant AA Service 2 1 AA to Extension AA receives and answers outside calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling which is sent from the calling party Outside Call DIL UCD System KX TVP100 Extension Le AA1 Lo ze AA2 AA Hunting Chain or UCD Group
134. 6 DISA1 for the A company exchange line s DISA2 for the B company exchange line s Case 4 Uses a different OGM when the line is busy OGM for DISA To the designated destination Outside Call If the operator is selected To the Operator Lennon OGMI This is A company For the sales division press 1 For the service division press 2 To call the operator press 0 OGM2 We are sorry The line is currently busy If you want to call the operator press 0 Required Settings 502 MODE 414 416 DISA1 506 DISA2 Case 5 Distributes calls to the UCD group OGM for UCD p SYSTEM 5 Outside Call When the line is free ar iOGM1 ie ir i To the UCD group Outside Call The line i busy When the line is free OGM2 OGM1 We are sorry The line is currently busy Please hold OGM2 Same as OGM1 Required Settings 502 MODE3 414 416 UCD Features 3 49 O 3 Features Case 6 Disconnects a call after the OGM OGM for UCD UCD with iOGM1 OGM Fr CEC ROE SE cael The line is busy Outside Call f M2 gt The call is disconnected HT Y tell cies HF AU OGMI1 We are sorry The line is currently busy Please hold OGM2 We are sorry The line is currently busy Please call back later Regu
135. 6 One uch Dalim et cu Y Y Dd id Cn o 3 46 Operator Manager Extension i eiu au Di nu 3 47 Operator Call ueu YR Ued Td ddd betes 3 47 Outgoing Message OGM a Gee dyl Hy dddo Ydd SN Fd staeseesh 3 48 Ou tside CaS sau ea ee Ud FN E EES 3 52 Contents P Paging iu HN A a wyd dg fdd GG dT 3 53 Parallelled Telephone Connection ee ceeeeeceeeseesseceseeeeeeeeseeeaeenes 3 54 Personal Speed Di allie ae GU NU 3 54 Pickup Dialing cc cult i y dete doin Aina did eee dale 3 55 Polarity Reverse Detection ss oii ei dyd Y Gin Cyd 3 55 Power Failure Transfer u 99 lt eu di dR Gu edd yD asin SAL eds 3 56 Preferred Line Assignment Incoming ce seeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeetees 3 56 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteeeeeeees 3 57 Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set 0 eee 3 57 Pulse tc Tone Convensioll cau Y ia ad Lid ng FOL 3 58 R Recalln o enu eel ee Rees ee 3 58 Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 59 Receiving Calls scp cu i Gre FFY TA WF dy GW YFC GREF DF mo 3 59 BR dialee a y Y te toate dom y y a dd GO 3 60 Ringing Pattern Selection 45 Ge id OFO 3 60 Room Monitor cu ei GM ee Bd ANH ee HOUR 3 61 S Secret ATI a WE HR a gt 3 62 Self Extension Number Confirmation KX T7130 only 3 62 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneee 3 63 System Data De LAUT Set uen i Td dnd 3 64 system Speed Dialling vsti
136. 600 Extension Group Assignment FN Y eee eee eee NEXT or PREV Ree eee eee ee AS O To continue BA nie se scr sone 1 8 gt Disable To continue moi Extension group number through 8 X all extension groups Default All extension groups Disable ES e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Extension Hunting 101 Hunting Type Assigns the hunting type Terminate or Circular to each extension group when a hunting group is enabled in program 100 Hunting oe Set Y FY NEXT or PREV Ber MP ay mer y mynny To continue gogog Ger se scr rone Emo 8 X Circular To continue mol Extension group number through 8 X all extension groups Default All extension groups Terminate IF Feature Reference Section 3 Features Extension Hunting 4 14 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 102 102 Voice Mail Port for KX TVP100 Assigns the extension port number s connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System VPS equipment KX TVP100 Only extension ports 07 08 15 and 16 are available PAETE RE EEA AAN R enn To continue 1 0 2 neu sevecr Son 07 08 15 16 a i Disable To continue sevect Extension port number 07 08 15 and or 16 X All 4 extension ports Default All 4 extension ports Disable IE Feature Reference Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration
137. 81 86 Phone No e System Speed Dialling System Speed Dial No 00 99 e Personal Speed Dialling _ Personal Speed Dial No 0 9 e Redial Last Number or 8 0 e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 6 e Doorphone Call 3 1 Doorphone No 1 4 Quick Reference Cards For Single Line Telephones MAKING CALLS e Intercom Calling Extension No e Operator Call 0 or 9 Outside Calls Automatic Line Access 9 or Phone No e Outside Calls Individual Trunk Group Access Trunk Group No 81 86 Phone No e System Speed Dialling X System Speed Dial No 00 99 e Personal Speed Dialling s _ Personal Speed Dial No 0 9 e Redial Last Number or 8 0 e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 6 e Doorphone Call 3 1 Doorphone No 1 4 Call Pickup Directed 4 Extension No e Call Pickup Group 4 0 e Call Pickup Directed 4 Extension No e Call Pickup Group o DURING A CONVERSATION e Call Hold Call Splitting Press the Recall button Call Hold Retrieve Outside calls 5 Exchange Line No Call Hold Retrieve Intercom calls 5 Ex
138. Adjustment KX T7130 only 3 28 Distinctive Dial Tones uu iie cesar eects 3 28 Do Not Disturb DND areia ona a e in aia ia 3 29 Door Opener iir i Fay ain R NRG A 3 30 Doa hone Calls senera e Gn RNN 3 30 DSS Console a a eee hi ale MG RG aie 3 31 PARSE SI 1G a ea a Seal yD Wd eens 3 32 Exchange Line Ringing Selection eee eeeeeseceseceeeeeeseecneeenseeees 3 32 Executive Busy Override scnis i annita 3 33 Extension Button Confirmation KX T7130 only 3 33 Extension Feature lear 3 eii foe NC a O ad 3 34 Extension Group ei a Gwed de RD Rd CO CC ed 3 35 Extension Hunting nd ada a Ydd AF 3 36 Extension LocKee elei aai dd title YG attics 3 36 Extension Password System Password csscecssseeeeeeceeeseeeeeaeees 3 37 External Feature ACCESS ne LU Dd Fyn LLU eee 3 38 Flexible BIiRtOnS ceu GG Y oe al Fd nd 3 39 Handsfree Answerback 111 iaa I GAA nas eee NG UL do 3 40 Handstrec Operations co eu id YG GU dd eee 3 40 Hold oe de in Eg Cf nate eae Y aE gyd 3 40 Host PBX ACCESS necnon unninn 3 41 Intercept Routing earen Y R MA NT 3 42 Imiercom CAA sc O A e TR RA 3 42 Language Selection siiin iei i eee O E E exe 3 43 Limited Call Duration ee eia a RA EE 3 43 Line Access Keys nu anotei e Ee T aE YN FACT Fd ES 3 43 YE eo Br eu LU ESF RY RTH NF FRY RO ER ATTAT A ARTH O FE YC 3 44 Message Waiting ida UYN GL FFF a F YRR yn 3 45 Microphone Mt oee go et GOR 1 3 45 Music on Hold Background Music BGM eeesceeeeceeeeeeeeeeteees 3 4
139. Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments such as in bathrooms or near swimming pools 999 or 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the exchange line for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency service During dialling the apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line This is not a fault and we advise you not to call the Fault Repair Service elf the apparatus does not operate properly disconnect the unit from the telephone line cord and then connect again elf there is any trouble unplug the extension line and connect a known working phone If the known working phone operates properly have the defective phone repaired by your maintainer or Panasonic dealer If the known working phone does not operate properly check the Advanced Hybrid System and the Internal extension wiring Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps and motors The unit should be kept free of dust moisture and vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight Do not use benzine thinner or the like or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet Wipe it with a soft cloth Do not use any handset other than a Panasonic handset This apparatus is capable of being used in conjunction with hearing aids fitted with inductive coil pick ups The handset should be held as for normal conversation For J operation the hearing a
140. Blocking for each exchange line DTMF The dialling signals from an extension either Tone or Pulse are converted to Tone and transmitted to the Local Exchange If the system is connected directly to the Local Exchange or installed behind a host PBX which receives both Tone and Pulse select this mode Pulse The dialling signals from an extension either Tone or Pulse are converted to Pulse and transmitted to the Local Exchange C BLK If your Local Exchange can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the user are contracted for Pulse select this mode When dialling with a touch tone telephone only Pulse T are sent to the Local nai oe HF HU eee eee ey NEXT or PREV ree er ee y To continue LJ le i bex seueT rore 1 6 X DTMF Pulse C BLK Mode To continue j Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines DTMF Mode np e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Pulse to Tone Conversion 4 44 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 402 403 402 Pulse Speed Selection Selects a pulse rate for each exchange line which sets Pulse Mode or Call block Mode in program 401 Dial Mode There are 2 pulse rates Low Speed 10 pps and High Speed 20 pps UN eno PREV eee To continue ACE mr T 1 6 X Low High Speed To continue Exchange line number 1 through 6 x All exchange lines Default All exchange lines
141. Call Park Hold 201 Transfer Recall Time Assigns the length of the transfer recall timer If a transferred call is not answered within the programmed time the call will be returned to the original caller AOD ser fax Gee Ge 15 30 sec 1 2 min Default 30 seconds ESP e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Transfer to Extension 4 26 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 202 203 202 Call Forwarding Start Time Assigns time for the Call Forwarding No Answer feature If a call is not answered within the programmed time the call will be forwarded to the destination aa es use so we 5 10 15 20 sec delay Default 15 seconds delay IL Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Forwarding 203 Pickup Dial Delay Time Assigns the length of time for the Pickup Dialling feature If the telephone user lifts the handset the programmed party is called automatically when the timer expires This delay gives the user an opportunity to enter numbers before automatic dialling occurs OE be ma Ge Ge 1 2 3 4 sec Default 3 seconds ISF e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Pickup Dialling System Programming 4 27 204 206 4 2 System Programming 204 Call Duration Count Start Time Assigns the start time of a conversation either immediately after an exchange line is seized or after dialling This corresponds to the length of the conversation displa
142. Dialling does not function Wrong programming Enter an exchange line access number 9 or O 81 through 86 in programming A proprietary telephone connected to extension ports O1 through 08 09 through 16 or 17 through 24 does not operate but a single line telephone operates An extension H L port 01 through 08 09 through 16 or 17 through 24 may have been shorted Turn the Power Switch OFF Fix the shorted part then turn the Power Switch ON 6 2 Troubleshooting 6 2 While Connecting Can you dial an extension Yes Y Can you dial out using an exchange line Connection between the system and a proprietary telephone CAUSE SOLUTION A B is connected to H L H a Ce B e _ e L ee m KX TA624 TWST Extension Use the correct cord the inner 2 wires are for A B and the outer 2 wires are for H L Connection between the system and a single line telephone CAUSE SOLUTION A B is connected to H L H A B Le A B KX TA624 Extension Use the correct cord the inner 2 wires are for A B Connection between the system and a single line telephone that is polarity sensitive CAUSE SOLUTION A is connected to B He A Be Le KX TA624 A B
143. Disable in this program if 1 is dialled during the pulse mode the system will regard it as hooking and all other numbers will be disregarded 23 Feature Reference Section 3 Features Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone 4 76 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 615 615 LCD Language Assignment Selects the language English Spanish or Portuguese shown on the LCD display of a proprietary telephone on an extension basis The selected language is shown during operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings Y a season neues antennas eine OOS ser SEE E 01 16 X English Spanish Portuguese Te Continue gaws Extension port number 01 through 16 X All extension ports Default All extension ports English l The language used for the SMDR printout is assigned in program 806 SMDR Language M Assignment L Feature Reference Section 3 Features Language Selection System Programming 4 77 700 702 4 2 System Programming 700 702 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Enables or disables receiving a call from up to 4 doorphones in the day night and or lunch modes for each extension ee eee ee ee ey Pee t eee eens Soe eee wane a ene en To continue Go to next or prev port number port no 00 02 1 4 X 01 24 Enable Disable To continue Go to another port number To continue Go to ano
144. E OF PURCHASE found on the bottom of the unit NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS Note This Installation Manual does not show the complete model number that indicates the country where your equipment should be used The model number of your unit is found on the label affixed to the unit MODEL NO label APPROVED for connection to telecommunication systems specified in the instructions for use subject to the conditions set out in them 610186 Warning This is a Class A Product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be reguired to take adeguate measures This unit complies with the EU Directives 73 23 EEC Electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility basic standard 92 31 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility amendment 93 68 EEC Marking The CE mark on this unit certifies compliance with the above mentioned Directives Introduction Structure of the Manual This manual consists of the following sections Section 1 Basic System Construction Provides general information on the system including connection diagrams Section 2 Installation Contains the system installation and wiring instructions as well as how to install the optional cards Section 3 Features Describes the optional and programmable features in alphabetical order It also provides in
145. EASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET OUTLET IS LOCATED INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE TO PREVENT THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE For your future reference SERIAL NO DATE OF PURCHASE found on the bottom of the unit NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS Introduction Structure of the Manual This manual consists of the following sections Section 1 Operations Describes the features and their operation It also provides information about the programming required conditions and connection references for each feature Section 2 Appendix Provides the Tone Ring Tone List LED Indication Feature Number List and the Telephone Troubleshooting Index Description of the Symbols Mainly Used in this Manual l Additional information and conditions a l gt The feature or program references Contents Section 1 Operations Basic Operations 1 1 Before Operating escssensscsencccecesevscessecncesieees satura everosvsveceseteessensevventesvvuenste 1 2 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings cccsccsssscssssccsssccssssssssssssessees 1 4 Customising Your Telephone Functions 0 ceccceeeeeeeeeseceeeteeeenteeees 1 5 Customising the Buttons o
146. Eee By a Q FEJE PES o Aa o D Se CAA eo l o o a L o agl 2 gt BE s O 2 S ibs m ob l l l ll Mm td eee Rg LL l _ L_ BO Ss we amp n 2 a Sm F jaa z 8 c 1 naa is isa CI ODIOI aAINIS NJ OINI ODI OQI mINI ais SEAE mi SA a Programming Tables 7 40 Programming Tables 612 Room Monitor Assignment 613 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection 614 Internal Pulse Detection Extension port no Selection Enable Disable Selection Enable Disable Selection Enable Disable Default All y y 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 as gt E 615 LCD Language Assignment Selection Selection English Spanish Portuguese English Spanish Portuguese Default All Yo 09 01 10 02 11 03 12 04 13 05 14 06 15 07 16 08 x Programming Tables 7 41 Programming Tables 702 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Lunch 4 D E D 3 2 D E D E 701 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Night 4 Doorphone no E Enable D Disable 4 D E 3 DJE D E 1 DJE On lt em ep f ee vo o a a UI o
147. Enable Disable Enable Disable MODE 1 MODE 2 Default Vv V V Change i i i 111 112 DSS Console Hold Music Selection Indication Mode Selection External Tone Enable Disable Default v Vv Change Programming Tables 7 7 Programming Tables 115 Extension Ringing 116 Pattern Selection Conference Pattern Selection Selection Single Double Triple meee a o oL Default v Jv Change 117 118 119 Redialling after 120 Call Pickup Tone Pulse Restriction Pulse to Tone Conversion Bell Frequency Selection Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable 20Hz 25Hz Default v Vv y A Change 121 Automatic Exchange Line 122 Automatic Rotation Access Number Selection for Exchange Line Access Selection Dial 0 Dial 9 Enable Disable Default v Jv Change 123 124 SLT Ringing 125 Call Barring 126 DSS Break Ratio Mode Selection Check for X and Off Hook Mode Selection MODE MODE2 MODE MODE2 Enable Disable Enable Disable Default Vv v Vv v Change 127 Pickup Group Set Default Extension group no 1 8 X all Selection T T T T T T T T All DD 3 rA 5 Ge p EA wewe v o tT Enable fie Sa eo nile SS of 200 Hold Recall Time Selection 30 sec 1 min 1 5 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min Disable Default i Ch
148. Features 3 57 P R 3 Features Pulse to Tone Conversion Allows an extension user to change the dialling mode from Pulse to Tone after entering a telephone number to access services such as computer telephone services or Voice Mail which require tones e This feature only works for exchange lines which have set Pulse Mode or Call Blocking Mode in program 401 Changing from Tone to Pulse is not possible I ISF Required System Programming 401 Dial Mode Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Pulse to Tone Conversion The RECALL button is used to allow a proprietary telephone user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up This is activated when MODE2 is selected in program 110 and the RECALL button is pressed for longer than the time programmed in 418 When MODE1 is selected in program 110 the RECALL button can be used to access features of the Local Exchange or host PBX External Feature Access It is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a recall signal while having an outside call Assigning the External Feature Access feature to any flexible button is useful when MODE 2 was selected in program 110 This can be done from any extension by assigning the RECALL button to a One Touch Dialling button Operating Instructions 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone
149. For an SLT Dial 71 9 0 or 81 dial tone through 86 The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly J Up to 32 digits including the line access code can be programmed a In the account code verify all and forced modes an account code must be stored by pressing x X and entering the account code after the line access code X is not regarded as a pause 1 54 Operations 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Follow Me You can set the Call Forwarding feature from the destination extension This is useful if you forget to set Call Forwarding All Calls before you leave your desk Setting PT and SLT At the destination extension S Co For a PT R a a 9 JU Foran sur Lift the handset For a PT Press Dial5 Enter your Dial Confirmation Hang up or or press the FWD DND extension number tone and press the SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial 71 dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR button button e You may press the flexible line key The FWD DND indicator light flashes red assigned as the FWD DND button slowly instead e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of This feature can be cancelled at your extension or the destination extension i Operations 1 55 suoneuodo oiseg 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Cancel There are two cancelling methods for Call Forwarding The cancelling depends on the Call Forwarding type that has been assigned Cancel
150. Installation 2 5 2 3 Frame Ground Connection IMPORTANT 2 6 Connect the frame of the main unit to the ground 1 Loosen the screw 2 Insert the grounding wire user supplied To the ground Screw 3 Tighten the screw 4 Connect the grounding wire to the ground Opening the Top Front Cover 1 Loosen the screw 2 Remove the top front cover Top front cover 1 The screw cannot be removed from the cover 2 6 Installation 2 7 Exchange Line Connection Connection 1 Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 2 conductor wiring into the ports CO 1 through 3 on the system 2 Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the ports from the Local Exchange View of TEL Port Exchange Line To Terminal Board or Ports from the Local Exchange j Exchange Line ports are at TNV a Installing Lightning Protectors A lightning protector is a device to be installed on an exchange line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the equipment A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line Problems due to lightning surges have been steadily increasing with the development of electronic equipment In many countries there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200
151. LCD Language Assignment 700 702 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 703 705 Door Opener Assignment Day Night Lunch All extension ports English All doorphones all extension ports Enable Day Night Lunch All door openers all extension ports Disable Day Night Lunch 706 Doorphone Ringing Tone Pattern Selection All doorphones Triple 707 Doorphone Access Tone Selection All doorphones Enable 708 Doorphone Ringing Time All doorphones 15 seconds 709 Door Opener Time All door openers 5 seconds 800 SMDR RS 232C Communication Parameters 801 SMDR Parameter New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity Mark Stop bit 1 Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 802 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Outgoing calls On Incoming calls On Printing 803 Secret Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling No printing Printing 805 SMDR Account Code Selection CODE 806 SMDR Language Assignment English 5 6 Appendix 32 Specifications System Capacity Exchange Lines 3 max 6 max with 3 CO Line amp 8 Ext Expansion Card Extensions 8 max 24 max with 3 CO Line amp 8 Ext Expansion Card and 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card Control Method CPU 16 bit CPU Control ROM 4 Mbit Control RAM 1 Mbit Switching Space Division CMOS Crosspoint Switch Po
152. LL e 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Remote Extension Lock See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Lock Operations 1 57 suoneuodo oiseg 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Showing Your Message on the Calling Party s Display Absent Message Capability When a caller using a proprietary telephone with a LCD dials another extension a programmed Absent Message Message 1 through 6 will be displayed on the calling party s LCD Absent Messages can be set at any telephone SLT or PT Setting the absent message Any Telephone y 5 parameter e cbs Off hook Dial 75 Dial the message number Enter the required parameter Dial ff On hook Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of DISPLAY MESSAGE MessaAGeE No PARAMETER M hour minute o or GJ Enter the hour Enter the minute For AM press 0 01 through 12 00 through 59 For PM press 1 Out Until day day month Enter the month Enter the day 01 through 12 01 through 31 Back at W AM or PM hour minute At Ext 909090 extension no tension number ex mne umbe Enter the extension number 100 though 199 eee jon Note indicates where you enter the desired parameter J PT _ To confirm the message go off hook It will be displayed a
153. One Touch Access for System Features When the assigned button is pressed a recall signal is sent during the programmed time in 418 Dey I Required System Program Address 110 Recall Key Mode 418 Recall Time e Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features External Feature Access 3 58 Features 3 Features R Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone Pressing the Recall button is used to allow a single line telephone user to hold a call for transferring or holding if the recall time is within the assigned time in program 207 The procedure to transfer a call or hold is determined in program 104 Hold Mode Selection Pressing the Recall button can be also used to disconnect a call if the recall time is more than the assigned time in program 207 If MODE 1 was selected in program 207 the system will recognise pressing the Recall button as hooking while a busy tone or reorder tone is sent or during a conversation The system will recognise as 1 being dialled in the pulse mode while a dial tone is sent The system can refuse receiving a pulse signal by selecting Disable in program 614 Therefore even if the Recall button is pressed during a dial tone the system will regard it as hooking I mp Reguired System Programming 207 Recall Timing Range Selection 614 Internal Pulse Detection Receiving Calls Allows an extension user to receive an intercom or outside call b
154. Programming may be required to perform this feature properly Z During an outside call the RECALL button can be used as a External Feature Access button np 1 7 Useful Features External Feature Access e See the Installation Manual Section 3 Recall Operations 1 19 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Handsfree Operation Allows you to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset SP PHONE Press SP PHONE The microphone and speaker are now activated Handsfree operation is available Switching from the handset to handsfree mode s Gla Press SP PHONE Hang up SP PHONE Do not replace the handset without pressing the SP PHONE button first or the call will be terminated Switching from handsfree to the handset mode BN Lift the handset e Helpful hints for the Handsfree operation Use this unit in a quiet room for best performance If you and the other party talk at the same time parts of your conversation will be lost To avoid this talk alternately PT _ The handsfree mode is cancelled if you do not start dialling within 10 seconds PT _ The KX T7050 has MONITOR button instead of a SP PHONE button It can be used for handsfree dialling etc but it cannot be used for a handsfree conversation PT You can enable the handsfree mode by pressing a line key or INTERCOM button I ISF e See the Installat
155. R Geer e1 A o Jan Dec 1 31 ee 0 B G END gt Ea mew ee Sun Sat 112 AM PM Default 98 Jan 1 Thu 12 00 AM To return to the previous programming step press To correct a wrong entry for the year day hour or minute press the CLEAR button and enter the new one in each step After changing an entry you can press the STORE button You do not have to perform the rest of the steps The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed The system supports years from 1998 to 2097 Feature References Section 3 Features Date and Time Setting Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 001 System Speed Dialling Entry Assigns a maximum of 100 System Speed Dialling numbers To delete a stored phone number press the CLEAR and STORE buttons after En the Speed Dialling number EFE eee NEXT or PREV eee AA ma 7 To continue OOO te xm 00 99 32 digits max e g 0 9 X To continue Default Not stored To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one A line access number 9 or O 81 through 86 should be included before the phone number System Programming 4 5 001 002 4 2 System Programming e Up to 32 digits consisting of 0 through 9 x F PAUSE RECALL and ICM Secret can be stored If you are storing an account code assigned in 310 Account Codes enter x
156. RE One Touch Access for System Features Features that can be accessed using the dialling buttons can also be programmed into memory Programming co a MESSAGE AUTO DIAL Cg STORE Press the programmable button and dial2 Enter the desired feature number Press STORE or press the PF button PF If you want to use a programmable feature button as a button for External Feature Access you can press the RECALL button instead of the feature number When you press the assigned button you can access special features e g Call Waiting offered by a host PBX or Local Exchange E To Access Cc Off hook Press the programmable button Confirmation tone 1 beep assigned above Whether the confirmation tone is heard or not depends upon the programmable feature aay Operations 1 13 suoneuodo oiseg 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Display Contrast Adjustment The CONTRAST selector is used to adjust the display contrast CONTRAST HIGH e e e LOW MID Adjust the CONTRAST switch to the desired setting LOW MID HIGH e This feature is available for a KX T7130 only i 1 14 Operations 12 Proprietary Telephone Settings To adjust the ringer volume HIGH eee OFF LOW Adjust the RINGER Volume lever to the desired setting OFF LOW HIGH To adjust the speaker volume VOLUME MAX mmm MIN
157. RS Fo Ci Ge 1 101 os One Touch Access for System Features 0 ceeceeeceeeseeesseeeenneeeenes 1 102 8 Call Fans RET as dU FF hd ddod 1 102 Section2 Appendix 21 Tone Ring Tome Last ce GN Uy GYNNON HYF LLYRY 2 2 2 2 LED Indicatii iei sceidsseaccasnacausansse excastee cosa cane NO DDU O GR ond 2 3 2 3 Feature Number List isissssscasssesscvsssccsvccestevees svcseveeesavevcacstecnccestvesvesnnsvvnens 2 4 2 4 Display Example sisistiasicecinctavcasvvcase ners cconk nip Wd FUN UY EOS 2 7 2 5 Trou bleshootiiig iii iii Gi HY DYNO AFF TY keetes otioso nons YNA DF GEDDUOU 2 11 Index 10 Section 1 Operations suoneuodo oiseg 1 I Before Operating What kind of telephone do you use In this manual you will find how to operate the feature depending on your type of telephone If you use single line devices such as a single line telephone or data terminal you will follow the steps which enter a feature number If you use single line devices which do not have a X or F key it is not possible to access features that have x or in their access numbers If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone which has a special function button and or a display you will follow the button or display operation for easy access If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone which does not have a function button you may change one of the unused buttons to a specific function button Refer to Section 1 2 Proprietary T
158. RS Modification Removed Digits Determines how the dialled number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before sending to the exchange line for each route The digits are deleted from the beginning of the dialled number BY Y A A sse cess dderwen BH By To continue Ae be TED Ge ee 1 4 y To continue s Default All routes 0 No deletion np Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 361 ARS Modification Added Number Determines how the dialled number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before sending to the exchange line for each route Numbers are added to the beginning of the dialled number Numbers can be carrier codes etc ria orcas a ly gc woah aided aire To continue aon w EE Goe mo 1 4 20 digits max g 0 9 To continue gj Default Route 1 131 Other routes Not stored To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one w Press to scroll the display to the right side The assigned numbers will be added to the dialled number after deleting the digits programmed in 360 ARS Modification Removed Digits Rp Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 39 362 363 4 2 System Programming 362 ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection Selects the dial tone pattern Disable no tone Tonel Tone2 or Tone3 generated after
159. Reference Section 3 Features Call Pickup 118 Pulse Restriction Enables or disables sending pulse dialling to the Local Exchange during a conversation with an external party when Pulse Mode or Call Block Mode is selected in program 401 Dial Mode CHIE ee me ee mo Enable Disable Default Enable 119 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion re Enables or disables sending tone dialling to the Local Exchange when an extension user redials after changing the pulse mode into tone mode by pressing and ff CME ser Ea Gem we Enable Disable Default Disable e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Pulse to Tone Conversion 4 22 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 120 122 120 Bell Freguency Selects the bell freguency sent to a single line telephone SLT JAA nes Ea ros o 20 25 Hz Default 25 Hz 121 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection Selects the Automatic Exchange Line Access number 0 or 9 GGG ser fas Gon te Dial 0 Dial 9 Default Dial 9 l If you select 0 the operator call will automatically be 9 If you select 9 the a operator call will automatically be 0 IF Feature References Section 3 Features Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Operator Call 122 Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Access Enables or disables the rotation of exchange lines seized for Autom
160. S 7x Extension password EXTN 2 hhmm hh hour 01 12 mm minute 00 59 Appendix 2 5 2 3 Feature Number List Feature Numbers FEATURE NUMBER While a busy tone is heard Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 6 Busy Extension Signalling Executive Busy Override 3 While a Do Not Disturb tone is heard Do Not Disturb DND Override 2 During a call or while talking Alternate Calling Ring Voice x Conference 3 Door open 5 Pulse to Tone Conversion x When the telephone is on hook Background Music BGM on off 1 Time Day Night Lunch mode display EXTN and extension name x Date day month and time display date month day year day of the week display changing e When xX or are included in a feature number users with rotary telephones cannot access the feature except for the ones which can use 0 instead of F Qesy 2 6 Appendix 2 4 Display Example Due to the Trilingual Selection Feature you can select the display in English Spanish or Portuguese by System Programming The left part is the English display and the right part is the Spanish display ENGLISH DISPLAY Set Time amp Date SPANISH DISPLAY Fijar Hora Fecha DESCRIPTION Factory setting The system clock is not working properly 1 Jan 1 Jan 12 00AM 20 00 223 Tony Viola 1 Ene 1 Ene 12 00AM 20 00 223 Tony Viola The current date and time us
161. SATION e Call Hold Call Splitting Press the Recall button Call Hold Retrieve Outside calls 5 3 Exchange Line No Call Hold Retrieve Intercom calls 5 e Call Transfer to Extension Press the Recall button Extension No e Call Waiting Answering On hook Off hook DURING A CONVERSATION e Call Hold Call Splitting Press the Recall button Call Hold Retrieve Outside calls 5 3 Exchange Line No Call Hold Retrieve Intercom calls 5 e Call Transfer to Extension Press the Recall button Extension No e Call Waiting Answering On hook Off hook Paging All Extensions and Transfer Press the Recall button 3 Paging Answer e Conference 3 party Press the Recall button Phone No Press the Recall button e Paging All Extensions and Transfer Press the Recall button Paging Answer e Conference 3 party Press the Recall button Phone No Press the Recall button EXTENSION PROGRAMMMING SETTING EXTENSION PROGRAMMMING SETTING e Personal Speed Dialling Store e Personal Speed Dialling Store 2 x Personal Speed Dial No 0 Phone No 2 x Personal Speed Dial No 0 9 Phone No e Call Waiting Outside calls Set 7 3 1
162. SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7340 SP PHONE MONITOR Turning the Microphone off Microphone Mute Allows you to turn off the microphone so you can consult privately with others in the room You will still be able to hear the other party Setting During a conversation in the handsfree mode AUTO ANSWER The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator TUS light flashes red slowly Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE Cancelling When microphone mute is established AUTO ANSWER The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns off MUTE Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE PT This feature is only available during a handsfree conversation i np See the Installation Manual Section 3 Microphone Mute Operations 1 51 suoneuodo oiseg 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Forwarding Calls Call Forwarding E Automatically transfers incoming calls to another extension or to an external destination The following types are available TYPE DESCRIPTION All Calls All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension Busy or No Answer All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension when you do not answer or when your extension is busy To Exchange Line All incoming calls are forwarded to an exchange line Follow Me Allows you to set Call Forwarding All Calls feature from another extension Note You can also set Voice Mail as the forwarding destination Refer to
163. Start Time 10 seconds after dialling 206 Dialling Start Time 0 millisecond 207 Recall Timing Range Selection MODE 1 208 Interdigit Time 20 seconds 210 DTMF Time MODE 1 211 No Dial Disconnection Enable 212 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit 10 minutes 213 Bell Off Detection 3 seconds 300 Carrier Excepted Code Assignment All codes Not stored 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class Boundary Class 1 302 305 Call Barring Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes All codes Not stored 306 Call Barring Exception Codes All codes Not stored 309 Emergency Dial Number Set Code 01 999 Code 02 112 Other codes Not stored 310 Account Codes All codes Not stored 311 Automatic Pause Insertion Codes All codes Not stored Appendix 5 3 5 1 Default Values Address Program Default 312 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class Disable 350 ARS Selection All exchange lines Disable 351 354 Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes Leading Digits All codes Not stored 355 358 Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes All codes Not stored 359 1st Carrier Selection Code BT Line Access Code 121 British Telecom Line access code 360 ARS Modification Removed Digits All routes O No deletion 361 ARS Modification
164. System Programming 703 705 Door Opener Assignment Day Night Lunch 709 Door Opener Time Related Feature Reference Doorphone Call Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Door Opener Doorphone Call Up to 4 Doorphones KX T30865 can be installed If a visitor presses the doorphone button a pre assigned extension user in programs 700 702 can answer the call and talk to the visitor Any extension user can call a doorphone The doorphones are also used for the Room Monitor feature An optional Doorphone Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a doorphone Four doorphones can be installed Doorphone 1 and 2 cannot be used simultaneously When one is in use an extension user cannot have a conversation with the other Doorphone 3 and 4 are the same An access tone can be programmed in 707 to be sent to a monitored doorphone before room monitoring starts The ring tone from the doorphone call is programmable in 706 I 3 30 Features Features D Connection Reference 2 16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Reguired System Programming 700 702 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 706 Doorphone Ringing Tone Pattern Selection 707 Doorphone Access Tone Selection 708 Doorphone Ringing Time Related Feature References Door Opener Room Monitor Operating Instructions References 1 7 Useful Features Room Monitor 1 7 Useful Features Do
165. System Speed Dialling Name Setting eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 12 012 Alternative Feature Numbering Plano eeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeees 4 13 100 Hunting Group Sel deunydd DF tase acide toate 4 14 Contents 101 Hunting Type si naiU aydd FU TNG WRYD FAD YN NN GAS 4 14 102 Voice Mail Port for KX TVP100 eeeeeeeee iie ren 4 15 103 DTMF Integration for KX TVP100 eee eeececeeeeeeeteeeeees 4 16 104 Hold Mode Selection c ccc ccccesesssssssessssesssssssesssssssssnsreeees 4 17 105 Conference TONE i ein nn n Ean 4 17 106 External Paging Access Tone ceeccceescecsereeceseeeceeeeeesteeeesaes 4 18 107 DTMF Receiver Check 00 0 0 cccccceccccccccccessessnsececeeeeseeensnteaeens 4 18 108 Recall Mode for a Locked Extension ccccccccccceeeessrseees 4 18 109 CO Indicator Assieninient 2s es gy Ng Fd 4 19 LLTO Recall Key Modein aa ER 4 19 111 Hold Music Selection cccccscssccececcceesessssecececeeseeesssseaeees 4 20 112 DSS Console Indication Mode ccccecsessecececeeseeesssseaeees 4 20 115 Extension Ringing Pattern Selection 00 ee eeeeeeereeeeeeee 4 21 116 Conference Pattern Selection ccccccccccesessecececeeeeeeserseaeees 4 21 EAT al Pielaip Tone ss ss ML tie iad eae ee o 4 22 118 Pulse Restriction ccccccccccccecsssessnsecececececeessssececeseeseeesenteaeees 4 22 119 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion 9 4 22
166. The called extension starts ringing without dialling For an exchange line The line is seized mr Operating Instructions Reference 1 3 Making Calls Making Your Telephone Ring Back Automatically When a Line Becomes Free Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Automatic Exchange Line Access Number An Automatic Line Access number 0 or 9 can be programmed When an extension user dials an Automatic Line Access number before a telephone number an available exchange line from the assigned lines in program 419 is seized automatically If 0 is selected in program 121 the operator call will be 9 automatically If 9 is selected in program 121 the operator call will be 0 automatically I Related Feature References Operator Call Outside Calling Reguired System Programming 121 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access 3 4 Features 3 Features A Automatic Route Selection ARS The system automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time a long distance call is made on the exchange line enabled for ARS feature It is not necessary to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier 1 Normal Use To make a call via the least expensive carrier the dialled number is modified The following are modification examples Example 1 Long distance call using Route 1 350 ARS Selection Enable 351 Route 1 Sel
167. X Detection Card KX TA62491 Flat cables 5 Close the cover mp Reguired System Programming See Required System Programming in Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Outgoing Message OGM 2 20 Installation 2 16 _ Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Four doorphones KX T30865 and 4 door openers user supplied can be installed Maximum cable length The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line cord which connects the system is as follows 0 6 mm 24 AWG Under 113 m 0 8 mm 22 AWG Under 180 m Extension Loop Limit 20 O Panasonic Doorphone KX T30865 d gt 6 0 8 mm 22 AWG Under 180 m Door Opener Installing the Doorphone 1 Loosen the screw to open the doorphone unit 2 Attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws Screws Note Two kinds of screws are included Please choose the appropriate one depending on your type of wall J Type 1 When a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall jis Type 2 When you wish to install the doorphone
168. a RG NAS 2 10 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection 2 12 External Music Connection sccscscscccsscsssscssscsccecscscsscssscseseeesees 2 13 Parallelled Telephone Connection ccsscccssscccsssccsssccesssscessccesees 2 14 Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection scccssccssssccsssscesesscesees 2 15 Printer and PC Connection sisicissscavdecsiessscnisseiesoeesnesseviensonnssensesetstnasoon 2 16 Location of Optional Cards wd ry CW NAD FAYN NEO NNU nn En GoR 2 19 OGM FAX Detection Card Installation nc 2 19 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection 44 94 55 n nn 2 21 Installing a 3 CO Line amp 8 Ext Expansion Card KX TA62477 and 8 SLT Extn Expansion Card KX TA62474 2 25 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 30 Sec ring the COES 5 55555555 sos 5r idi GY FN ROE Od coassdmecusasesecoseceneesdancockoesaes 2 31 Closing the Front Cover eii G Udo CDU YNOM DDO 2 31 Starting the System for the First Time cssssccssssccsssscsssessseees 2 32 System Restart v i Yii iU Yn YN NR Ad YNN YY GYN DDR ert So NU Cn YNYR FR 2 33 System Data Clear is ki b cabecava veep ccvoceovacossen acevo catsacnsconccescovvatvnscore 2 34 Features Absent Message Capability aeyn wng diy Flog tats cncedecahen dw o CS 3 2 Account Code EntTyos ea GG stances AD Y FU i ld OU 3
169. a uu ee En A 1 4 S Station Message Detail Recording SMDR with the Call r ID Card ui GG CD GG ieee 1 7 1 3 System Program ip eiiisis iW YRR GONE ARRRARFFRNNORNO NNRRGORRANN ONN RRROOR DARN 1 8 900 Caller ID Ass ie mt TW GaG RT OD FY GIDA YAR 1 8 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment 4i9 wUd 1 8 902 Caller ID Modification for Local CallSs ueueeeen 1 9 903 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance CallS 1 10 904 Caller ID Log Priority election i Gw Gi Fo 1 11 906 Caller ID SMDR Format e iH 1 11 1 4 Programming Tapes visccssssisccsiccccccssesseccosscessssocasesovecssesnsssocessteescesntesseee 1 12 Section 2 Operations 2 1 Proprietary Telephone Settings sccssscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssess 2 2 Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 2 2 2 Telephone F atUtES sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssosssssssssssnsissssossssssssssssssssssss ssss 2 4 C Call Information og Fic OY RY 2 4 Call Log TRO OIL odd O Cd FOR Un NF 2 5 E Electronic Extension Lockout ee GG OA EUO 2 8 2 3 Display Example iscsi ccissssvcecssossesizsesssecacsssenccsaseessvcssvcscecvsvsetecoasetssessvessexs 2 9 For proprietary telephone operations all button illustrations are based on the KX T7130 Section I Installation 1 1 Caller ID Card Installation 1 Power off the system and unplug the AC cord 2 Loosen the screw 3 Remove
170. ables Programming Tables 603 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Lunch 5 COS no 1 602 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Night 5 COS no 1 601 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Day 5 COS no 1 Extension port no Default All Ol 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Tables 7 38 Programming Tables on 2 2 T m ce a e SINS Say a 2 sp S 2 S o o g g em 3t 7 a in vo Qe ay gR ior EU Ss m o o o gt 2 5 SIN n U m Z So s O S sp o B Ecs EE EE 2 S Yala SE og g 2 mn Le G E nee em 5S PO 2 i E is g a o a 2 gt SIET S o Ol o c mE o o o 5 o eo FL o Q lt EE Mn IRE e o 3 2 g 2 2 15 lt alc zselelwe eic n clw e el cle gt clc n o xw s si82 o e 9 gt e1 gt gt e 9 gt l gt l a a ai si amp o BAS a 7 39 Programming Tables Programming Tables Disturb Override Selection o gc o 2 2 gt se Far mm Q ag ea De Pe ee De eee l 0 Ob _ Saye Sin lt g amp
171. ace 1 bit 2 bits O None CR LF Carriage Return Line Feed CR Carriage Return 2 Select None when the error checking function is not required from the printer Default New line Baud rate Word length Parity Stop bit length To return to the previous mode press instead of The following combinations are invalid i Parity Word length Stop bit length Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 If any of the above invalid combinations are selected an alarm tone is heard Rp Feature Reference Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 82 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 801 802 801 SMDR Parameter Assigns the following 2 printing parameters to match the SMDR output with the paper size used in the printer Page Length Sets the number of lines per page Skip Perf Sets the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page Perforation lt Sets the page length gt OE wa aan fee 4 99 lt Sets the CIA Deitono gt ETETEN 95 lt Example gt Default Page length 66 lines Standard paper Skip perforation 0 line fortheSMDR 11 inches O O The page length should be at least 4 lines i O O O O o o longer than the skip perforation length S 66 ines o eer To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR skip o button and enter the new one perforation 1 O O Q Q I Feature Referen
172. age is sent so that the system can recognise the end of the DISA call SI s Ler Geor feror sw Disable 2 3 4 Times Disable Does not detect Default 4 Times np e Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Uniform Call Distribution UCD Required only when the optional OGM FAX Detection System Programming 4 63 Card is installed 514 515 4 2 System Programming 514 FAX Tone Detection i I Sets the number of times the FAX CNG tone must be detected while the DISA outgoing message is sent before the system recognises the incoming signal as facsimile data COE Cee Ee so Ge 1 Time 2 Times Default 1 Time The extension which can receive facsimile data must be assigned in program 503 FAX Connection Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 515 Intercept Time for Internal DISA IS Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting DTMF signals after a call is received at the internal DISA If the system does not receive DTMF signals within the programmed time the call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program 510 DISA No Dial Mode SILI Cer Geer eror Ceo 3 6 9 sec Default 3 seconds A cyclic tone and FAX CNG tone cannot be detected by the internal DISA e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 64 System Programming
173. al No 00 99 e Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dial No 0 9 e Redial Last Number or 8 0 e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 6 e Doorphone Call 3 1 Doorphone No 1 4 Quick Reference Cards For Single Line Telephones MAKING CALLS e Intercom Calling Extension No e Operator Call 0 or 9 e Outside Calls Automatic Line Access 9 or Phone No e Outside Calls Individual Trunk Group Access Trunk Group No 81 86 Phone No e System Speed Dialling X System Speed Dial No 00 99 e Personal Speed Dialling _Personal Speed Dial No 0 9 e Redial Last Number or 8 0 e Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 6 e Doorphone Call 3 1 Doorphone No 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 RECEIVING CALLS i RECEIVING CALLS e Call Pickup Directed 4 Extension No e Call Pickup Directed 4 Extension No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 e Call Pickup Group 4 0 e Call Pickup Group 4 0 DURING A CONVER
174. all CO Indicator Assignment Allows an extension not programmed to ring Enable Allow 408 410 to receive the call by pressing the CO Line button Recall Key Mode Model Sends Recall signal time Prog Step 418 Mode 1 ws Mode2 Recall signal is sent while the button is pressed eres Hold Music Selection Assigns External Music or Tone Beep External Music D ee emilee DSS Console Indication Mode Assigns if an extension set as FWD DND Enable Flashing CorrwD DND don a Menyw Ye burrpss NS Call Pick up Tone Confirmation tone sent Enabled Tone when the Call Pickup feature is used Pulse Restriction Enables Disables pulses being sent to the CO Line Enable during a conversation when Call Block is set in program step 401 Redialling after Pulse Tone Allows Redial to use tone dialling on a pulse CO Line Disable conversion if the call had used and to convert to Tone 1 8 2 100 10 102 103 104 105 10 09 1 110 11 112 115 116 117 1 118 Bell Frequency Sets the Bell Frequency for an SLT device Automatic Line Access Number If set at O Operator call becomes 9 Auto Rotation of Line Access Auto rotation of CO lines seized Disabled no rotate Call Forward Start Time Call FWD no answer timer 15 secs Options 5 10 15 20 secs Pickup Dial Delay Time Auto Dial time delay 3 secs Hot Telephone Options 1 2 3 4 secs Dial Start Time Time between seizing a CO Line and digits being
175. allation 2 22 System Restart After starting the system if the system does not operate properly restart the system Before restarting the system try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not System Restart causes the following e Camp on is cleared e Calls on Hold are terminated e Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated e Calls in progress are terminated e Call Park is cleared e Message Waiting is cleared Last Number Redial is cleared e Saved Number Redial is cleared Other data is not cleared by System Restart 1 Turn the Power Switch OFF and then ON If the system still does not operate properly please see 2 23 System Data Clear n Installation 2 33 2 23 System Data Clear When the system does not operate properly after restarting you can clear the programming data stored in the system The system will restart with the default settings First try system program 999 System Data Clear by following step 4 in 2 21 Starting the System for the First Time If the system still does not operate properly please follow the procedure below 1 Slide the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position 2 Press the Reset Button 3 Return the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position before the power indicator stops flashing The power indicator will flash for about 10 seconds Reset Button
176. aller reaches the DISA line Without optional With optional a OGM FAX Detection Card OGM FAX Detection Card Internal DISA mus FD A EFA AF Tos r T42 r Tt i One short beep OGM bee eee J EE Y ERE 4 mmm UL 16 Cyclic tone FAX CNG tone 13 CPC signal A number is dialled 4 Nothing is dialled The call is sent to Y the fax extension y Is Intercept Routing employed 14 Yes Busy tone Y The call reaches the destination The call is sent to 6 another extension The call is not answered The destination j extension s is are busy The call is not answered The call is not answered for 40 seconds Soe Y i Y 6 Whatis the DISA 8 Is Intercept Routing employed No The call is sent to Disconnect Call Waiting DISA2 Disconnect another extension Busy tone The other Q OGM is heard Gort yr y Goes to 10 The call is not answered Goes to Note The explanation for 1 through 16 is on the next page Features 3 25 1 2 3 tg S 6 7 8 3 Features The DISA Delayed timer starts This is the time between a call reaching the system and being received The time is assigned in program 504 When the assigned time period in program 519 expires the system sends a short beep to the caller The Intercept Timer for Internal DISA starts This is the time the system waits for the number
177. already been set by the extension user and this feature is set afterwards the user cannot unlock their extension Only the operator or manager can cancel the lock e Extension passwords must be assigned to the operator and manager extensions beforehand e An extension user can make a call at the locked extension depending on system programming System programming determines which barring level applies to a call at the locked extension IE 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Locking Your Telephone Electronic Extension Lockout See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Lock 1 94 Operations 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting This system supports the day night and lunch modes The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different in the day night and lunch modes Call barring can be programmed to prevent unauthorised calls for each mode Changing Day Night or Lunch mode in manual or automatic mode J e or _ For Manual Day mode y 2 or Q2 For Manual Night mode L 3 or _ For Manual Lunch mode al Lift the handset or press For manual day mode Dial 781 or press the DSS button assigned as the Day button SP PHONE MONITOR For manual night mode Dial 782 or press the DSS button assigned as the Night button For manual lunch mode Dial 783 or press the DSS button assigned as the Lunch button g G3 Confirmation tone
178. ame line can be assigned as a S CO key and G CO key The exchange lines for making and or receiving calls in trunk groups must be pre programmed When your extension is assigned as the incoming call destination for an exchange line you cannot receive any incoming exchange line calls unless a G CO O CO or S CO key associated with the line is assigned DSS Direct Station Selection Button I co Cg AUTO DIAL a sae UE STORE Press the programmable button Dial 1 Enter an extension number Press STORE 1 3 Making Calls Intercom Calling 1 10 Operations 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings One Touch Dialling Button co MESSAGE ad a PF n AUTO DIAL telephone no EL STORE Press the programmable button and dial 2 Enter the telephone number Press STORE or press the PF button max 24 digits To store the telephone number of an external party a line access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 must be stored as the first digit You can use 0 through 9 X PAUSE and INTERCOM Secret as follows PAUSE inserts a pause INTERCOM conceals all or part of a stored number The number of Personal Speed Dialling numbers corresponds to the number of PF buttons assigned as One Touch Dialling PF buttons are on a proprietary telephone You cannot assign both the One Touch Dialling and Personal Speed Dialling features For example if you assign One Touch Dialling to the PF 1 but
179. amming 4 67 Card is installed 524 526 4 2 System Programming 524 UCD Intercept Mode re Selects the operation when all extensions in the UCD group do not answer an outside call via the UCD feature within the length of time programmed in 525 UCD Ringing Time before Intercept Intercept or Disconnect is available Intercept The call is redirected depending on programs 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Intercept Routing No Answer feature Disconnect The call is disconnected SEIL rer Eeee ion evo J Intercept Disconnect Default Intercept e Feature References Section 3 Features Intercept Routing Uniform Call Distribution UCD 525 UCD Ringing Time before Intercept Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing No Answer feature 12 524 UCD Intercept Mode Intercept When the time expires the system starts to redirect the call to the programmed extension s SE wer ec sioe Lew J 10 20 30 40 60 120 sec Default 20 seconds e Feature References Section 3 Features Intercept Routing Uniform Call Distribution UCD 526 UCD Ringing Time after Intercept I Assigns the length of time to call the extension s where a call is redirected by the Intercept Routing No Answer feature 524 UCD Intercept Mode Intercept after the time programmed in 525 UCD Ringing Time before Intercept expires DAA E k so
180. anager only d Night Button Operator Manager only e Lunch Button Operator Manager only f Extension Lock Button Operator Manager only PF buttons can be changed to One Touch Dialling buttons When the STORE button is pressed after programming you will hear beep tones as follows 1 beep The entry is different from the one that was stored previously 2 beeps The entry is the same as the previously stored one You can check the stored data in the following way 1 Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM 2 Press the desired button while on hook The data will be displayed After checking the data return the MEMORY switch to the SET position I L 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone DSS Button One Touch Dialling Button Direct Extension Dialling An extension can be called and accessed by simply pressing a DSS button The BLF shows if the extension is engaged br PT and DSS Console 2 o Paired Telephone DSS Console o 5 2 cc a N o Lift the handset or press Press the desired DSS button o SP PHONE MONITOR B a J e By System Programming you can press a DSS button directly to make an intercom call e M without going off hook g One Touch Dialling The stored number is dialled automatically by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button PT and DSS Console Paired Telephone DSS Console ad Lift the handset or press Press the
181. and exchange lines Exchange line 1 is connected to extension port 01 Exchange line 4 is connected to extension port 09 e All other conversations will be disconnected during a power failure e Proprietary telephones PT cannot be used during a power failure A single line telephone will work in the event of a power failure Connect a single line telephone to the above port e When power is restored after a power failure your system automatically restarts maintaining as much of the previous system settings as possible Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution Nothing is heard in the handsfree mode Headset mode is selected Set the mode to Handset The unit does not ring e The exchange line is not programmed to ring e The Ringer Volume is set to OFF To program exchange lines refer to the Installation Manual Increase the Ringer Volume Refer to Volume Control in Proprietary Telephone Settings The display flashes the following message Set Time amp Date The system internal clock is not working properly Contact your maintainer Appendix 2 11 2 12 Appendix Absent Message Capability 00 ee 1 58 Account Code Entry oe cee ceeceeeeseeseeerees 1 67 Adjustment Control Alarm Setting Timed Reminder 1 72 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 1 82 Answering Receiving Calls Automat
182. and the recall operation is reguired follow the recall operation procedure which is reguired by the host PBX The RECALL button also allows you to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up by System Programming You can also assign a flexible key for the recall button i rE 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone One Touch Access for System Features 1 3 Making Calls Recall See the Installation Manual Section 3 External Feature Access Operations 1 79 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Self Extension Number Confirmation KX T7130 only Allows you to display your port and extension number To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM Le HOLD Press HOLD END The display shows your port and extension The display shows the initial programming number mode Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position e You can confirm your Self Extension Number by pressing X X while on hook R e See the Installation Manual Section 3 Self Extension Number Confirmation KX T7130 only Turning the Background Music on BGM You can listen to background music through the built in speaker of the telephone An external music source such as a radio
183. ange 201 202 203 Transfer Recall Time Call Forwarding Start Time Pickup Dial Delay Time Selection 15 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec Default y Vv Vv Change 7 8 Programming Tables 7 Programming Tables 204 Call Duration Count Start Time Selection 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 35 sec 40 sec 45 sec 50 sec Instantly Default ae Change 206 Dialling Start Time Selection Oms 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 11000 ms 1250 ms 1500 ms Default Vv Change i i i i i l 207 208 Recall Timing Range Selection Interdigit Time Selection MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODES Ssec 10sec 15sec 20sec Default v Jv Change a oe 210 211 No Dial 212 Exchange Line 213 DTMF Time Disconnection Duration Time Limit Bell Off Detection Selection MODE1 MODE2 Enable Disable 1 32 minutes 3sec 6sec 12sec Default Vv v 10 minutes Vv Change 300 Carrier Excepted Code Assignment CODE no Carrier code 10 digits max CODE no Carrier code 10 digits max Default All Not stored 01 11 02 12 03 13 04 14 05 15 06 16 07 17 08 18 09 19 10 20 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class Selection Class
184. ansfer oo eee eeeeeeereeereees 1 43 With Transfer sci ccsetet un Sate synied 1 43 Index 3 N O Index Night Button iu aus wei RG yni 1 100 No Line Preference 1 5 1 6 One Touch Access for System Features en 1 13 1 102 One Touch Dialling 0 eee 1 22 1 101 One Touch Dialling Button 1 11 Operator Call iia Ren 1 17 Operator Service Features 1 90 Date and Time Setting eee 1 90 Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALD ee iynu in 1 91 Outgoing Message OGM cece 1 93 Remote Extension Lock cece 1 94 Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting eee eeesessecsseceneeees 1 95 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call oaeen 1 91 Other Exchange Lines O CO Key 1 9 Outgoing Message OGM seses 1 93 Outside Calling ietsie eeeeseesseceteceeeeees 1 17 Automatic Line ACCESS ssec 1 18 Individual Line Access seese 1 18 Individual Trunk Group Access 1 19 Paging ue een GW A FY 1 48 All extensiOnS sen meirinne 1 48 All extensions amp External 1 49 ANS WETINE meinir Y DG eiii ee e 1 49 Denysnnau i i Josie eas Wn GYD seeks 1 51 External uan kae he be sects AU 1 48 GLOUP EY FE RR NN 1 48 Transfer aei i Gwi i i cause 1 50 Parallelled Telephone Connection 1 78 Personal Speed Dialling eee eee 1 24 Pickup Dialling cnnic arn
185. any For the sales division press 1 For the service division press 2 To call the operator press 0 OGM2 Same as OGM 1 Required Settings 502 MODE1 414 416 DISA1 Case 2 Uses the OGM in the day night and lunch modes OGM for DISA In the day mode Outside Call To the designated destination In the night mode Systemes The call is disconnected by assigning Disconnect for DISA2 in program tsid ll DIAR gt 510 DISA No Dial Mode OGM1 This is A company For the sales division press 1 For the service division press 2 To call the operator press 0 OGM2 We are sorry but our office is closed for the day Reguired Settings 502 MODE2 414 416 DISA 1 for OGM1 DISA for OGM2 3 48 Features Features O Case 3 Uses a different OGM for exchange lines OGM for DISA peceeeenneee Exchange line 1 OGM1 Outside Call To the designated destination Exchange line 2 Outside Call OGM2 To the designated destination Lo OGM1 This is A company For the sales division press 1 For the service division press 2 To call the operator press 0 OGM2 This is B company To contact Mr A press 101 To contact Mr B press 102 Required Settings 502 MODE2 414 41
186. ar To return to the initial display go off hook and on hook or wait for 20 seconds Pressing the Caller ID Selection button provides you with further information about the party The display changes as follows lt Example gt If the information is stored in log 03 03 BOB HANKS caller s name 030011223344 caller s number U 03 300ct 09 00PM date and time If OUT OF AREA is displayed the call may be from out of the calling area If LONG DISTANCE is displayed it may be a long distance call If PRIVATE is displayed the caller chose not to show their information 2 6 Operations 22 Telephone Features Calling back Display Operation for the KX T7130 only o3 0011223344 i 1 Confirm the number displayed in step 2 or 3 of Checking on the previous page and lift the handset or press the SP PHONE button Press the Caller ID Indication button e You may press a line key first to select a specified exchange line The last displayed number is dialled PT When Disregarding the twenty first call has been set and 20 calls are logged or when Overwriting the call log has been set and all 20 old information has been overwritten the Caller ID Selection button indicator lights and informs you that no more calls can be logged Operations 2 7 22 Telephone Features Electronic Extension Lockou
187. arding Calls Call Forwarding 0 ceecceeeecceceeeceeeteeeenteeeenaeeees Locking Your Telephone Electronic Extension Lockout Showing Your Message on the Calling Party s Display Absent Message Capability 2 0234 dceteiicel id Wyd ddd nbw wadn Advanced Operations 1 7 Useful Features cc id ei gf ddn dn ge dwU ddd SY add SANAU Conterence Sparty ea a O RR GEN WU Conference pu a wd Y A E Leaving a Message Message Waiting 0 0 eee eeceecseeeeeneeenseenteeeeees Calling with Account Codes Account Code Entry 0 eee Rejecting Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND oseese Calling an Extension which Has Do Not Disturb Set Do Not Disturb Override uu uu CG Y GN Sd anes Secret Dialling uei gri GWA y ydd CGA CN CF FF FRS Alarm Setting Timed Reminder ceu GI ded UF AA Time Day Night Lunch Service ua y Y GYT AAA Joining or Leaving a Call Distribution Group Log In Log Out Se Bu dL YF a HR Dai me Secure un Ge cadets GR Y a Cd YU Parallel Connection of a Proprietary Telephone and Single Line Telephone Parallelled Telephone Connection Mixed Extension Dialling uu gudd ynad Y Dn FLY FN G FD COR A External Feature ACCESS 5 2 0 5 uo GC EOG O A Ce Be AU Self Extension Number Confirmation So Td LSC GT _ N Oi RW s Turning the Background Music on BGM eee eeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeees Contents Extension Button Confirmation KX T7130 only 1 81 Pulse to Tone Conversion e
188. as Do Not Disturb Set Do Not Disturb Override Allows you to call an extension even though the Do Not Disturb DND feature is set System Programming is reguired to use this feature Any Telephone If you make an intercom call and hear a Do Not Disturb DND tone G 51 DND tone Wait for an answer l If you hear a reorder tone after dialling 2 the Do Not Disturb Override feature is not set at n your extension If you hear a busy tone after dialling 2 the line is busy You can use the Automatic Callback Busy feature IE 1 7 Useful Features Rejecting Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND e See the Installation Manual Section 3 Do Not Disturb DND 1 70 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Secret Dialling Allows you to conceal all or part s of a System Speed Dialling number or One Touch Dialling number assigned to a flexible line key both which normally appear on the display When storing the phone number INTERCOM a Press INTERCOM before and after the part you wish to conceal lt PT Display Example gt 901344 853 506 506 is not shown on the display when you dial PT _ A secret code or pressing the INTERCOM button is counted as 1 digit PT_ You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number PT If the phone number 901344 853 506 has been stored the display will show the following
189. as Ext Paging All extensions accessed Paging Allow Voceo Permitido Paging Deny cancelled Paging Deny Voceo Negado Paging Deny set Paging Group 1 Voceo Grupo 1 Paging Group accessed Park at 1 N A Estacio 1 N A The Call Park location is in use PITS PGM NO Programa NO Extension Programming mode PSD Set 1 Persona 1 Personal Speed Dialling is set PSD 1 Not Stored No Grabado Confirming the Personal Speed Dialling number RCL Ext 201 RCL Ext 201 Called by transfer recall without a name Call Transfer Restricted Restringido The outgoing call is barred Room Monitor Off Cancelar Monitor Room Monitor cancelled Room Monitor On Activar Monitor Room Monitor set Set COS Ext201 Clase Ext201 The Walking COS feature is set Transfer to CO Transferir a LN The destination extension has set Call Forwarding to Exchange Line Unlocked Desblogueada Electronic Extension Lockout cancelled Will Return Soon Regresare Pronto Absent Message 1 2 10 Appendix 2 5 Troubleshooting If a power failure occurs Your system allows certain extensions to make and receive calls on certain lines Power Failure Transfer and retains system programming Power Failure Transfer A specific extension will be automatically connected to a specific exchange line This provides exchange line calls between the following extensions
190. as necessary by adjusting the corresponding levers or pressing the corresponding buttons Handset receiver volume Ringer volume Speaker volume mp Operating Instructions Reference 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Volume Control Handset Receiver Ringer Speaker Walking COS Allows an extension user who is not at their own telephone to override the call barring COS number of another extension by dialling their extension password For the duration of the call the COS of the extension is changed to the COS of their own extension If the extension overriding call barring is assigned to Forced or Verify All the user must enter the account code before the line access code I When a user makes a call using this feature the user s extension number will be displayed on the SMDR not the extension where the user made the call np Operating Instructions References 1 7 Useful Features Calling Using Your Privileges at Another Extension Walking COS 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Extension Password Set Manager only 3 74 Features Section 4 System Programming 4 1 Before System Programming NOTE System data clear should be performed before System Programming me 2 21 Starting the System for the First Time Default Setting This system has factory default settings 1 5 1 Default Values If any of the programming needs to be changed you can change the settin
191. atic Exchange Line Access DAA mer Eco ro Enable Disable Default Disable Does not rotate IF Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Exchange Line Access Number System Programming 4 23 123 125 4 2 System Programming 123 Break Ratio Selects the pulse break rate MODE1 or MODE 2 when a Pulse is sent to the Local Exchange during a conversation MODE 1 66 MODE 2 60 LJ MODE1 MODE2 Default MODE 1 124 SLT Ringing Mode Selection Selects the length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone SLT MODE 1 5 second cycle MODE 2 3 second cycle HES Dw Ea so Ge MODE1 MODE2 Default MODE 2 125 Call Barring Check for and Assigns whether the entered x and are checked by call barring or not This assignment is required for certain Local Exchanges to prevent toll fraud Some Central Offices ignore the user dialled X and If your Local Exchange ignores these symbols select Disable 000 nes ea Gem we Enable Disable Default Enable IEN e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring 4 24 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 126 127 126 DSS Off Hook Mode Enables or disables making an intercom call just by pressing a DSS button on a DSS Console If enabled going off hook is not needed ILe wer beee erore ew Enable Disable Default Enable l e This assignment is also
192. barring check is completed When the timer expires an outside outgoing call will be disconnected while dialling if Enable was selected in program 211 No Dial Disconnection The call barring class for a locked extension can be assigned in program 312 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class so that even a locked extension can make a local call etc e It is programmable whether the x or the user dials is to be checked or not on the Call Barring code in program 125 Call Barring Check for X and ff This is useful to prevent unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain Local Exchange systems Reguired System Programming 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class 302 305 Call Barring Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes 306 Call Barring Exception Codes 601 603 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Day Night Lunch Related Feature References Emergency Call Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class Call Barring for System Speed Dialling Call Barring Override by Account Codes Features 3 11 C 3 Features Combination of denied codes and exception codes COS No Denied Calls Excepted Calls 1 No restriction No restriction 2 20 denied codes programmed in 302 80 exception codes code numbers 01 80 programmed in 306 3 20 denied codes programmed in 302 plus 60 exception codes code numbers 01 60 20 de
193. be selected Lo Je wer burn stone Ceno 12 24 HOUR Display example When 12 HOUR is selected Jan 1 11 20PM When 24 HOUR is selected 1 Jan 23 20 Default 12 HOUR Programs 000 Date and Time Setting and 007 Time Day Night Lunch Service n Start Time and the Timed Reminder feature are assigned using 12 hour time regardless of this program The SMDR printout is also printed using 12 hour time System Programming 4 11 011 4 2 System Programming 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting Assigns a name to each System Speed Dialling number The name will be displayed when making a call by using the System Speed Dialling feature It will also be used for the Caller ID feature i k aaa eke PREV gt l A Y ee ke ee To continue OOD es Hm ox en 00 99 16 ET To continue Name Combination Table Pressing SELECT Times Keys 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 Q q Z Z 2 2 A a B b C c 3 3 D d E e F f 4 4 G g H h I i 3 5 J j K k L 1 6 6 M m N n O o ii 7 P p R T S s 8 8 T t U u V v 9 9 W w X x Y y 0 0 2 x x Z amp lt Example gt To enter Mike 1 Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter M 2 Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter i 3 Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter ok 4 Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to
194. ber Saved Number Redial 1 28 Simply Going Off Hook Pickup Dialling eener 1 26 Simply Pressing a Button One Touch Dialling eee 1 22 System Speed Dialling eee 1 23 Your Privileges from Another Extension Walking COS oo eeeesseceneceneeees 1 87 Manager Service Features 9 1 90 Date and Time Setting eee 1 90 Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL wsciesscscessseessssetssssaceees 1 91 Extension Password S t 1 97 Outgoing Message OGM cece 1 93 Remote Extension Lock 2 e n 1 94 Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting oaeen 1 95 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call errre 1 91 MEMORY switch ooo ee eeeeeseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 4 Message ADSENt sane ee tai endian 1 58 Buttoni ueu FI F RF o DL oeda 1 13 Notification Message Waiting 1 65 OuUtgoini iini iai 1 93 MV oice Mail au user GG NR FO 1 85 MESSAGE Button ec eeeeeeeereeereeeneees 1 13 Message Waiting 00 0 eeeeceeecesecereeeeeeeees 1 65 Microphone Mute 0 eee eeeeeseeseeereeereees 1 51 Mixed Extension Dialling 0 eee 1 78 Mode Automatit 4 148 Wa Y WYAU 1 95 Day nu ad E 1 74 1 95 EKOI re e E td iu 1 67 TEATSE CE i PRAA A 1 74 1 95 Manual ue ac Yu o E a AF 1 95 NDS tis gy deni igw yg cathe 1 74 1 95 Option oee GY ean eee 1 67 Veerify AllU chet cient ria ae 1 67 Verify Toll Call Barring 0 eee 1 67 Without Tr
195. call according to program 523 as follows when the assigned time in 521 expires Disconnect The call is disconnected Intercept The other OGM leads the caller to the DISA feature amp Direct Inward System Access DISA in this section The system treats the call according to program 524 as follows when the assigned time in 525 expires Disconnect The call is disconnected Intercept The call is sent to the extensions programmed in 408 410 If the caller did not hear an OGM the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on hook The UCD Ring Timer after Intercept starts The destination telephone s will ring for the time programmed in program 526 If the call is not answered during the programmed time the call will be disconnected 3 70 Features 3 Features AY Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 This system supports Panasonic Voice Processing System VPS equipment KX TVP100 by sending DTMF tones described in program 103 The DTMF tones sent to a VPS indicate the state of a call busy answered ringing disconnected etc The DTMF tones also inform a VPS of the destination of a call transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or DISA Intercept Routing No Answer feature Up to 4 VPSs can be connected to the extension ports as extensions in the system System Explanation 1 Voice Mail Service 1 1 Call Forwarding to VM If an extension user sets Call Forwar
196. caller s telephone number CO 2 122007 3C call duration J The Caller ID Indication button indicator light may turn on when a call is received a You can modify and call back the logged numbers Refer to 2 2 Telephone Features Call Log Incoming System Programming determines which is displayed first the name or number You can program whether to print out a Caller ID number on the SMDR or not by System Programming 2 4 Operations 22 Telephone Features Call Log Incoming If you do not answer a call your extension KX T7130 only automatically records the incoming outside call information from the Caller ID service and the Caller ID Indication button indicator lights Up to 20 calls can be logged per extension When the call log is full 20 calls are stored you can select how the twenty first call is treated Either a new call can be disregarded or the new call can overwrite the oldest call that you have already confirmed Default Record the new call You can also modify and call back the logged numbers Even if you answer a call the call information can be recorded by pressing the Caller ID Indication button during the conversation Overwriting the call log Uj z A na JAWA a 7 j ola Lift the handset or press Dial 7371 Dial Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Incoming Log On
197. can see the status of the mode day night or lunch by the pre assigned DSS buttons LED on the DSS console Time service can be changed easily by pressing the pre assigned DSS buttons The following programming items will be affected by the time service 405 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day Night Lunch 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch 601 603 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Day Night Lunch 700 702 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 703 705 Door Opener Assignment Day Night Lunch i Reguired System Programming 006 Time Day Night Lunch Service Changing Mode 007 Time Day Night Lunch Service Start Time Operating Instructions References 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting 1 9 DSS Console Features Initial Settings Day Night and Lunch Buttons Assignment 3 66 Features 3 Features U Uniform Call Distribution UCD I _ Distributes incoming calls to one specific extension group called a UCD group assigned in program 520 Calls to the UCD group hunt for an idle extension in numerical order The UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high volume of calls compared with other extensions An optional OGM FAX Detecti
198. ce Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR OOO o o B 5 O O00000 perforation O O 802 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing Determines which calls will produce an SMDR printout lt fa an ies lex gt lt A an A fers gt Le o 2 nex NEXT ISELECT STORE NEXT ISELECT STORE store eno On Off Toll On Off Outgoing On Print all calls Off No printing Toll Print toll calls only Incoming On Print all calls Off No printing Default Outgoing calls Incoming calls On If Outgoing Toll is selected only calls which are checked in programs 302 305 Call n Barring Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes and are allowed are printed out gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 83 803 804 4 2 System Programming 803 Secret Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling Printing Selects to print or not print on SMDR secret dialling numbers stored in program 001 System Speed Dialling Entry and or stored in One Touch Dialling even though they are not displayed on the LCD QOD ser EA res os No Printing Printing Default No printing ep Feature References Section 3 Features Secret Dialling Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 804 System Data Dump Starts and stops printing the assigned data All or a specific a
199. ceceseeeeseeeeenaeeeenee 4 60 505 DISA Waiting Time after OGM eee eeececeseeeeeteeeenteeeenee 4 60 506 DISA Busy Modes ccisccvesjsccassssessvadisdaccasusten tusededanaWuesaceedessceennes 4 61 507 DISA Intercept Made sai nii 4 61 508 DISA Ringing Time before Intercept 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 4 62 509 DISA Ringing Time after Intercept eee eeeeeeeteeeenteeeeeee 4 62 510 DISA No Dial Mode 2 0 0 0 ceeeceessessesesessssssssssssssssssssrsseeees 4 63 213 Cyclic Tone Detection eiu ei oo Fy 4 63 514 FAX Tone Detection uuuuYYYnYYYYYLALAL A Y Y Y Y yne ynenuoun 4 64 515 Intercept Time for Internal DISA 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeteeeenteeeenee 4 64 12 Contents 516 DISA Incoming Assignment ccc ce ceesceeeereeceeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeaes 4 65 OLIT DISAAA W it Tate ce ig i a A oases 4 65 519 DISA OGM Mute Time 2 0 0 0 cccceceeeessesssersessssessssrsreeees 4 66 520 UCD Group cre dd Fd FR O O Do 4 66 521 UCD Busy Waiting Times idy nnd Ydd Uy Udo GRY Fad 4 66 522 UCD OGM Message Interval Time ee eeeueenenneninneeee 4 67 5231 UCD Busy Modern de SN y 4 67 524 UC Intercept Made SY o dd aii 4 68 525 UCD Ringing Time before Intercept 00 ee eee eeeeeereeeeeeees 4 68 526 UCD Ringing Time after Intercept 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeereeeneeeee 4 68 600 Extension Group Assignment ceeseceereeceeeeecseeeeeeteeeesees 4 69 601 603 Call Barring Class
200. cess DISA 505 DISA Waiting Time after OGM Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting the DTMF signals or FAX CNG tone after the DISA outgoing message is completed 5 o 5 NEXT SELECT STORE 0 5 10 15 sec Default 5 seconds Rs Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 60 System Programming Required only when the optional OGM FAX Detection Card is installed 4 2 System Programming 506 507 506 DISA Busy Mode Selects the operation when a called extension or all called extensions in an extension group enabled in program 100 Hunting Group Set via the DISA feature is are busy Disconnect Call Waiting or DISA2 is available Disconnect The call is disconnected after the busy tone Call Waiting A call waiting tone is sent to the called extension or first called extension in the hunting group DISA2 OGM2 is sent to the caller and the system waits for another destination when the first destination is busy 1 Cee fase so Coe Disconnect Call Waiting DISA2 Default Disconnect e Program 502 OGM Mode Selection should be MODE2 if DISA was selected in this program I Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Outgoing Message OGM 507 DISA Intercept Mode Selects the operation when a called extension or extension group via the DISA feature does not answer a call withi
201. coming outside calls via the UCD feature Selecting UCD in programs 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch is required Required System Program Address 600 Extension Group Assignment Related Feature References Call Pickup Direct Inward System Access DISA Extension Hunting Paging Uniform Call Distribution UCD Features 3 35 E 3 Features Extension Hunting If a called extension is busy Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension in an extension group in numerical order Idle extensions are automatically hunted according to programming The following 2 hunting types are available Circular hunting The extensions are hunted one time in numerical order If all extensions are busy a busy tone will be heard Terminate hunting The extensions are hunted until the extension which has the highest port number in the group is reached If all higher order numbers are busy the search will end and a busy tone will be heard J One hunting type can be selected for each extension group To leave the hunting group temporarily use the Log Out feature To rejoin use the Log In feature If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb DND Call Forwarding or Log Out Extension Hunting will skip the extension However Extension Hunting will not skip the extension which receives the call first even if it has set Do Not Disturb DND or Call Forwarding Circular Hunting Termi
202. ction 6 Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the ports from the Local Exchange 7 Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 2 or 4 conductor wiring into the ports JACK 09 through 16 2 8 Extension Connection 8 Wrap the strap around all of the cords 2 19 Securing the Cords 9 Close the covers and secure the screws Tnstalling the KX TA62474 1 Loosen the screws and open the front and bottom front covers 2 Remove the lower front panel in the same way as installing a KX TA62477 If you install the KX TA62474 to a KX TA62477 remove the top front panel with pliers 3 After cutting the areas be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth Please refer to installing the KX TA62477 Installation 2 21 2 17 Installing a 3 CO Line amp 8 Ext Expansion Card KX TA62477 and 8 SLT Extn Expansion Card KX TA62474 4 Attach the 2 extension connectors to the system first install the KX TA62474 and secure the 2 screws iia Screws 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card gt lt lt KX TA62474 y Extension Connectors 5 Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 2 conductor wiring into the ports JACK 17 through 24 2 8 Extension Connection 6 Wrap the strap around all of the cords 1 2 19 Securing the Cords 7 Close the covers and secure the screws 2 28 Installation 2 17 Installing a 3 CO Line
203. ction 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA System Programming 4 65 519 521 4 2 System Programming 519 DISA OGM Mute Time Assigns the length of time from answering a call with the DISA feature and sending the DISA outgoing message or a beep During the assigned length of time the system will not receive DTMF signals SJL Le wer bees ron ew 0 2 A 6 sec Default 0 second i e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 520 UCD Group Assigns one extension group which works as the UCD group aan 1 8 Default Extension group number 1 I e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Uniform Call Distribution UCD 521 UCD Busy Waiting Time Assigns the length of time the system holds an incoming outside call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy When the programmed time expires the call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program 523 UCD Busy Mode H00 Cwr mm m c go ae min sec Waiting time 1 through 32 minutes 1 through 59 seconds Default 10 minutes lr Feature Reference Section 3 Features Uniform Call Distribution UCD 4 66 System Programming Required only when the optional OGM FAX Detection Card is installed 4 2 System Programming 522 523 522 UCD OGM Message Interval Time Assigns interval time between sending UCD outgoing messages to an incomin
204. d No Line Preference When an incoming call is received the extension user must go off hook and then press the flashing line key Prime Line Preference When incoming calls are received at the same time the user can receive the call on the preferred exchange line by only going off hook Ringing Line Preference When an incoming call is received the user can receive the call ringing at their telephone by going off hook A single line telephone can only set Ringing Line Preference Line access key s Single Exchange Line Other Exchange Line or Trunk Group should be assigned to line key s beforehand I LES Required System Programming 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Related Feature Reference Line Access Keys Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Line Access Keys 3 56 Features 3 Features P Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to make outside calls from the following 3 line preferences System Programming and Proprietary Telephone Settings are reguired Idle Line Preference When the user goes off hook they are connected to an idle line An idle l
205. d 2 or Hold 3 Every call will be terminated unless 50 is dialled after pressing the Recall button in the Hold 2 and Hold 3 modes Hold 1 To hold a line or transfer a call press the Recall button Hold 2 To hold a line press the Recall button and dial 50 To transfer a call press the Recall button Hold 3 To hold a line or transfer a call press the Recall button and dial 50 DAA ses me giw Ge Hold 1 Hold 2 Hold 3 Default Hold 1 LES e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Hold 105 Conference Tone Enables or disables the confirmation tone before starting or ending a conference call established by the Conference feature or Executive Busy Override feature D00 ex ee mes so Enable Disable Default Enable Ee Feature References Section 3 Features Conference 3 party Conference 5 party Executive Busy Override System Programming 4 17 106 108 4 2 System Programming 106 External Paging Access Tone Enables or disables the splash tone before paging is sent over the external pager HCE e Enable Disable Default Enable ES e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Paging 107 DTMF Receiver Check Enables or disables the 6 DTMF receivers to check whether the DTMF receivers are activated normally or not Refer to the Section 6 Troubleshooting While Operating for further information on checking the DTMF receivers OH A a A Ba To continue OOO
206. desired DSS or PF button SP PHONE MONITOR Operations 1 101 saHeuew 10 e19d09 1 9 DSS Console Features One Touch Access for System Features You can access system features by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button PT and DSS Console Paired Telephone DSS Console Loy gt cs Lift the handset or press Press the desired DSS or PF button SP PHONE MONITOR Call Transfer A call can be transferred to an extension using a DSS button Without Transfer PT and DSS Console During a conversation Paired Telephone DSS Console TRANSFER a Press TRANSFER Press the desired DSS button With Transfer An outside call can be transferred to an extension using a one touch operation The One Touch Transfer function must be set through System Programming PT and DSS Console During a conversation DSS Console CL Press the desired DSS button e The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is called 1 102 Operations Section 2 Appendix 21 Tone Ring Tone List lt TONE gt Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 TIT Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone Do Not Disturb DND Tone Call Waiting Tone 1 Call Waiting Tone 2 ast Single pu EE L Call Waiting Tone 2 i i i Double PUL
207. dial Allows you to save the current external telephone number during a conversation so that you can redial the same party later using a simple operation The saved number can be redialled until another number is stored Storing During a conversation or while hearing a busy tone AUTO DIAL SAVE STORE Press AUTO DIAL STORE Press SAVE Dialling gt N Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR Press SAVE PT Up to 64 digits can be stored and redialled This does not include an exchange line access code PT xX PAUSE and INTERCOM for secret dialling are counted as 1 digit I PT A flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button PT You can check the stored number Press the SAVE button while on hook and the stored number will be displayed PT You can change the exchange line when dialling You may press a line key to select an exchange line directly after going off hook before pressing the SAVE button rE 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone SAVE Button e See the Installation Manual Section 3 Redial 1 28 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Sending a Call Waiting Tone to a Busy Extension Busy Extension Signalling The busy extension that you called will hear the assigned Call Waiting tone and know that you are waiting Any Telephone If you make an inte
208. ding C FWD whose destination is the VPS an incoming call is forwarded to the VPS The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time Therefore the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number Outside Call DIL DISA Intercom System Call KX TVP100 C FWD Extension Portl L ze Port2 VM Hunting i Chain i y Port4 Port 3 Outside Call DIL DISA System KX TVP100 C FWD Operator F i Extension Portl Port2 Transfer i VM Hunting I Chain i y Port A lag Port 3 Features 3 71 3 Features 1 2 DISA Intercept to VM If the VPS is set as the Intercept destination of an exchange line an outside call is forwarded to the VPS The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time Therefore the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by Intercept Routing from a DISA ring group your system will transmit the mailbox number of the lowest port number of the DISA ring group Delayed Ringing must be assigned to VPS extensions in programs
209. e After entering the programming mode Enter the Program Address Enter the parameters Press the Press the END STORE button button After pressing the STORE button you will hear one of the following tones Confirmation tone 1 beep This informs you that storing is completed You can continue programming by entering the same or another program address 2 beeps This informs you that the same parameter has already been stored Alarm tone 3 beeps This informs you that the entry is invalid To exit the programming mode MEMORY SET e e PROGRAM Set to SET on the back of the telephone System Programming 4 3 4 1 Before System Programming Programming example The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode Example Program 404 Trunk Group Assignment ame Trunk Group aa Assigns a maximum 6 trunk groups Each exchange line must be assigned to an trunk group For example if there are multiple telephone service companies available exchange lines can be grouped by company Taca PREV Program i description 4 o a nex NEXT trunk eee no 1 6 To continue ree Cae To continue Exchange line number through 6 X All exchange lines Trunk TRK group number 1 through 6 Default Exchange line through 6 Trunk group 1 through 6 Each exchange line can only belo
210. e ringing np Reguired System Programming 424 Reverse Polarity Circuit Assignment Related Feature Reference Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Features 3 55 P 3 Features Power Failure Transfer During a power failure specific extension telephones are automatically connected to specific exchange lines This provides exchange line conversations between the following extensions and exchange lines Exchange line 1 extension port 01 Exchange line 4 extension port 09 A single line telephone SLT can work in case of a power failure Connect an SLT to the above extension port For more information refer to the Operating Instructions All other conversations except the above combinations are disconnected during a power failure Only an exchange line can have a conversation All other features do not work We recommend connecting a single line telephone SLT in parallel at extension ports 01 and 09 so that an SLT can be used during a power failure EP Connection Reference 2 18 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Related Feature Reference Parallelled Telephone Connection Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Power Failure Transfer i Preferred Line Assignment Incoming A proprietary telephone user can select the method to answer incoming outside calls from the following 3 line preferences System Programming and Proprietary Telephone Settings are reguire
211. e 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Ordinary dial tone When any of the following features are activated Absent Message Capability Back Ground Music BGM only a proprietary telephone Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Electronic Extension Lockout Message Waiting only a proprietary telephone Pickup Dialling only a single line telephone Remote Extension Lock Control Timed Reminder When performing Account Code Entry and answering a Timed Reminder call Also sent when going off hook with an SLT which has a message in a Voice Processing System IL 2 1 Tone Ring Tone List See the Installation Manual Section 3 Distinctive Dial Tones 1 88 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Power Failure Transfer During a power failure each of the following exchange lines will be connected to an assigned extension Exchange line 1 extension port 01 Exchange line 4 extension port 09 During a power failure all features cannot be used except for incoming and outgoing outside calls from extension ports 01 and 09 If extension ports 01 and 09 are connected to proprietary telephones disconnect the units and connect single line telephones I IL See the Installation Manual Section 3 Power Failure Transfer Lockout If one party in a conversation goes on hook both parties will be disconnected from the speech path automatically
212. e 5 Exchange line 6 Disable Enable Enable y Extension port no Default All 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 29 Programming Tables Programming Tables 411 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day All 10120130 10 20 30 I 10 20130 I 10 20 30 I 1020130 I 1020130 I Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Selection I Immediately 10 10 seconds delay 20 20 seconds delay 30 30 seconds delay 120130 I 1 10 Extension port no Default All V 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Tables 7 30 Xx All 120130 10 20 30 I 10 20 30 I 10 20130 I 10 20 30 I 10 412 Delayed Ringing Assignment Night 20 30 I 10 Programming Tables Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Selection I Immediately 10 10 seconds delay 20 20 seconds delay 30 30 seconds delay 10 20 30 I I Extension port no Default All V ol 02
213. e Call Waiting Outside calls Set 7 3 1 1 Cancel 7 3 Cancel 7 3 1 0 e Call Waiting Intercom calls Set 7 3 2 1 e Call Waiting Intercom calls Set 7 3 2 1 f Cancel 7 3 Cancel 7 3 2 0 e Call Forwarding All Calls 7 1 1 Extension No e Call Forwarding All Calls 7 1 1 Extension No Call Forwarding Busy No Answer 7 1 2 Extension No e Call Forwarding Busy No Answer 7 1 2 Extension No e Call Forwarding to Exchange Line e Call Forwarding to Exchange Line 7 1 3 Line Access Code 9 or 0 or 81 86 Phone No 71413 Line Access Code 9 or 0 or 81 86 Phone No e Call Forwarding Cancel 7 1 0 e Call Forwarding Cancel 7 1 0 e Electronic Station Lockout Lock 7 7 Lock Code Twice e Electronic Station Lockout Lock 7 7 Lock Code Twice e Electronic Station Lockout Unlock 7 7 Lock Code _ e Electronic Station Lockout Unlock 7 7 Lock Code_ Message Waiting Set 7 0 1 Extension No e Message Waiting Set 7 O 1 Extension No e Message Waiting Cancel 7 0 Extension No e Message Waiting Cancel 7 0 Extension No e Do Not Disturb DND Set 7 1 4 e Do Not Disturb DND Set 7 4 4 e Do Not Disturb DND Cancel 7 1 0 e Do
214. e Line Telephone Parallelled Telephone Connection PT I SLT SLT SLT I Any extension connected to extension ports 01 through 16 can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone In the event of a power failure CO1 and CO4 can be accessed using the single line telephones that are connected in parallel with the proprietary telephones to extension ports 01 and 09 respectively If the extension receives a call ringing will be heard from the proprietary telephone and the single line telephone You can answer the call by using either the proprietary telephone or the single line telephone An answering machine facsimile MODEM personal computer etc can be connected instead of a single line telephone System Programming is required to enable this feature A proprietary telephone LCD will show you the status of the single line telephone The following features will not work with a single line telephone connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone Call Splitting External Feature Access Account code input Conference Door opener while talking to the doorphone Pickup dialling A single line telephone connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone cannot make a call in the following cases The proprietary telephone is set to the BGM mode The proprietary telephone is receiving a page through the built in speaker The proprietary telephone is s
215. e Ringing Assignment Day All Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Selection Disable Enable Disable EnableiDisable Enable Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Disable Enable Enable y Extension port no Default All 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 27 Programming Tables Programming Tables All Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Selection Disable Enable Disable Enable 409 Flexible Ringing Assignment Night Disable Enable Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Disable Enable Enable Vv Extension port no Default All 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Programming Tables 7 28 Programming Tables All Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Selection Disable Enable 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Lunch Disable Enable Disable Enable Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange lin
216. e au Gn Ge 1 81 Cancelling Features Extension Feature Clear cceesceesseeeeeteeees 1 82 w Alternate Calling Ring Voice ssir 1 82 D Doorphone Call ynu Ga sg Ry e E tenia 1 83 o Door Opener i Gu Y E R R AO YF NYRS GOD 1 84 2 Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 00 eee e ee eeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeneeees 1 85 Calling Using Your Privileges from Another Extension z Walking COS zsrsr NG E dared E DN FF LS 1 87 Ringing Pattern Selection es si GYG GR AR WON RA es 1 88 Disnncaye Dial TOneSa ee ce nL TE i ei 1 88 Power Halarc TTanster access ea O E Re ea O 1 89 TOOK OUE we i y YD O FF O CU FR Fe yf yn fr SF 1 89 a Operator Manager Operations S 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features e sossesessossessosoesossossesossossesossoe 1 90 2 Date and Time Setting ccirsscconciansisinieini neleisti 1 90 is Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL ee 1 91 z Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call oo eeeceesseeeeeteeeeeteeees 1 91 9 Outgoing Message OGM ud dd FI yd 1 93 a Remote Extension Lock een Rd i CU FN es 1 94 Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting 20 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeteeeenteeees 1 95 Extension Password Set Manager only esecesseeesseceesteeeesteeeeaees 1 97 DSS Console Operations 3 1 9 DSS Console Features esesseseesessoscoscseoscoseseososcoscseoseososeososcoscseoseososessosee 1 98 os TE Eu RY NWN A RW 1 98 gs DPC Extension ea Ln uu a i Cyd ene tends dd Y 1 101 9 One Touch Dialling nA es au LL
217. e caller easily by checking the call log Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received number lt Assigns the deleted digits gt OE ser EEE roe on a lt Assigns the added number gt If added number _ Pi STORE is assigned 4 digits max 0 9 Example 901 201 902 Deleted digits 3 Added number Not stored Caller s number provided by the Local Exchange 2011234567 Logged modified number 1234567 Default Deleted digits 3 Added number Not stored Program 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment is required for this program a To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one Installation 1 9 1 3 System Programming 903 903 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls Assigns the removed digits and added number for a received long distance call number which does not have any area codes programmed in 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment This program makes the final number which will be recorded in memory The extension user can call back the caller easily by checking the call log Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received number lt Assigns the deleted digits gt OOS sex am 0 9 lt Assigns the added number gt If added number nin STORE is assigned 4 digits max 0 9 Example 901 201 903 Deleted digits O No deletion Added number 1
218. e no 2 CONF Press HOLD Dial 22x Enter the phone number Talk Press CONF of the fourth party The current call is placed on hold in the parking zone automatically The current call is placed on hold in the parking zone automatically The other two parties are placed on hold Ce CONF A5 i a a o A 5 party conference is now established Enter the phone number Talk Press CONF Press CONF of the fifth party The CONF indicator light turns red The current call is placed on hold in the parking zone automatically Operations 1 63 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features J PT System programming is required to execute this feature k PT Up to 2 exchange lines can join a conference PT When a 5 party conference is changed to a 4 party conference a confirmation tone is sent to all parties The tone can be disabled PT A 3 party conference between 3 extensions cannot be changed to a 5 party conference The HOLD button cannot be used PT When a 5 party conference is established a confirmation tone is sent to all parties The tone can be disabled PT More than one 5 party conference cannot be established at the same time PT The Unattended Conference and Executive Busy Override features are not available during a 5 party conference PT During a 5 party conference the Call Park feature cannot b
219. e programmed time in 418 This will be useful to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up If the time the RECALL button was pressed is less than the programmed time in 418 the recall signal will be sent during the programmed time HOE Cex Ea gon Ge MODE1 MODE2 Default MODE 1 Feature Reference Section 3 Features Recall System Programming 4 19 111 112 4 2 System Programming 111 Hold Music Selection cs Selects the music source External or Tone which an external party will hear when an outside call is on hold External Uses an external music source such as a radio Tone Uses the cyclic tone below equipped with the system 1 i nn___ nn MO ser ea so Ge External Tone Default External e The music source can also be used for BGM e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Music on Hold Background Music BGM 112 DSS Console Indication Mode re Enables or disables the Busy Lamp Field BLF on the DSS button to indicate the status Forward FWD or Do Not Disturb DND of corresponding extensions OOS be Ea so ae Enable Disable Enable FWD Flashing slowly DND Flashing moderately Disable FWD Off DND Off Default Enable e Feature Reference Section 3 Features DSS Console 4 20 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 115 116 115 Extension Ringing Pattern Selection Selec
220. e telephones facsimiles and data terminals To expand its capabilities the system can be eguipped with optional components or customer supplied peripherals such as an external speaker external music source e g a radio and door opener System Connection Diagram ee E 6 Exchange Lines Lightning Protectors External Music Source Amplifier Speaker Printer g Extension ports 01 08 initial 24 Extensions gt Extension ports 09 24 additional two pair one pair two pair Y Single Line Telephone Cus SJ one pain KX T7020 two pair a Data Terminal Door Openers one pair Fel FR PE Al Boa SS i Cordless Phone PERE b Hoodoo o E i HE i EF i Telephone Answering Machine l e We recommend connecting a display HEL with Facsimile a proprietary telephone at extension port 01 i pur i nepa Parallel connection of telephones is i i possible 2 11 Parallelled Telephone oog HHE Connection Ea A proprietary telephone cannot be bn connected to extension ports 17 through 24 Doorphones ul jp Only a single line telephone SLT can be KX T30865 Voice Processing System connected 1 2 Basic System Construction i _ needs optional card Section 2 Installation 2 1 Before Installation Please read the
221. e used by another extension PT If parked calls are not retrieved within 5 minutes during a 5 party conference ringing or an alarm tone will be heard Call Park Recall PT When the extension who started the 5 party conference goes on hook the 5 party conference is terminated PT When an incoming call is received a Call Waiting tone is heard You can answer the call after leaving the conference by going off hook SLT This feature cannot be used with a single line telephone lr 1 3 Making Calls Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override 1 5 During a Conversation Call Waiting 1 7 Useful Features Conference 3 party 1 7 Useful Features Conference Unattended See the Installation Manual Section 3 Conference 5 party 1 64 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Leaving a Message Message Waiting When the called extension is busy or does not answer your call you can leave a message so that the called party may call you back As a message receiver the MESSAGE button light lets you know that a call has been received If you receive a message you can call back the original party by a simple operation This feature is available only for proprietary telephones with a MESSAGE button Leaving a message Any Telephone C J Z oan aD ds Lift the handset or press Dial 701 Enter the extension Dial Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR number
222. ection Codes Leading Digit 0 355 Route 1 Exception Codes 07 360 ARS Modification Removed Digits 0 No deletion 361 ARS Modification Added Number 131 Code of least expensive carrier for a long distance call 381 Route 1 Authorisation Code 0123456789 385 Route 1 Itemised Bill Enable 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment 201 lt Dialled number gt lt Modified number gt 01633 877 467 m m 131 0123456789 201 01633 877 467 Example 2 International call using Route 2 350 ARS Selection Enable 352 Route 2 Selection Codes Leading Digit 00 360 ARS Modification Removed Digits 0 361 ARS Modification Added Number 1620 Code of least expensive carrier for an international call Ss n d 386 Route 2 Itemised Bill Enable 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment 201 lt Dialled number gt lt Modified number gt 0044134485394 1620 201 00 44 1344 853941 Example 3 Long distance call via the first carrier 350 ARS Selection Enable 359 Ist Carrier Selection Code 121 lt Dialled number gt lt Modified number gt 1210163387746 gt 1033 877 467 Features 3 5 2 Special Use Features If an extension user always uses the Automatic Line Access number 9 or 0 when making an outside call and wants to seize the specified trunk group as below automatically refer to the following pr
223. ed Received Data RD RXD ccc cece eee cece input Conveys signals from the printer Request to Send RS RTS cece eee eeeeee output This lead remains ON whenever DR DSR is ON Clear To Send CS CTS ccccccccccccccccves input When the CS CTS circuit is ON it indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when the CS CTS circuit is OFF Data Set Ready DR DSR ccc cece ec eee w eee input When the DR DSR circuit is ON it indicates the printer is ready The DR DSR circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer Signal Ground SG Connects the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals Data Terminal Ready ER DTR output This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON LINE The ER DTR circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE Data Carrier Detect CD DCD ccccccees input When ON it indicates the data terminal DTE that the carrier signal is being received np Reguired System Programming Section 4 2 System Programming 800 SMDR RS 232C Communication Parameters 801 SMDR Parameter Feature Reference Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 18 Installation 2 14 2 15
224. ee 1 25 Self Extension Number 99 99 n 1 80 Time Day Night Lunch Service 1 74 Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting 1 95 Timed Reminder Remote 1 92 Clearing Extension Feature Clear e 1 82 Message Waiting 0 0 eeeeeeesseeseceeeeeeeeees 1 66 CONF Conference Button 1 11 Conference 3 party sce ceeeeeeeseeneeeneees 1 59 Conference 5 party ceeceeeeeeeeseeseeneees 1 62 Confirmation Checking Control Display Contrast ce eeeeeeeseeseceneeeeeeees 1 14 Handset receiver volume 1 14 Ringer VOLUME 0 eee eee eseeseeteceeeeeeeees 1 15 Speaker volume 00 ce eeeeesesteceeeeseeees 1 15 Customising o eie GC GRYF FWG 1 5 Index 1 Index D Data Line SGCUIIL yui rU Y FUD 1 77 F Flexible DSS Button 1 8 Date and Time Setting eee eee ereees 1 90 Flexible Line Key o cece eesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 8 Day Button ue Wn DA Yn 1 100 Flexible MESSAGE Button 1 8 Direct Extension Dialling 29 1 101 Forwarding a Call Call Forwarding 1 52 Display PCAN S 3 un di inn y RD 1 53 Absent Message eessen 1 58 Busy or No Answer ceeeeeseeseceseceeeeees 1 54 Englishu aen ea idd FF CW 2 7 Cancel settee salah e deck o Oa 1 56 Programming Mode eseese 1 4 Follow M ssesautanenpe nren 1 55 Secret Dialling 2 0 0 ceceeccsseeseeeesee
225. ee 1 26 Power Failure Transfer 1 89 2 11 Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 1 6 No Line Preference n se 1 6 Prime Line Preference n 1 6 Ringing Line Preference oseese 1 6 Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 1 5 Idle Line Preference ceecceesceeneeeeees 1 5 No Line Preference 00 0 eeeseesseceeneeeeeees 1 5 Prime Line Preference 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 1 5 Prime Line Preference ueueuu 1 5 1 6 Programming Mode eeens 1 4 Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set eeeeeeeeereeereeeees 1 7 Pulse to Tone Conversion e e 1 81 Regali eu RH GWY 1 19 Receiving Calls oo cee eseesceseceseeereeereeeneees 1 34 Automatic Callback Busy CaMmp OD eee ceeceeeeeseeeneeeneeeneees 1 30 Call PicKupiiiiae aey Re 1 36 Call Waiting oiiire 1 45 1 46 Doorphone Call s es 1 83 Handsfree Answerback e 1 35 Paging iie aiii ydig RY 1 49 Redial Last Number ae i Rd Fn 1 27 Saved Numb r aieinoue 1 28 Remote Extension Lock 1 94 Restoring the MESSAGE Button 1 13 Ringing Line Preference n se 1 6 Ringing Pattern Selection eee eens 1 88 Ring Tohe nie ee i TI rliy eee 2 2 Callback Ringing Camp on Recall 2 2 Doorphone Ringing s es 2 2 Hold Recall 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 61 2 2 Incoming Calls eee essecsseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 Timed Reminder 0 0 eee eeseeeeeeee
226. eed Selections a ae da Gi esses 4 45 403 Host PBX Access Codes ccccccccsssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssenees 4 45 404 Trunk Group Assignment cee ceeeeceeneeceeeeeceeneecseeeeceeeeesaes 4 46 405 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day Night Lunehus sa uei na GW ww YND CY GO Ood WY 4 47 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 4 48 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 4 49 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch 4 50 AI Pase Time ue iii cits GU ee deena 4 51 418 Recall Times wc i Dn dd Fd ai wee e 4 52 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access 4 52 420 Calling Party Control CPC Signal eeseeeeseeeesteeeeees 4 53 421 CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls 0 eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 54 422 Disconnect Time und i TY GY cs SS Ydd nee 4 54 423 Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection 9 99 4 55 424 Reverse Polarity Circuit Assignment eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 4 56 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection n99 ne 4 57 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant eion 4 58 502 OGM Mode Selection ccccccccccsessssessesssssssssesssssssssssssssseees 4 59 503 FAX Connection cccccceccesescssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeees 4 60 504 DISA Delayed Answer Time ccceeeccecese
227. eeeeeeees 1 77 Exchange Line Ringing Selection 1 6 Forwarding a Call Call Forwarding To Exchange Line 1 54 Idle Line Preference 1 5 Line Access Keys oo eeeeesecsseceeeeeeeeesees 1 9 Making Outside Calls Using Automatic Line Access 1 18 Making Outside Calls Using Individual Line Access e n 1 18 Making Outside Calls Using Individual Trunk Group ACCESS oseese 1 19 No Line Preference eueu 1 5 1 6 Prime Line Preference 1 5 1 6 Ringing Line Preference 2 0 1 6 Line Access Keys uu yeu sede de canes 1 9 LOCKOUT ei un Gn ds yM Y uo 1 89 Log In Log Out e eee ueeueeeseunenneeeinneiuneienn 1 75 Log In Log Out Button esseere 1 12 Lunch Button oo ardor edr rins 1 100 M Making Calls Account Codes Account Code Entry 1 67 Automatic Line Access 1 18 Doorphone Call oo cece eseeseeeseceneeeeeees 1 83 Emergency Call 0 cece eeeeseeneceseeeeeeees 1 21 Handsfree Operation eeeneeneee 1 20 Individual Line Access 1 18 Individual Trunk Group ACCESS lnot otni araen 1 19 TntercOHmb ennon reniei GR TR 1 16 Operator Call ee geu ned 1 17 Outside iessu ieuo Sey eaten ryn GW nio 1 17 Personal Speed Dialling eee 1 24 Redialling Automatically Automatic Redial e e euuuuuu ueueen 1 27 Redialling the Last Number Dialled Last Number Redial 06 1 27 Redialling the Saved Num
228. eereeeeee 2 2 Room Monitor occ eee eeeceeseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeee 1 76 Index 4 Index S SAVE Buton 1 12 V Voice Call WHY NN 1 7 Saved Number Redial 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeee 1 28 Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 1 85 Secret Dialling nosset enn i 1 71 Volume Control VOLUME 2 ee 1 14 Self Extension Number Confirmation 1 80 Ringer volume o su i i RG doo 1 15 Single Exchange Line S CO Key 1 9 Speaker volume sscsisiriicrerissirissknsriisdtes 1 15 Storing VOLUME Control Button 0 1 15 Personal Speed Dialling eee 1 24 Pickup Dialling oseere 1 26 Saved Number Redial cccccceeeees 1 28 W Wake Up Call System Speed Dialling eee 1 23 Alarm Setuno ue a le te os 1 72 Symbol en eee Gh I Y Meta 1 2 Timed Reminder Remote uu 1 91 System Speed Dialling eee 1 23 Walking COS uu ices GN testa 1 87 T Telephorni amp den aie ueu ST nan rn 1 2 1 78 Timed Reminder Alarm Setting 1 72 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call woo cee eeeccecsseceeteceeneeeeeees 1 91 Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting 1 95 MONG sheets Me en care aa dam A sed 2 2 Al aries Gei dyd FT NN yaf Dan 1 4 Busy three eneel aineas 1 16 2 2 Call Waiting isinsin aaa 2 2 Call Waiting Tone Selection 1 7 Confirmation secsec 1 4 1 16 2 2 Dials se Md Wy 1 88 2 2 Distinctive Dial Tone 1 88 Do Not Disturb DND
229. effective for a flexible line key on a proprietary telephone M assigned as a DSS button IEN e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Intercom Calling 127 Pickup Group Set Enables or disables the ability of an extension to pickup a call ringing at another extension if it is in the same extension group by just going off hook If enabled the feature number 40 is not needed to pickup the call peeneee nee ee nee E EEEE a ae To continue OBE vex seueet store p Disable To continue mp Extension group number 1 through 8 all extension groups Default All extension groups Disable the feature number 40 is required to pickup the call I To prevent other extensions in the same extension group from picking up outside calls by a just going off hook select Disable in program 109 CO Indicator Assignment Then even though Enable is selected in this program 127 outside calls cannot be picked up by others by just going off hook IEN Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Pickup System Programming 4 25 200 201 4 2 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Assigns the length of the hold recall timer Hold recall a ring tone or an alarm tone is heard when the timer expires If hold recall is not reguired select Disable a00 A fee Gwe ee 30 sec 1 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 min Disable Default 30 seconds lp e Feature References Section 3 Features
230. eful Features Data Line Security See the Installation Manual Section 3 Executive Busy Override 1 32 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Denying Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Deny Allows you to prevent other extension users from interrupting your conversation Setting Cancelling Any Telephone A g PAN Gba Lift the handset or press To set Dial 7330 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7331 SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial O instead of iF re 1 3 Making Calls Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Extension Executive Busy Override Exchange Line See the Installation Manual Section 3 Executive Busy Override Operations 1 33 suoneuodo oiseg 1 4 Receiving Calls Receiving Calls PT and SLT Oy co INTERCOM co tY 0 or Lift the handset or press SP PHONE Press a rapidly flashing line key or INTERCOM The line key or INTERCOM indicator light turns steady green PT There are 3 types of Line Preference for incoming outside calls No Line Prime Exchange Line Ringing Line Each preference can be selected by Proprietary Telephone Settings When receiving an incoming call you may press the line key or INTERCOM button which is rapidly flashing red and talk Handsfree mode Helpful hints for
231. eiver 1 Select Enable for DTMF receiver 1 and Disable for DTMF receiver 2 in program 107 2 Make a call using a tone type SLT connected to one of extension ports 01 08 3 If you cannot make the call the problem may have been caused by DTMF receiver 1 If the call can be made go to step 4 4 Try DTMF receiver 2 Select Disable for DTMF receiver 1 and Enable for DTMF receiver 2 in program 107 and make another call If you cannot make the call the problem may have been caused by DTMF receiver 2 If the call can be made go to step 5 5 Check the other 4 DTMF receivers in the same way Refer to program 107 6 4 Troubleshooting Section 7 Programming Tables 7 Programming Tables 000 Date and Time Setting Year Month Day Day of the week Hour Minute AM PM 00 99 Jan Dec 1 31 Sun Sat 1 12 00 59 Default 98 Jan 1 Thu 12 00 AM Change 002 System Password Default Parameter 4 digits 0 9 1121314 003 004 DSS Console Port Assignment Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console Selection DSS console port no 02 16 Disable Paired telephone port no 01 16 Disable Default All Disable DSS 1 Disable DSS 2 Disable DSS 1 DSS 2 005 One Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button 006 Time Day Night Lunch Se
232. elephone 12 COs Proprietary Telephone with LCD 12 COs Proprietary Telephone 12 COs Optional Equipment NOTICE KX T7040 DSS Console 32 DSSs and 16 Feature buttons KX TA62460 KX TA62474 KX TA62477 KX TA62491 Doorphone Door Opener Card Expansion Card up to 8 extension lines for a single line telephone Expansion Card up to 3 exchange lines and 8 extension lines OGM and FAX Detection Card KX T30865 Doorphone A Proprietary Telephone is abbreviated as PT A Single Line Telephone is abbreviated as SLT This Operating Instructions does not show the complete model number that indicates the country where your models should be used The model number of your unit is found on the label affixed to the unit MODEL NO label Important Information Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for each combination of host and subsidiary equipment Prevention of access by user This equipment is intended to be accessible only by authorised personnel It must be installed in a locked room or similar environment so that user access is prevented Failure to prevent such user access will invalidate any approval given to this equipment Precautions When using the KX T7000 series keep the following conditions in mind eThis apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions of ambient temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60 e
233. elephone Settings Panasonic proprietary telephones have Light Emitting Diode LED button indicators so you can see the line status by the lighting patterns Refer to Section 2 2 LED Indication Please use the proper operation for your telephone Description of the Symbols Used in this Manual He In this manual many symbols are used Some of the symbols need explanation Those are described below Lift the handset or press the Recall button on a single line SP PHONE or MONITOR button CR telephone Off hook Replace the handset or press the fy Tones which vary depending on the SP PHONE or MONITOR button J 2 condition On hook y Refer to Tone Ring Tone List Section 2 1 Number keys on the telephone depends on the condition For proprietary telephone operations all button illustrations are based on the KX T7130 model 1 2 Operations 1 1 Before Operating Operating example Example Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Extension pplicable telephone PT Proprietary Telephone user can follow the operating steps below gt gt Applicable telephone i Any Telephone PT and SLT user can follow the operating steps below Executive Busy Override Extension ns Allows you to connect to an existing intercom extension call System Programming is required to use this feature Any Telephone If you
234. em be considered Namely please consider the settings of 115 Extension Ringing Pattern Selection and 706 Doorphone Ringing Tone Pattern Selection LES Feature Reference Section 3 Features Ringing Pattern Selection System Programming 4 55 424 4 2 System Programming 424 Reverse Polarity Circuit Assignment Enables or disables detecting the reverse signal for each exchange line s polarity from the Local Exchange when making a call If enabled the outside call duration can be determined _ _ _ pene ne ne nn nnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen4 NEXT or PREV an Lage lt To continue AEE nem sur sons exo 1 6 X Ea Disable To continue fa Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Disable mp Feature Reference Section 3 Features Polarity Reverse Detection 4 56 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 500 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection Selects the destination of an incoming outside call via the DISA feature when you select DISA 1 or DISA 2 in programs 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch Without AA auto attendant or With AA If you select With AA assign the next program 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant Without AA Available destinations are extension numbers assigned in program 009 Extension Number Assignment and the operator nu
235. enter e Default All System Speed Dialling numbers Not stored To erase all letters press the CLEAR button To erase 1 letter press gt M e Each name has a maximum of 16 characters e Press to scroll the display to the right side L e Feature References Section 3 Features System Speed Dialling 4 12 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 012 012 Alternative Feature Numbering Plan Replaces any feature number with a code number 50 through 59 This is useful when selecting Plan 2 or Plan 3 in program 009 Extension Number Assignment as some feature numbers change for Plan 2 and Plan 3 and they might be difficult to remember Refer to the attached leaflet Notice for the Feature Numbers All extension users can dial these assigned codes instead of feature numbers poceenee ene a N eee NFHNFNFNHFNWFUUU IR IH To continue Lo JLL sec TER store 50 59 10 digits max 0 9 X ff To continue al Default All codes Not stored This is not possible when Plan 1 has been selected in program 009 iy System Programming 4 13 100 101 4 2 System Programming 100 Hunting Group Set Enables or disables automatically locating an idle extension in the same extension group as the dialled extension when the called extension is busy If Enable is selected assign the next program 101 Hunting Type Extension groups are defined in program
236. erence this feature cannot be performed np Reguired System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Related Feature Reference Conference 5 party see Parking zone Operating Instructions Reference 1 5 During Conversation Placing F m a Call in System Parking Area MH Call Park 3 16 Features 3 Features C Call Pickup lt Directed Call Pickup gt Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension lt Group Call Pickup gt Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at another extension if the call is ringing within the user s extension group assigned in program 600 If Enable is selected for an extension group in 127 persons in the group can pickup calls just by going off hook even though their extension is not ringing lt Call Pickup Deny gt Allows an extension user to prevent other extensions from picking up a call ringing at the user s extension with the Call Pickup feature lt Call Retrieving from a TAM Telephone Answering Machine gt Allows an extension user to answer an incoming call received by a TAM extension assigned in program 611 The user can pick up an incoming outside intercom or doorphone call with the Directed Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up with the Directed Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature The tone ca
237. ernal Music 4F Doorphone Port Connect to KX T30865 4E Door Opener Port Door Opener 4F EIA RS 232C Port Connect to PC Printer 4E These ports do not respond to address signalling These ports provide DTMF and Loop Disconnect Signalling Port Types between which Call Paths can be established To Ext Door Door EIA P Eate PESTA Paeng Music Phone Opener RS 232C Extn A A A X A X X PSTN A A X X X X X Paging X X X X X X X Ext Music A A A N A X X X Doorphone A X X X N A X X Door Opener X X X X X N A X EIA RS 232C X X X X X X N A A Allowed X Not allowed N A Not applicable 5 8 Appendix 32 Specifications Lines Cards Extension Eguipment Item Max Ouantity Service Units 1 Exchange lines 6 Extension ports 24 Extension Terminals 40 3 CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card 1 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card 1 OGM FAX Detection Card 1 Doorphone Door Opener Card 1 Doorphones 4 Door Openers 4 External Pager 1 External Music Source 1 DSS Consoles 2 System Data Item Max Ouantity Operator 1 System Speed Dialling 100 One Touch Dialling 24 per extension Proprietary telephone Personal Speed Dialling 10 per extension Call Park areas 10 Absent Messages 6 Call Barring Classes 5 Extension Groups 8 Message Waitings 8 per extension Appendix
238. eseeeens 1 71 To Exchange Line eeen 1 54 SDpanisll en Gad eaten 2 7 FWD DND Forward Do Not Disturb Distinctive Dial Tones 0 0 cee eeeeeeereees 1 88 BUOM ioe ceu yiii dg essed ens eek 1 12 Do Not Disturb DND ee ce eeeeeceesteeeeees 1 69 Do Not Disturb DND Override 1 70 Door Opener uei yrau Yii Fu ni 1 84 Handsfree Answerback 9 9 99 neennn 1 35 Doorphone Call oes ceeceseceseeereeeeeeneees 1 83 Handsfree Operation 0 cece ceeeeseeseeeneees 1 20 DSS Console Features n 1 98 Hold Call Transfer ne iu rW Rete 1 102 Alarm nn Y iene 1 38 1 39 2 2 Direct Extension Dialling 0 0 0 0 1 101 Call Call Hold slnenie 1 38 Initial Settings eee eee eeeeseeseceseeeeeees 1 98 Call Splitting ci cccstracscauitaiinniee 1 47 One Touch Access for Call Waiting ueu yi Y YD Re 1 46 System Features 9 9 enn 1 102 Conference 3 party e cee eeeesceseceteeees 1 59 One Touch Dialling 00 0 eee e e 1 101 Conference 5 party occ eeeeseesceseceseeees 1 62 DSS Direct Station Selection Button 1 10 External Feature Access 1 79 Exclusively Exclusive Hold 1 39 in System Parking Area Call Park 1 41 Electronic Extension Lockout 1 57 Recall 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 61 2 2 Electronic Extension Lockout Retrieving Call Hold Retrieve 1 40 CANCEL ALL iiid iun 1 91 Transferring after paging
239. et to the PROGRAM mode A single line telephone connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone will not ring in the following cases The proprietary telephone is set to Handsfree Answerback The proprietary telephone is set to Voice Call in the Intercom Alert Assignment See the Installation Manual Section 3 Parallelled Telephone Connection Mixed Extension Dialling Any telephone either a KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7050 single line rotary phone 10 pps 20 pps or single line touch tone telephone may be used as an extension for the system 1 78 Operations 1 7 Useful Features External Feature Access Allows you to access special features e g Call Waiting offered by a host PBX or Local Exchange This feature is effective only during an outside call You can access the feature by using either the RECALL button or the feature number Using the RECALL button During a conversation with an outside party RECALL C Press RECALL Enter the desired service code The current call is placed on hold Using the feature number During a conversation with an outside party 0 mu Press Recall Enter the desired service code The current call is placed on hold PT A Recall Time must be assigned as required by the host PBX or exchange line PT You may access some features of the host PBX using the RECALL button If the system is connected to a host PBX
240. fer to Extension 3 18 Features 3 Features C Call Waiting During a conversation a Call Waiting tone informs an extension user that there is a call waiting The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the first call or placing it on hold When Call Waiting is enabled a Call Waiting tone is sent to the user under the following conditions 1 When an outside call except a doorphone call is received or 2 When another extension executes the Busy Extension Signalling feature CALL WAITING TONE I ve got another call Please hold For proprietary telephone users a Call Waiting tone Tone 1 or Tone 2 can be selected in the Proprietary Telephone Settings Tone 2 depends on System Programming Program 423 is for outside calls and program 115 is for intercom calls 15s Tone 1 niin ety Tone 2 m gt Single l l Double LI l LI l Triple ULM PLL Required System Programming 115 Extension Ringing Pattern Selection 423 Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection Related Feature Reference Hold Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Call Waiting Tone Selection 1 5 During Conversation Call Waiting Features 3 19 C 3 Features Conference 3 party During a 2 party conversation an extension user can add a third party to make a 3 party conference The maximum number of
241. following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the system and terminal equipment Safety Installation Instructions When installing telephone wiring basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 Never install telephone ports in wet locations unless the port is specifically designed for wet locations 3 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface 4 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Installation Precautions This system is designed for wall mounting only Avoid installing in the following places Doing so may result in malfunction noise or discolouration 1 In direct sunlight and hot cold or humid places Temperature range 0 C 40 C 2 Sulphuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs etc may damage the equipment or contacts Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong Dusty places or places where water or oil may come into contact with the system Near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders Nunn ns U On or near computers telexes or other office equipment as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners It is preferable not to install the system in t
242. for the Handsfree speakerphone operation are noted in the Handsfree Operation feature 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Single Exchange Line S CO Key Trunk Group G CO Key 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Locking Your Telephone Electronic Extension Lockout 1 7 Useful Features Calling with Account Codes Account Code Entry 1 7 Useful Features Calling Using Your Privileges from Another Extension Walking COS 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Remote Extension Lock See the Installation Manual Section 3 Outside Calling See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Barring Override by Account Codes See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Barring 9 Operations 1 17 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Making Outside Calls Using Automatic Line Access Allows you to select an available exchange line automatically Any Telephone hy yN s er o J H A Lift the handset or press Dial 9 or 0 Dial tone Enter the phone Talk Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR number SP PHONE MONITOR The selected line key turns green The display shows the phone number If the line access number is assigned to 0 by System Programming the operator call number will be changed to 9 i Making Outside Calls
243. formation about the conditions required System Programming connection references related features and operating instructions references for every feature Section 4 System Programming Describes the steps required to assign features to extensions or to the system Section 5 Appendix Provides specifications and the default values of the System Programming Section 6 Troubleshooting Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting Section 7 Programming Tables Provides programming tables for user programmed data Description of the Symbols Mainly Used in this manual Additional information and conditions l gt The feature or program references Section 1 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 22 2 23 Section 3 A Contents Basic System Construction Installation Before Installation sssisssssccvsseussscassosvevecsseeud sentseivscosvvevas sopesvexssenvdcssstenvsseds 2 2 Unpacking GROUND 2 4 Names and Locations iie iU GO YNAD YOU Gn o 2 4 WalbMonntiig dread dock cba ssis toteso dobis y LU AMAF do 2 5 Frame Ground Connection sessessoesoossesssesooesosssesoossosssesooesossseseossosese 2 6 Opening the Top Front Cover ccsssccssssccssssccssssccssscccssscsssssssseecees 2 6 Exchange Line Connection cccscccsssscssssccssscccsssccssssscsssscssssssseees 2 7 Extension Connection ciii GEO OAN No
244. fter programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position He See the Installation Manual Section 3 Date and Time Setting 1 90 Operations 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL You can cancel Electronic Extension Lockout at all extensions Setting AUTO DIAL STORE Press AUTO DIAL STORE Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position N im See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Lock Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call The operator or manager can remotely set or cancel the Timed Reminder at a particular extension Setting fp amp HO a J Ge be Lift the handset Dial 764 Dial the desired extension Dial Confirmation Dial 76 Enter the hour or press number tone and 01 through 12 SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone h gm OO oA J A Enter the minute For AM Dial 0 For a one time alarm Dial 1 Dial Confirmation Hang up or press 00 through 59 For PM Dial 1 For a daily alarm Dial 2 tone SP PHONE MONITOR 1 An alarm will be heard at the preset time and then the setting is cleared 2 An alarm will be heard daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or cancelled Operations 1 91
245. g Lunch Lunch Mode added 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Lunch Lunch Mode added 601 Call Barring Class Assignment Day COS assignment added for aN o 405 406 407 408 409 o o o o a a E N 602 Call Barring Class Assignment Night Day Night Lunch 6 03 302 305 Call Barring Deny Codes COS levels 4 amp 5 added Call Barring Allow Codes COS levels 4 amp 5 added 14 16 z Automatic Answer Mode Set by extension user Operating Instructions Page 1 35 19 Programmable Call Waiting Set by extension user Ext CO Operating Instructions Page 1 45 20 4 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Delayed Ringing assignment added 4 Delayed Ringing Assignment Night for each mode 4 Delayed Ringing Assignment Lunch 7 7 7 2 Call Barring Class Assignment Lunch Modes o o o N n e vs 21 411 413 Delayed Ringing count Included in Program Steps 411 413 21 22 Intercom Alert Tone Voice Tone Set by extension user Operating Instructions Page 1 82 23 MM 23 ea ee ELLA EW E HY LL EL I WE SMDR Incoming Outgoing Selection B Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Doorphone Ringing assignment Doorphone Ringing Assignment Night added for each mode Doorphone Ringing Assignment Lunch 11 12 13 00 01 02 127 04 02 2 of 6 CURRENT amp CHANGED Programming Steps with reference to the KX T30810 61610 KX T KX T KX TA Descr
246. g SMDR Call Barring Override by Account Codes Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Calling with Account Codes Account Code Entry Alternate Calling Ring Voice This system offers a proprietary telephone user 2 types of intercom calling Voice Call mode and Tone ring Call mode Voice Call informs the called party of an incoming call with the calling party s voice while Tone Call uses a ring tone A proprietary telephone user can select Voice Call or Tone Call in the Proprietary Telephone Settings If the user selects Voice Call the calling party can talk to the user immediately after the confirmation tone The calling party can switch the pre set mode at the called extension from Voice Call to Tone Call or vice versa by pressing after dialling the extension number A rotary telephone user cannot change the pre set mode at the called extension I im Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Intercom Alert Assignment 1 7 Useful Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice Features 3 3 A 3 Features Automatic Callback Busy Camp On When the selected exchange line or dialled extension is busy the system will automatically notify an extension user with a callback ringing when the line becomes available When the user answers the callback ringing For an extension
247. g by System Programming Default shows you the factory default setting Any reguired changes can be written in the Programming Tables listed in section 7 Programming Tables Reguired Telephone Set The following display proprietary telephone is reguired for System Programming KX T7130 Connect the telephone to the following e Port number 01 Before entering the programming mode Before entering the programming mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook No calls are on hold at your telephone Placing the Overlay on a Telephone A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay should be used at all times during programming The functions of the telephone keys change during programming as shown below Location of Controls with the Overlay SECRET lt a Ei ET KX T7130 4 2 System Programming 4 1 Before System Programming To enter the programming mode a system password SET e e PROGRAM Set to PROGRAM on Press X Enter the system password the back of the telephone default 1234 EMORY The system password can be changed by program 002 System Password a During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension If you enter the wrong system password you will hear an alarm tone 3 beeps Try again Programming seguenc
248. g outside call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy The UCD outgoing message is repeated during the time programmed in 521 UCD Busy Waiting Time aaa Geox Ea ros Ee 30 sec 1 1 5 2 min Default 1 minute I Feature Reference Section 3 Features Uniform Call Distribution UCD 523 UCD Busy Mode Selects the operation when the length of time programmed in 521 UCD Busy Waiting Time expires Intercept or Disconnect is available Intercept The call will be redirected depending on programs 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Intercept Routing feature The extension which receives a redirected call rings during the length of time programmed in 526 UCD Ringing Time after Intercept Disconnect The call will be disconnected immediately D00 Cex EA wom wn Intercept Disconnect Default Intercept The above mentioned intercept only occurs when MODE 3 or MODE 5 is selected in program 502 OGM Mode Selection If MODE 4 is selected the call will be disconnected after the UCD END outgoing message If MODE 6 is selected and Intercept is assigned in this program the call will go to the DISA and OGM2 will be heard by the caller i Rp Feature References Section 3 Features Intercept Routing Uniform Call Distribution UCD Required only when the optional OGM FAX Detection System Progr
249. gaged the conversation has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security e When a 3 party call is changed to a 2 party call or vice versa a confirmation tone will be sent to all parties This tone can be disabled by program 105 mp Reguired System Programming 105 Conference Tone 608 Executive Busy Override Related Feature Reference Conference 3 party Operating Instructions References 1 3 Making Calls Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override 1 3 Making Calls Denying Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Deny Extension Button Confirmation KX T7130 only Allows a display proprietary telephone user to confirm the values stored in the buttons such as the REDIAL button or flexible line key by pressing the corresponding button while on hook np Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Extension Button Confirmation KX T7130 only Features 3 33 E 3 Features Extension Feature Clear Allows an extension user to reset the following extension features to the default settings Absent Message Capability Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Background Music BGM Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Executive Busy Override Deny Log In Log Out Message Waiting All messages will be erased Pickup Dialling The stored telephone number will be erased
250. gits assigned in program 001 that are available to all extension users A System Speed Dial number is dialled out using a simple operation Each System Speed Dial number can be assigned a name in program 011 The assigned name will be displayed when making a call by using the System Speed Dialling feature It will also be displayed when an external caller s telephone number matches one of System Speed Dialling numbers and the Telephone Company does not provide the caller s name Call Barring for System Speed Dialling can be assigned by program 301 A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature Reguired System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Entry 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class Related Feature Call Barring for System Speed Dialling Operating Instructions for the Caller ID Card References Section 1 2 System Features Caller ID Operating Instructions Reference 1 3 Making Calls Dialling with System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling Timed Reminder lt Timed Reminder gt Allows an extension user to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a wake up alarm or a reminder The user can set this to be activated once or everyday lt Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call gt I The operator or manager can remotely set cancel and M confirm the Timed Reminder of the desired extension mg For example this is useful for a sma
251. gramming is required to monitor through a PT PT The access tone will not be sent to the monitored PT The paging tone will also not be sent to the monitored PT PT This feature is not available when using a KX T7050 I _ rep See the Installation Manual Section 3 Room Monitor See the Installation Manual Section 3 Doorphone Call Data Line Security Your extension can be protected against interruptions from the Call Waiting Hold Alarm and Executive Busy Override features Data communication devices such as computers and facsimiles can operate uninterrupted Setting Cancelling Any Telephone aa y z v OMUOH f s t Q 7 3 o Lo Le To cancel y Ga Lift the handset or press To set Dial 73014 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 73004 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of ff im 1 3 Making Calls Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Extension Executive Busy Override Exchange Line 1 5 During a Conversation Call Waiting See the Installation Manual Section 3 Data Line Security See the Installation Manual Section 3 Hold Operations 1 77 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Parallel Connection of a Proprietary Telephone and Singl
252. guired System Programming 104 Hold Mode Selection 200 Hold Recall Time Related Feature References Call Park Music on Hold Background Music BGM Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone Operating Instructions References 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call on Hold Call Hold 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call on Hold Exclusively Exclusive Hold 1 5 During a Conversation Retrieving a Call on Hold Call Hold Retrieve Host PBX Access The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting a line from the host to an exchange line in the system J A Host PBX Access code assigned in program 403 is required to access an exchange line of the host PBX Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible External Feature Access IEN Required System Programming 403 Host PBX Access Codes 417 Pause Time Related Feature Reference External Feature Access To Central Office Host PBX Features 3 41 I 3 Features Intercept Routing Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls via the DISA or UCD feature The Intercept Routing feature works in the following 2 cases 1 When nothing is dialled after a dial tone or OGM is sent to the caller The DISA feature only 2 When the call is not answered within a programmed time This is called Intercept Routing No Answe
253. he call is on hold You may dial another telephone number Whilerecalling Only the first call on hold will be answered You cannot hold a doorphone call i 1 38 Operations 1 5 During a Conversation PT PT During a 5 party conference you cannot use this feature With outside calls you can put multiple calls on hold However with intercom calls you can put only one call on hold One way around this is to use the Call Park feature See two pages ahead If a call is placed on hold for more than the programmed time ringing or an alarm tone will be heard Hold Alarm Hold Recall and the LCD will flash the following display Example When holding extension 211 Mr Brown 211 Brown will flash When holding exchange line CO 1 Call on CO 1 will flash If Hold 2 or Hold 3 is assigned by System Programming you must dial 50 after pressing the Recall button Only an outside or intercom call can be placed on hold at any one time If you want to hold both calls use the Call Park feature PT SLT SLT 1 5 During a Conversation Retrieving a Call on Hold Call Hold Retrieve 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call in System Parking Area Call Park 1 7 Useful Features Conference 5 party See the Installation Manual Section 3 Hold a Placing a Call on Hold Exclusively Exclusive Hold Prevent
254. he cradle and the SP PHONE button is off To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position iy np 2 2 Telephone Features Call Information Log Incoming 2 2 Telephone Features Call Log Incoming Operations 2 3 2 2 Telephone Features Call Information Log Incoming Provides you with the caller s telephone number and name simultaneously on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls if the Caller ID service supports both the telephone number and name If the call is not answered the call information is automatically recorded in memory ser 2 2 Telephone Features Call Log Incoming Display Operation for the KX T7130 only While receiving an incoming call on hook or during a conversation off hook the display shows the caller s telephone number or name While receiving an incoming call JOHN WHITE If you want to see other information press the Caller ID Selection button The display changes as follows JOHN WHITE caller s name U 0111111111 caller s telephone number Call om CO i CO number During a conversation JOHN WHITE Press the Caller ID Selection button to see other information The display changes as follows JOHN WHITE caller s name Co ss E
255. he same room with the above equipment 7 Install at least 1 8 m away from radios and televisions Both the system and Panasonic proprietary telephones 8 Do not obstruct area around the system for reasons of maintenance and inspection be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the system Wiring Precautions Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit 1 Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source computer telex etc If the cables are run near those wires shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields 2 If cables are run on the floor use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on Avoid wiring under carpets 3 Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers telexes and other office equipment Otherwise the system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such equipment 2 2 Installation 2 1 Before Installation Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of telephone equipment such as single line telephones data terminals answering machines computers voice processing systems etc except Panasonic proprietary telephones e g KX T7130 Unplug the system during wiring After all of the wiring is completed plug in the system Mis wiring may cause the system to operate improperly Refer to Section 6 1 While Installing and Section 6
256. his allows you to access a specific line by pressing a S CO key An incoming call can be directed to a S CO key AUTO DIAL co Cc o exchange line no Press the programmable button Dial 0 Enter an exchange line number 1 through 6 Press STORE STORE Only one S CO key can be assigned to an exchange line The same exchange line can be assigned as a S CO key and G CO key N Other Exchange Lines O CO Key Exchange lines which are not assigned to S CO or G CO keys can be assigned to a flexible line key on a proprietary telephone The assigned button serves as the O CO key An incoming call on an unassigned exchange arrives at the O CO key To make an outside call you simply press the designated O CO key AUTO DIAL r BE STORE Press the programmable button Dial Press STORE Operations 1 9 suoneuodo oiseg 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Trunk Group G CO Key To use exchange lines efficiently a group of exchange lines trunk group can be assigned to a line key This button is referred to as Trunk Group G CO key Any incoming calls from any exchange line in the trunk group arrive at the G CO key To make an outside call you can access an idle exchange line in the group by simply pressing the assigned G CO key CO AUTO DIAL cd trunk group no CL STORE Press the programmable button Dial Enter a trunk group number 1 through 6 Press STORE The s
257. horised personnel This apparatus must be installed in a locked room or similar environment such that user access is prevented Failure to prevent such user access will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus Caution Do not push the PAUSE button more than twice following the initial access digit or digits Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation Notice This PBX should only be used on BeT lines on which specific BT services or facilities are provided CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Precautions The apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions of ambient temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60 Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments such as bathrooms or swimming pools The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps motors and televisions These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Advanced Hybrid System This unit should be kept free of dust moisture high temperature more than 40 C and vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight Never attem
258. ic Callback Busy Camp On 1 30 Background Music BGM oseese 1 80 Busy Extension Signalling eee 1 29 Busy Lamp Field BLF ceecee 2 3 Button CONF Conference 1 11 Days AW YY CF cevastin 1 100 DSS Direct Station Selection 1 10 Extension Button Confirmation 1 81 Extension LOCK see ddirwy 1 100 Flexible DSS si isacissisteiiasaaisi di rbydd 1 8 Plexi DIE Lene esu Wi Tydu GW did 1 8 Flexible MESSAGE cee ceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 1 8 FWD DND Forward Do Not Disturb 1 12 Mme ACCESS iy iim YDY 1 9 Log In Log Out ssssoesriiiserisisssisisesisrississ 1 12 MUM FN RC NEFYN AF FFR 1 100 MESSAGE ein iyd wdd yR 1 13 Night tedis WY ine FF 1 100 One Touch Dialling e 91 eeeneuneen 1 11 Other Exchange Lines O CO 1 9 PROGRAM nu geni ie ud FY TY 1 4 SAVE YN FFR ENEE EEEE 1 12 Single Exchange Line S CO 1 9 Trunk Group G CO uu s eeeeeeeee nn nenu 1 10 VOLUME control 0 ccccseceesseneseeseseese 1 15 Call Forwarding eee esceseeseeereeereeeeees 1 52 Call Hold secacestesseiececetisc vassecseueseteatesatendeesvtens 1 38 Call Hold Retrieve eee ceeeeseereeerees 1 40 Calling Making Calls Call Park uu ci GU FD CYF iS 1 41 Call Pick piss eie RG NGR Yn 1 36 Denying allowing eeeeeeeineineiniiiee 1 37 Directed au dy YND ddis 1 36 GTOUP THRA 1 36 Retrieving Calls Answered by a TAM 1 37 Call Pickup D amp ny eiii iy Y
259. id should be set to its T position or as directed in the N operating instructions for the hearing aid e These apparatuses are designed to aid the visually handicapped to locate dial keys L and buttons e Never attempt to insert wires pins etc into the vents or other holes of this unit APPROVED for connection to telecommunication systems specified in the instructions for use subject to the conditions set out in them 610186 Warning This is a Class A Product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This unit complies with the EU Directives 73 23 EEC Electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility basic standard 92 31 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility amendment 93 68 EEC Marking The CE mark on this unit certifies compliance with the above mentioned Directives Precautions WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT THEN RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY R
260. imum time allowed for a conversation with an external party This program is effective for the extension s which assigned Enable in program 613 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection OOS es MM es Ge 1 32 minutes Default 10 minutes A beep sounds at 5 second intervals 15 seconds before the programmed time expires x This program is effective only for an outgoing outside call When making a call after an exchange line is seized and transferred to the enabled extension in program 613 by another extension the timer starts after the call has been transferred EES e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration 213 Bell Off Detection Sets the maximum time between detecting one bell signal and the next from the Local Exchange In case the next bell signal is not detected within the programmed time the system recognises the bell signal has stopped ana m fase Gem Coe 3 6 12 sec Default 3 seconds System Programming 4 31 300 301 4 2 System Programming 300 Carrier Excepted Code Assignment Assigns up to 20 carrier excepted codes for example Per Call Block code X 141 The system disregards the assigned code and call barring and ARS are applied to the numbers after the code Dee ee eee ee Lene ee ee eee enn ee ned i To continue Gow 01 20 10 digits max 0 9 Xi To continue SELECT Example Code no 01 141 Dialling number X 141 01633
261. ine is automatically selected from the pre assigned lines in program 419 Prime Line Preference When the user goes off hook they are connected to the pre assigned line Assign one prime line beforehand No Line Preference No line is selected when the user goes off hook They must select a line to make a call Line Access Key s Single Exchange Line Other Exchange Line or Trunk Group should M be assigned to the line key s beforehand I Reguired System Programming 400 Exchange Line Connection Assignment 405 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day Night Lunch 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access Related Feature Reference Line Access Keys Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Line Access Keys Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set Allows a proprietary telephone user to reset the following Proprietary Telephone Settings to the default settings Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Exchange Line Ringing Selection e Intercom Alert Assignment Call Waiting Tone Selection mr Operating Instructions Reference 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set
262. ing 4 35 312 4 2 System Programming 312 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class Assigns the Call Barring class for an extension which has set the Electronic Extension Lockout or Remote Extension Lock Control a00 A Bees Gem mo Disable COS 2 5 Boundary COS 2 through 5 Disable Disables all outside outgoing calls Default Disable Hay Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class 4 36 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 350 354 350 ARS Selection Enables or disables the ARS feature for each exchange line rr rc ae nia dd Y HE ld rg garn gry yng i To continue s 5 o nex lseuzcr store 1 6 X Enable Disable To continue seuecr Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Disable IF Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 351 354 Routes I through 4 Selection Codes Leading Digits Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are applied to the ARS feature for each route FEE NEXT or PREV lt NU FL To continue SR Gr ore mw 1 4 01 80 7 digits max 0 9 X58 lt To continue es X Program address selection number 1 351 for Route 1 2 352 for Route 2 3 353 for Route 3 4 354 for Route 4 Default All codes Not stored J x press the PAUSE button
263. ing a 12 hour clock The current date and time using a 24 hour clock Pressing X while on hook alternates between this display and the following two displays Making or receiving an intercom call Also displayed while on hook The extension name is not assigned Making or receiving an intercom call or called by Camp On intercom recall Also displayed while ringing The extension name is assigned Confirming key programming on a DSS or MESSAGE button 201 Busy 201 Ocupada The destination extension is busy 9 01344 862072P amp 9 01344 862072P amp Confirming the key programming on the REDIAL SAVE or One Touch Dialling button 223 Tony Viola 223 Tony Viola Making or receiving an intercom call to or from a forwarded extension The extension name is assigned 201 Busy 201 Ocupada The call is forwarded to a busy extension Alarm 10 15AM Alarma 10 15AM The Timed Reminder setting is completed or a Timed Reminder call was received 1 time mode Confirming the Timed Reminder programming Alarm 10 15AMx Alarma 10 15AMx The Timed Reminder setting is completed or a Timed Reminder call was received everyday mode Confirming the Timed Reminder programming Alarm Cancel Alarma Desact Timed Reminder has been cancelled Alarm Not Stored Alarma No Fijada Confirming Timed Reminder programming when it is no
264. ing is cleared 2 An alarm will be heard daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or cancelled Cancelling Any Telephone C p 4 unan cba Lift the handset or press Dial 762 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of 1 72 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Checking the set time with a display PT only gt ooon aos Lift the handset or press Dial 763 Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR Stopping the alarm Any Telephone y Lift the handset e Pressing any key also stops the alarm This tone confirms that you have a Timed Reminder Be sure the system clock is set correctly The alarm continues for 30 seconds If you receive an incoming call during the alarm ringing starts after the alarm stops If the alarm is set to sound during a conversation the alarm will start after the conversation If you set a new time the preset time will be cleared R I See the Installation Manual Section 3 Timed Reminder Operations 1 73 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Time Day Night Lunch Service This system supports the Day Night and Lunch modes The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different in the day night and lunch modes Time Service can only be set by the operator and manage
265. ing the waiting time after going off hook you can call another party and override this feature You can change the waiting time between going off hook and automatically dialling through System Programming A rotary telephone cannot use this feature I See the Installation Manual Section 3 Pickup Dialling I 1 26 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Redialling the Last Number Dialled Last Number Redial Automatically saves the last outside phone number dialled so that you can make a call to the same party later using a simple operation REDIAL Ba HA Lift the handset or press Press REDIAL Lift the handset Dial or 80 SP PHONE MONITOR Up to 64 digits can be stored and redialled This does not include an exchange line access code If you hear a busy tone when attempting to redial select another line and press the REDIAL button or feature number i PT xX PAUSE and INTERCOM for secret dialling are counted as 1 digit PT While calling or during a conversation pressing the REDIAL button will disconnect the current call and redial the stored number PT You can check the stored number Press the REDIAL button while on hook and the stored number will be displayed See the Installation Manual Section 3 Redial a Operations 1 27 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Redialling the Saved Number Saved Number Re
266. ing to your needs Operations 1 3 suoneuodo oiseg 12 Proprietary Telephone Settings If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone you can customise your telephone functions For example you can change the initial settings according to your needs or the button functions on your telephone To program you need to switch your telephone to the programming mode During the programming mode your telephone is busy to outside callers If you want to make a call you must exit from programming mode This feature cannot be used with a single line telephone Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM When you enter the Programming mode the display shows the following message as the initial programming mode Seay PIUS 2EM INO gt The display also gives you helpful or stored data information related to the programming steps You can also refer to the Display Example in the Appendix Section 2 4 After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position If you move your desk and change take your telephone with you reset as desired Your settings will not remain in your telephone but will remain at your previous extension port During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension To enter the Programming Mode Be sure the telephone is idle and on hook MEMORY
267. ion Manual Section 3 Handsfree Operation 1 20 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Making Emergency Calls Emergency Call Allows you to dial a pre set emergency number after seizing an exchange line Up to 5 emergency dial numbers can be stored Dialling Any Telephone O U Pe Lift the handset or press Dial the line access code Dial tone Dial the emergency number SP PHONE MONITOR 9 O or 81 through 86 e You may press a line key instead An emergency call is allowed even in the following cases Account Code Verify All mode Any call barring COS number Electronic Extension Lockout If your system is connected to a host PBX you must dial the host PBX line access code after the line access code i LES See the Installation Manual Section 3 Emergency Call Operations 1 21 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Dialling by Simply Pressing a Button One Touch Dialling Dialling PT i PT PT PT PT PT Allows you to call a number or access a system feature with the touch of a button This is done by storing an extension number telephone number or feature number up to 24 digits in a One Touch Dialling button gt tV Lift the handset or press Press the flexible button assigned as SP PHONE MONITOR a One Touch Dialing button or PF button The destination numbers are stored in Proprietar
268. ion ports Default All extension ports Disable Re Feature References Section 3 Features Call Transfer to Exchange Line Conference 3 party 607 Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line Enables or disables automatically forwarding an incoming intercom or outside call to any exchange line for each extension aH HU eee emer Gr TE a To continue OO w em ron 01 24 X Enable Disable To continue aj Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Disable Rp Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Forwarding 4 72 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 60 609 608 Executive Busy Override Enables or disables using the Executive Busy Override feature at each extension If enabled an extension user can interrupt an established call HY YH NEXT or PREV e TE nyny y yng END YT SC FT YF FETYHN REST 4 To continue 01 24 X Enable Disable To continue us Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Disable IE Feature Reference Section 3 Features Executive Busy Override 609 Do Not Disturb Override Enables or disables using the Do Not Disturb Override feature at each extension If enabled an extension user can ring an extension which has set the Do Not Disturb feature pe Y GN YY FN Y Dan e AEE naea E EA Sree SS gn yny DE ced T
269. iption Changed or Enhanced 30810 61610 624 Features 33 27 29 Programmable Secret Speed Dials Separate Secret table not provided Refer to Secret Dialling Installation Manual Page 3 62 Recall Time No Earth Recall Option Ce po 37 005 DSS Button Mode With Without transfer 12 39 201 Transfer Recall Time More time options added 15secs 30secs 1 min 2mins 40 F3 FWD Key Set by extension user Sets F3 to a FWD Key Operating Instructions Page 1 12 Programmable Call Waiting Tone Type Set by extension user Operating Instructions Page 1 7 703 Door Opener Assignment Day Door Opening can now be 704 Door Opener Assignment Night assigned for each Mode 705 Door Opener Assignment Lunch 350 ARS Enable Disable Enabled on an individual CO basis 70 ae 71 351 354 First Digit of ARS Code a nn 3 Carrier Excepted Codes disregards codes when i e Call blocking code 141 applying ARS or Call Barring 7 72 355 358 Carrier Codes Assignment Stored Carrier Codes are disregarded 73 EIN 73 75 Carrier Access Code Sets the Access Code ARS Modification Remove Digits Removes digits before sending ARS Modification Added Digits Adds digits before the dialled number 3 385 388 Itemised Bill by Extension I ea Assigns the Bill code to each Extension FE 0 0 4 74 74 eee sa 0 5 0 6 6 6 6 6 8 5 75 Station Program Clear Set by Extension user Opera
270. ired Settings 502 MODE4 414 416 UCD Case 7 Uses the DISA or UCD feature for exchange lines OGM for DISA and UCD naen loh System 4 UCD UCD with The line is busy M H gt l x Outside Call OG When the line is free gt To the UCD group DISA i DISA with iOGM2 OGM Outside Call To the designated destination OGM1 We are sorry The line is currently busy Please hold UCD message OGM2 This is A company For the sales division press 1 For the service division press 2 To call the operator press 0 DISA message Required Settings 502 MODES 414 416 DISA1 for exchange line s which use the DISA feature UCD for exchange line s which use the UCD feature Case 8 Uses the DISA feature when none of the extension in the UCD group can answer a call OGM for UCD UCD with OGMI OGM The line is busy Outside Call M2 wy The call is sent to the DISA feature Lo 8 OGM1 We are sorry The line is currently busy Please hold OGM2 This is A company For the sales division press 1 For the service division press 2 To call the operator press 0 Required Settings 502 MODE6 414 416 UCD 523 Intercept 3 50 Features Ry Features O An optional OGM FAX Detection Card is required to program the OGM Con
271. ired minimum duration of the Calling Party Control CPC signal from the Local Exchange for incoming outside calls If programmed the system disconnects the line when the CPC signal is detected Y Hyn EA Tw dy ee p continue DE a es 1 6 X E 75 To continue ma Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines X CPC signal detect time selection number No selection number Detect time milliseconds Detect time Detect time Detect time 166 318 470 174 326 478 182 334 486 190 342 494 198 350 502 206 358 510 214 366 518 222 374 526 230 382 534 238 390 542 246 398 550 254 406 558 262 414 566 270 422 574 278 430 582 286 438 590 294 446 598 302 454 606 310 462 614 Detect time Disable 22 30 38 46 54 62 70 78 86 94 Default All exchange lines Disable No 00 nl Feature Reference Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection System Programming 4 53 421 422 4 2 System Programming 421 CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls I Enables or disables the CPC signal detection during an outgoing outside call If disabled the CPC signal detection is only activated during an incoming outside call or after call hold FAAEA e N E A Next NEXT or PREV Prev lt eae Pee Pe an continue MAO see sus gors mo EU Disable lt To continue ISELECT se ect l
272. irms the system ROM version ee o Ges e Display example YS51JA 990620 E Version Date 4 86 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 999 999 System Data Clear Resets all or a specific area of the current assigned data to the default settings The areas are as follows All Para Resets all data to the default settings System Para Resets all data to the default settings except for the data of the following 4 parameters CO Para Resets programs 400 through 403 and 405 through 424 to the default settings on an exchange line basis Ext Para Resets programs 102 516 and 600 through 615 to the default settings on an extension basis DSS Para Resets the assigned data on the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS console Speed Dial Resets the System Speed Dialling numbers 00 through 99 assigned in program 001 lt To select All System parameter and or Speed Dial gt AE wer Gass sow me All System CO Ext DSS Para Speed Dial To continue lt To select the CO exchange line parameter gt VE ee ie ee IN Gs All System CO Ext 1 6 DSS Para Speed Dial hg are lt To select the Extension parameter gt SE Le ee Ie EN Ce All System CO Ext 01 24 X DSS Para Speed Dial Ags age lt To select the DSS parameter gt SEE ex toe roe ED Go en All System CO Ext 21K DSS Para Speed Dial Ags continue Exchange line
273. isable 101 Hunting Type All extension groups Terminate 102 Voice Mail Port for KX TVP100 All 4 extension ports Disable 103 DTMF Integration for KX TVP100 Disable 104 Hold Mode Selection Hold 1 105 Conference Tone Enable 106 External Paging Access Tone Enable 107 DTMF Receiver Check All DTMF receivers Enable 108 Recall Mode for a Locked Extension Disable 109 CO Indicator Assignment Enable 110 Recall Key Mode MODE I 111 Hold Music Selection External 112 DSS Console Indication Mode Enable 115 Extension Ringing Pattern Selection Single 116 Conference Pattern Selection 5 party C 2 E 5 117 Call Pickup Tone Enable 5 2 Appendix 5 1 Default Values 127 Pickup Group Set Address Program Default 118 Pulse Restriction Enable 119 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion Disable 120 Bell Freguency 25 Hz 121 Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Dial 9 Selection 122 Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Disable Access 123 Break Ratio MODE 1 124 SLT Ringing Mode Selection MODE 2 125 Call Barring Check for and Enable 126 DSS Off Hook Mode Enable All extension groups Disable 200 Hold Recall Time 30 seconds 201 Transfer Recall Time 30 seconds 202 Call Forwarding Start Time 15 seconds delay 203 Pickup Dial Delay Time 3 seconds 204 Call Duration Count
274. isplayed when logged information is shown An assigned name in program 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting will be displayed when the caller s telephone number matches one of System Speed Dialling numbers assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialling Entry and a Telephone Company does not provide the caller s name If a Telephone Company provides a caller s name the name from the Telephone Company will be displayed even when a name assigned in program 011 is effective If both the number and name are available the user can select the initial display number or name by program 904 Caller ID Log Priority Selection Some Telephone Companies do not provide the caller s name with the Caller ID service The caller s telephone number may not be provided in some cases for example an international or mobile telephone call In this case the display will show OUT OF AREA etc 1 4 Installation 12 System Features Flow chart of Caller ID An outside call is received by the Caller ID line With both the caller s Y lt No modification gt Lc The reference number has been fixed Is the matched System Speed Dialling number assigned the name 7 __ Either the number or the name is displayed number and the name What is the Caller ID service type from the Telephone Company With the caller s number only Y No Is your area code assigned Yes Yes
275. it received within this time call is routed by program step 501 Options 1 2 3 4 5 secs DISA Mute Time Assigns the wait time after answering UCD Group Assigns the Extension Group for UCD UCD Busy Waiting Time Assigns the Time the UCD holds an IC call UCD OGM Message Interval Time Assigns the Time between messages UCD Busy Mode Assigns the operation after 521 Timer expires UCD Intercept Time Assigns the operation when 525 Timer expires UCD Ring Time before Intercept Assigns the UCD Extensions No Answer time 526 UCD Ring Time after Intercept Assigns the Ring time after intercept 5 Extension Groups Sets Extension groups used for Hunting All jacks Group 1 Extension Name Setting Assigns a name to an extension Not stored Account Code Entry Mode Selects the Account code input mode Option Option Forced Verify All Optional Forced Verify All Set if code must be used Verify Toll Verify Toll Temporarily changes COS to level 2 RA Ee Li i E WENU Parallel Connection Permits an SLT to be connected in parallel with a All jacks Disabled Mau Y UU TAM Extension Assigns TAM extension All jacks Disabled Ea U ej Room Monitor Assignment Assigns which jacks can be monitored by another All jacks Disabled Le eerie amet ES EL Internal Pulse Detection Disables Pulse Detection from Extensions Enabled LCD Language Assignment Set the LCD Display language All jacks English Doorphone Ringing Tone Patter
276. k for the ASTA mark D or the BSI mark y on the body of the fuse If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below If in any doubt please consult a gualified electrician WARNING THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following code Green and yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected
277. l Distribution Group Log In Log Out UCD Group Hunting Group DISA Ring Group 3 44 Features 3 Features M Message Waiting Allows an extension user to notify the called extension of a message waiting when the called extension is busy or does not answer the call Only a proprietary telephone user with a MESSAGE button can know there is a message waiting if the LED on the MESSAGE button lights red Pressing the lit MESSAGE button will reply to the message by calling the extension which left the message The messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice Processing System can also be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after pressing the lit MESSAGE button Voice Mail Integration Cancelling the message can be performed from the extension sending it or from the extension receiving it Each extension can have a maximum of simultaneous messages Messages are always left at the original extension They cannot be sent to a Call Forwarding or Extension Hunting destination i l gt Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Restoring the MESSAGE button 1 7 Useful Features Leaving a Message Notification Message Waiting 1 7 Useful Features Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 Microphone Mute Allows a proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy i e The user s voice will only be muted d
278. l Ready CD 108 2 5 SG Signal Ground AB 102 6 DSR Data Set Ready CC 107 7 RTS Request To Send CA 105 8 CTS Clear To Send CB 106 2 16 Installation 2 13 Printer and PC Connection Connection Chart for a Printer Personal Computer with the System If you connect a printer or a PC with a 9 pin cable follow the chart below System Circuit Signal Pin type name no EIA BB RXD 2 BA TXD 3 CD DTR 4 AB SG 5 CC DSR 6 CA RTS 7 CB CTS 8 a ea Bm e 9 pin Cable Printer PC Circuit Pin Signal type no name EIA 2 RXD BB 3 TXD BA 4 DTR CD 5 6 7 RTS CA 8 CTS CB If you connect a printer or a PC with a 25 pin cable follow the chart below System Circuit r Signal Pin type name no EIA BB RXD 2 BA TXD 3 CD DTR 4 AB SG 5 CC DSR 6 CA RTS 7 CB CTS 8 25 pin Cable Printer PC p Circuit Pin Signal type no name EIA 1 FG AA 3 RXD BB 2 TXD BA 20 DTR CD J SG AB 5 CTS CB 6 DSR CC 8 DCD CF Installation 2 17 2 13 Printer and PC Connection Serial Interface RS 232C Signals Frame Ground FG Connects the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord Transmitted Data SD TXD ccc cece ccc ees output Conveys signals from the unit to the printer A Mark condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitt
279. l Recording SMDR for more information about SMDR An example of a printed call record Date Time Ext CO Dial number Duration Code 31 12 98 12 52PM 203 05 12345678901234567890123456789012 00 00 16 31 12 98 12 53PM 203 02 lt incoming gt 2013570846 00 01 43 31 12 98 12 54PM 201 02 lt incoming gt 1234567890123456 00 07 48 31 12 98 1 04PM 203 06 092 1438 00 00 06 4536 31 12 98 1 04PM 202 05 lt DISA incoming gt 2013570846 00 00 09 31 12 98 1 05PM 203 01 lt DISA incoming gt 00 00 08 31 12 98 1 06PM 203 01 092123456789 00 00 08 31 12 98 1 06PM 202 02 0921234567 00 00 17 31 12 98 1 07PM 203 01 0921234567 00 11 00 13 31 12 98 2 15PM 203 01 0921234567 00 11 00 201 31 12 98 2 26PM 203 01 F 0927654321 00 03 00 31 12 98 2 27PM 216 05 9 0924567123 00 13 55 31 12 98 3 25PM 02 lt UCD Waiting gt 00 11 48 J A received caller s telephone number will be printed out only when With CID is selected in program 906 Caller ID SMDR Format I Related Feature References Installation Manual Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 7 Installation 1 1 3 System Programming 900 901 900 Caller ID Assignment Enables or disables the Caller ID feature for each exchange line which has contracted the Caller ID service from a Telephone Company a a a E A R Seere E e ea e a To continue E nex sevect store 1 6 Enable gt t Disable T
280. la Hang up or press SP PHONE The other two parties may continue their conversation e If the other two parties are both exchange lines they will be disconnected To talk to the original party while holding the third party Gj 2 Press Recall Confirmation tone Talk to the original party optional To terminate one party and talk to the other fo J INTERCOM Ji o or C Press the line key or INTERCOM of Confirmation tone the party to remain connected optional A conversation with the desired party is established and the other party is disconnected 1 60 Operations 1 7 i PT PT PT SLT SLT Useful Features A conference call can also be established by Executive Busy Override When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call or vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all parties The tone can be disabled Pressing a line key which is not in the conference allows you to exit from the conference leaving the other two parties connected unless they are both exchange lines If the other parties are both exchange lines they will be disconnected If the third party does not answer press the line key or INTERCOM button to return to the second party To change a 3 party conference to a 5 party conference refer to Conference 5 party You can return to the original party before the third party answers by pressing the Recall button
281. lation Manual Section 3 Call Splitting Operations 1 47 suoneuodo oiseg 1 5 During a Conversation Paging Allows you to make a voice announcement to several people at the same time Your message is announced over built in speakers of proprietary telephones and or the external pager The paged person can answer your page from any telephone You can also transfer a call after paging All extensions Allows you to make a voice announcement to all extensions Any Telephone y Q Lift the handset or press Dial 330 Confirmation tone Announce Wait for an answer Talk SP PHONE MONITOR Group Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice announcement The announcement can only be heard through the extensions built in speakers Any Telephone 2S Da Lift the handset or press Dial 33 Dial the group number Confirmation tone Announce Wait for Talk SP PHONE MONITOR 1 through 8 an answer External Allows you to make a voice announcement over the external pager Any Telephone 4 S oo g FR Lift the handset or press Dial 34 Confirmation tone Announce Wait for Talk SP PHONE MONITOR optional an answer 1 48 Operations 1 5 During a Conversation All extensions amp External Allows you to make a voice announcement to all extensions Your message is announced over the built in speakers of proprietary telephones PT and the external pager Any Telephone
282. le Enable Disable Enable Disable Default All o o GU 1 oo 1 2 i i i i 3 i i i i 4 i i i i 5 6 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment Extension Extension Mr port no Itemised bill code 3 digits max 0 9 port no Itemised bill code 3 digits max 0 9 Default Extension ports 01 through 24 201 through 224 01 14 02 15 03 16 04 17 05 18 06 19 07 20 08 21 09 22 10 23 11 24 12 x 13 400 Exchange Line 402 Pulse Gn Fa i TT anh I a Selection Selection Selection Exchange line no T T T Connect No Connect DTMF Pulse Call Blocking Low Speed High Speed Default All Yo Yj Yo 2 i i i i 3 i i i i 4 5 6 x Programming Tables 7 23 Programming Tables 404 Trunk Group Assignment 6 Trunk group no 1 Change Default 403 Host PBX Access Codes Access codes 1 or 2 digits 8 different codes max All Not stored Exchange line no Default 405 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day X All Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Selection Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6 Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Vv Extension port no Default All 01 02 03 04
283. le line telephone SLT either one outside or intercom call can be held at one time If an SLT user wants to hold both calls use the Call Park feature An SLT user can select how to operate the Call Hold feature by program 104 lt Exclusive Hold gt Allows a proprietary telephone user to prevent other extension users from retrieving their held call Only the user who held the call can retrieve it This feature is not available for an SLT 3 40 Features 3 Features H Only one intercom call can be placed on hold For a proprietary telephone outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time If a held call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program 200 the extension user who held it will hear a ring tone or an alarm tone If the user is on hook and their SP PHONE MONITOR button indicator is off the phone will ring Hold Recall If the user is off hook or in the handsfree mode an alarm tone will be sent to the built in speaker of a proprietary telephone or the handset receiver of a single line telephone at 15 second intervals Hold Alarm If Disable is selected in program 200 nothing will be heard If a held outside call is not answered within thirty minutes it will be automatically disconnected For outside calls music is sent to the external party on hold if available Music on Hold During a 5 party conference the Hold feature cannot be activated I n gt Re
284. lephone user to confirm their port and extension number using a simple operation mr Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Self Extension Number Confirmation KX T7130 only 3 62 Features 3 Features S Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMDR automatically prints out detailed call information of outside calls A printer connected to the Serial Interface RS 232C port can be used to print incoming and outgoing outside calls as well as print a hard copy of System Programming To print out the record of System Programming items that have been assigned use program 804 System Data Dump To print the call records use program 802 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing which prints out the following records A record of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls A record of all incoming outside calls An example of a printed call record Date Time Ext CO Dial number Duration Code 31 12 98 12 52PM 203 05 1234567890 1234567890123456789012 00 00 16 31 12 98 12 53PM 203 02 lt incoming gt 00 01 43 31 12 98 12 54PM 201 02 lt incoming gt 00 07 48 31 12 98 1 04PM 203 06 092 1438 00 00 06 4536 31 12 98 1 04PM 202 05 lt DISA incoming gt 00 00 09 31 12 98 1 05PM 203 01l lt DISA incoming gt 00 00 08 31 12 98 1 06PM 203 01 092123456789 00 00 08 31 12 98 1 06PM 202 02 0921234567 00 0017 aas 31 12 98 1 07PM 203
285. ling Call Forwarding at your original extension PT and SLT FWD DND D XD For a PT Q i For an SLT o GJ Lift the handset or press For a PT Press FWD DND Dial 0 Dial Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial 71 tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone e You may press the flexible button The FWD DND indicator light turns off assigned as the FWD DND button e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead instead of F Cancelling Call Forwarding at the destination extension Follow Me All Calls only PT and SLT FWD DND Gj S For a PT p a Ui A For an SLT F i Lift the handset or press For a PT Press Dial 8 Enter your Dial Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR FWD DND extension number tone and SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial 71 dial tone e You may press the flexible The FWD DND indicator light turns off at your line key assigned as the extension FWD DND button instead Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of iH 1 56 Operations 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Locking Your Telephone Electronic Extension Lockout Allows you to lock your extension so that other users cannot make outside calls from your extension Locking Any Telephone same code S lock code lock code Lift the handset or press Dial 77 Enter a 4 digit lock code Dial Confirmation tone Hang up or pres
286. ling can be used together You may press a line key or dial a line access code to select a desired exchange line before pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button or dialling X It is possible to cancel call barring with this feature Call Barring Override for System Speed Dialling In this case System Programming is necessary iy PT_ A System Speed Dial number can be divided when stored lt Example gt If the number is divided and stored in System Speed Dial numbers 01 and 02 Press AUTO DIAL STORE 0 1 AUTO DIAL STORE 0 2 PT The dialled number appears on the display SLT A rotary telephone cannot use this feature See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Barring for System Speed Dialling See the Installation Manual Section 3 System Speed Dialling a Operations 1 23 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Dialling Using Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling Allows you to store up to 10 speed dial numbers at your extension These numbers are available for your extension only Storing a phone number Any Telephone gt 2 personal speed dial no desired no Lift the handset Dial2X Enter the personal speed Enter the Dial Confirmation Hang up or press or press dial number 0 through 9 desired number tone SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR Dialling Any Telephone yN B personal speed dial no Lift
287. ll hotel or motel to FA set an extension in a guest room as a wake up call or a set an extension in a child s room by a mother m G Px Operating Instructions References K 1 7 Useful Features Alarm Setting Timed Reminder 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Features 3 65 T 3 Features Time Day Night Lunch Service The system supports the day night and lunch operation modes The system operation for making and receiving calls can be different for the day night and lunch modes The system operation for call barring can be arranged to prevent unauthorised toll calls for each mode Time service can be set automatically or manually by program 006 Changing the Day Night Lunch Modes The day night and lunch modes can be changed either automatically at an assigned time in program 007 or manually by the operator or manager at any desired time The lunch mode interrupts the day or night mode After the lunch mode is finished the day or night mode starts again If the lunch mode is set using feature number 7831F in the automatic mode the mode can only be cancelled by using feature number 7807F This can be useful during holidays The day and night modes are automatically changed at the programmed time in 007 even if feature number 7801F is not entered These operations can only be done by an operator or manager The operator and manager
288. lling Printing SMDR Account Code Selection 709 Door Opener Time Door opener Selection T T T T T T T no lsec 2sec 3sec 4sec Ssec 6sec 7sec 8sec Default All MA 2 i i i i i i i 3 i i i i i i i 4 x 3 800 SMDR RS 232C Communication Parameters New line Word R Stop Selection code PAU AI length Beaty bit CR LF CR 150 300 600 11200124001480019600 7 8 Mark Space Even Odd None 1 2 Default V Tm ER ES AT AN DN ah Ss as A Change LEE EU ee eee LE HD 801 SMDR Parameter 802 Incoming Outgoing Call Selection for Printing Default Selection Default Selection Page length On v 66 4 99 Incoming calls Off Skip perforation 0 On Vv 0 95 Outgoing calls off Toll Selection No Printing INDEX Printing CODE Default A Change SMDR Language Assignment V 806 Selection English Spanish Portuguese Default Vv Change 7 44 Programming Tables 236 mm Be 169 mm CD x y i F b a screw here Install a screw here FF TEMPLATE FOR THE WALL MOUNTING 92 5 mm 1 Copy this template and place it on the wall 2 Install the screws If you mount the unit on a concrete or mortar wall place the anchor plugs flush to the wall with a hammer beforehand 3 Hook the unit on the screw heads J Please see 2 4 Wall Mounting o 185 mm
289. lt 20 seconds The interdigit timer applies until the call barring check is completed When the timer expires an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialling if Enable was selected in program 211 No Dial Disconnection For a single line telephone an outgoing outside call will be released from a DTMF receiver when the interdigit timer expires n gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring System Programming 4 29 210 211 4 2 System Programming 210 DTMF Time Assigns the minimum duration of a DTMF signal sent to an exchange line which is set to the DTMF mode in program 401 Dial Mode MODE 1 80 milliseconds MODE 2 160 milliseconds ana ser Bass em He MODE1 MODE2 Default MODE 1 211 No Dial Disconnection Enables or disables disconnecting an exchange line if an extension user does not dial anything within 20 seconds after an exchange line is seized ang A Es Gem me Enable Disable Default Enable Disconnect J The interdigit timer assigned in program 208 Interdigit Time applies until the call barring check is completed When the timer expires an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialling if Enable was selected in this program I Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring 4 30 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 212 213 212 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Sets the max
290. make an intercom call and while hearing a busy tone A three party conference 3 is now established Confirmation tone optional To leave the conference Any Telephone ola Hang up or press SP PHONE The other two parties continue their conversation To terminate one party and talk to the other fo co INTERCOM qo Gd Press the line key or INTERCOM Confirmation tone optional to which you wish to remain connected If all three parties are extensions this operation is not possible This feature does not work when Data Line Security or Executive Busy Override Deny is set at either or both of the other parties When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call or vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all parties The tone can be disabled ay IJ e 1 3 Making Calls Denying Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Deny e 1 7 Useful Features Conference 3 party e 1 7 Useful Features Data Line Security See the Installation Manual Section 3 Executive Busy Override i Additional information The feature and program reference I If your telephone is not noted in the operation steps ex only PT is noted and you are M using a single line telephone this means your telephone cannot execute that feature If your telephone can perform several operations for one feature you can select the method accord
291. mation while on hook 4 Calling back the logged number AUTO DIAL a 6 U__ STORE Press the desired Flexible CO button Dial 6 Press STORE you wish to assign as the Caller ID Indication button lt PT Display Example gt CID Indication The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming mode Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position El ll 2 2 Telephone Features Call Information Log Incoming 2 2 Telephone Features Call Log Incoming 2 2 Operations 2 1 Proprietary Telephone Settings Caller ID Selection Button Assignment Allows you to assign a Flexible line key as the Caller ID Selection button The Caller ID Selection button can be used in the following cases 1 Confirming a caller s information while receiving a call or during a conversation 2 Checking the number of logged calls 3 Informing you when no more caller s information can be logged by lighting the indicator AUTO DIAL ac a STORE Press the desired Flexible CO button Dial 7 Press STORE you wish to assign as the Caller ID Selection button lt PT Display Example gt The STORE indicator lights The display shows the initial programming CID Selection mode Be sure the handset is on t
292. mber 0 or 9 With AA Available destinations are numbers available in the Without AA mode and numbers 0 through 9 assigned in program 501 5 o o Cex Gee sio me Without AA With AA Default Without AA For example in the With AA mode if a number is not dialled within the programmed time in 517 DISA AA Wait Time after dialling 1 the call is received at the DISA built in auto attendant number 1 In the With AA mode if O or 9 is not assigned in program 501 the system recognises them as a the operator number El LES Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA System Programming 4 57 501 4 2 System Programming 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant Assigns a maximum of 10 DISA built in auto attendant numbers when With AA is selected in program 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection The extension numbers assigned in program 009 Extension Number Assignment and the extension group numbers assigned in program 600 Extension Group Assignment can be assigned as a 1 digit number and used as DISA built in auto attendant numbers poeee ene ene e nee e n ne ee oe ene GG port no group no 0 9 El 01 24 1 8 Not Stored En ere ea eee eia e e ea aA eere Default All auto attendant numbers Not stored J If you would like to use the operator number in the With AA mode do not as
293. mber 780 is not accepted in the manual mode One of the day night or lunch button indicators on the DSS console lights red to display the current mode If the day night or lunch mode is changed manually when the system is set to automatic mode and the manager starts System Programming the manual setting will be cancelled after System Programming is completed It will return to the automatic day night or lunch mode 1 7 Useful Features Doorphone Call 1 7 Useful Features Door Opener See the Installation Manual Section 3 Direct In Line DIL See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Barring See the Installation Manual Section 3 Time Day Night Lunch Service 1 96 Operations 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Extension Password Set Manager only The manager can assign a password to each extension The assigned password can be used for the Walking COS feature Setting Repeat these steps SP PHONE AUTO DIAL SP PHONE AUTO DIAL ER oe e Cm LL STORE STORE L _ Dial7 Enter the system Press Press Enterthe Press Press SP PHONE NEXT password 4 digits AUTO DIAL STORE SP PHONE password AUTO DIAL STORE or REDIAL PREV and NEXT 4 digits select the extension you want to assign e You may enter the pre set extension password 4 digits of extension port 01 instead of the system password Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE bu
294. n Doorphone ringing pattern Triple Options Single Double Triple Ring Doorphone Access Tone Selection Assigns if a tone is sent to the Doorphone when Doorphones 1 4 it is monitored Enable send tone Doorphone Ring Time Doorphone ringing time 15 secs Options 15 30 secs Door Opener Time Door unlocked time Doorphones Options 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 secs 1 4 5 secs Secret Speed Dialling One Touch Enables or disables SMDR printout for these numbers No printing Dial Printing System Data Dump Outputs all System Data to SMDR 805 SMDR Account Code Selection Sets SMDR Account Code printout CODE CODE Account code INDEX The two digit account code location 806 SMDR Language Selection Set SMDR Language English 998 ROM Version Confirms the System ROM version No Default 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 604 605 607 608 610 611 612 613 614 615 706 707 708 709 803 804 806 998 6 of 6
295. n SLT Press Recall and dial tone 0 through 9 and dial tone If you hear a busy tone it indicates the specified parking zone is unavailable e You do not need to redial the feature number to change the parking zone Just enter the parking zone number while hearing the busy tone Retrieving a parked call PT and SLT f id to the party Lift the handset or press Dial 56 Enter a parking zone number Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR 0 through 9 where the call and dial tone is to be parked e If there is no held call you will hear a reorder tone If a parked call is not retrieved within a pre determined time default 30 seconds ringing will be heard Hold Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes it will be automatically disconnected This feature is useful when you want to hold more than one intercom call with a PT or more than one intercom or outside call with an SLT During a 5 party conference you cannot use this feature i 1 7 Useful Features Conference 5 party See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Park Operations 1 41 suoneuodo oiseg 1 5 During a Conversation Transferring a Call to an Extension Call Transfer to Extension Allows you to transfer a received call to another extension There are 2 ways Screened Call Transfer The call is announced before being transferred Unscreened Call Transfer The line is
296. n Your Telephone ceeeceeeeeeeeeteeees 1 8 Display Contrast Adjustment se gd GW pes ceases aes 1 14 Volume Control Ringer Speaker 0 eeeeceeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 1 14 1 5 7 Making Calls Gyd df Y CUT YF CN Y 1 16 lt Intercom Calling gt Intercom Callina Sea o o R 1 16 Calling the Operator Operator Call 0 eee eeeeceeceseeeesteeeenteeeenaeeees 1 17 lt Outside Calling gt Odid Calline ac o ae yn eC A S ES 1 17 Recall sairi iri OU A Y ee a E E 1 19 Handsiree Operations y Fd y FN BD YO on dd 1 20 Making Emergency Calls Emergency Call eee eeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeteeees 1 21 lt Ouick Dialling gt Dialling by Simply Pressing a Button One Touch Dialling 1 22 Dialling Using System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling 1 23 Dialling Using Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling 1 24 Dialling by Simply Going Off Hook Pickup Dialling 1 26 lt Redialling gt Redialling the Last Number Dialled Last Number Redial 1 27 Redialling the Saved Number Saved Number Redial 1 28 lt When the Dialled Line is Busy gt Sending a Call Waiting Tone to a Busy Extension Busy Extension Signalling 0 eeeeeesccecssccecseeceeseeeeesseeeesaeeeenes 1 29 Making Your Telephone Ring Back Automatically When a Line Becomes Free Automatic Callback Busy Camp On 1 30 Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override
297. n be disabled in program 117 If a ringing extension sets the Call Pickup Deny feature an extension user will hear a reorder tone when the user tries to pick up the call Reguired System Programming 117 Call Pickup Tone 127 Pickup Group Set 600 Extension Group Assignment 611 TAM Telephone Answering Machine Extension Operating Instructions Reference 1 4 Receiving Calls Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension Call Pickup Sorry Mr Smith is out of the office E Call Splitting Allows an extension user to talk to 2 different parties If a call is received while the user is already on the line the user can place the current call on hold and have a conversation with the other party This feature is not possible for a doorphone call page or 5 party conference i I Related Feature References Conference 5 party Doorphone Call Paging Operating Instructions Reference 1 5 During Conversation Call Splitting Features 3 17 C 3 Features Call Transfer to Exchange Line Allows an extension user enabled in program 606 to transfer a received intercom call to an external party J A single line telephone user cannot transfer a received call to an external party To join the conversation again after transferring the call press the corresponding line key A conference call will be established This feature is not available for a single line telephone ll
298. n carry out this feature by entering one of the account codes programmed in 310 Account Codes before dialling the telephone number The user can make a toll call with the COS number 2 J The account code Verify toll call barring mode at an extension permits users to x override their call barrings This feature can be used on extensions assigned to call barring COS numbers 3 through 5 The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed If the user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid one a regular call barring check is done When a user makes a call using this feature it will appear on the SMDR printout with either the entered 4 digit account code or the 2 digit index of the entered account code This selection is set in program 805 Users can also override call barring of another extension by using the Walking COS feature Flow chart of Call Barring Override Call Barring Override by Account Codes is attempted Option Forced y Verify All What is the account code mode Verify Toll Y Does the entered code match Does the entered code match i No a stored account code a stored account code Yes y _ Is the COS number 1 Yes No Yes No y The call is made with the COS number 2 Y The call is not allowed The Call Barring COS A reorder tone is z number remains the same as gm ret
299. n diameter Input impedance 8 O Maximum length of the cable 0 8 mm 1 3 mm Under 10 m External Music Port External Music source System programming for the music sources used for Music on Hold and Background Music BGM is reguired To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold use the volume control on the external music source External Music port is at SELV Reguired System Programming Section 4 2 System Programming 111 Hold Music Selection Feature Reference Section 3 Features Music on Hold Background Music BGM Installation 2 13 2 11 Parallelled Telephone Connection Any single line telephone can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone as follows Using a Modular T Adaptor 2 conductor wiring cord Connect pins A and B 4 conductor wiring cord _ gt For a proprietary telephone Connect pins A B H and L Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone I Reguired System Programming Section 4 2 System Programming 610 Parallelled Telephone Connection Feature Reference Section 3 Features Parallelled Telephone Connection 2 14 Installation 2 12 Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection If your telephone is polarity sensitive follow the procedure below 2 3 Extension Exchange Line 4 Reverse here 5 Extension Exchange Line Reverse he
300. n hold and the destination extension is called immediately Without Transfer mode During a conversation TRANSFER a Press TRANSFER Press the flexible button assigned as the DSS button i If the destination extension does not answer the call within a pre determined time default n 30 seconds the call will return to you Transfer Recall If there is no answer within 30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts the call will be disconnected When the dialled extension is busy you may access the extension by dialling 2 Busy Extension Signalling or 3 Executive Busy Override and going on hook PT If you want to return to the held call press the TRANSFER button or corresponding line key or INTERCOM button before the destination extension answers PT _ A flexible line key can be assigned as a DSS button PT To use One Touch Transfer System Programming is required PT _ During a 5 party conference you cannot transfer a call SLT If you want to return to the held call press the Recall button before the destination extension answers SLT If Hold 3 is assigned in System Programming you must dial 50 after pressing the Recall button IL 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone DSS Direct Station Selection Button See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Tran
301. n is a DISA ring group the DISA Busy Mode will not work for the call The system regards the call as unanswered The DISA Busy Mode is selected in program 506 There are 3 modes as follows Disconnect the caller hears a busy tone and a call is disconnected e Call Waiting the destination extension hears a call waiting tone if they have enabled Call Waiting e DISA2 if MODE is assigned in program 502 and a message is recorded in OGM2 the caller will hear the message and the system waits for the new destination 3 26 Features Features D Q 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts The destination telephone s will ring for the time programmed in 508 In this case the system does not accept a line access code If nothing is recorded in OGM2 or OGM2 is used for another caller the caller will hear a busy tone and the call is disconnected The OGM is sent to the caller according to programs 414 416 and 502 when the assigned time in program 519 expires If an OGM is not recorded the DISA Wait Timer After OGM programmed in 505 starts immediately When the system detects a FAX CNG tone while the OGM is being sent the call is sent to the FAX extension assigned in program 503 When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal while the OGM is being sent the call is disconnected The DISA Wait Timer After OGM starts The system waits fo
302. n the length of time programmed in 508 DISA Ringing Time before Intercept Intercept or Disconnect is available Intercept The call is redirected depending on 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Intercept Routing No Answer feature This is useful for business use For example the call is forwarded to the operator or a Voice Processing System automatically Disconnect The call is disconnected This is useful for users who do not want to forward the call for example to a home a00 Ca fase nos mo Intercept Disconnect Default Intercept ES e Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing Voice Mail Integration for KX TVP100 System Programming 4 61 508 509 4 2 System Programming 508 DISA Ringing Time before Intercept Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing No Answer feature 12 507 DISA Intercept Mode Intercept When the time expires the system starts to redirect the call to the programmed extension s S o 8 se se ron mo 10 20 30 40 60 120 sec Default 20 seconds mp Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing 509 DISA Ringing Time after Intercept Assigns the length of time to call the extension s where a call is redirected by the Intercept Routing No Answer feature m 507 DISA Intercept Mode Intercept afte
303. nate np Reguired System Programming 100 Hunting Group Set 101 Hunting Type 600 Extension Group Assignment E FA Related Feature References y J my Call Forwarding p Tri Do Not Disturb DND Fr Ed z Extension Group b Log In Log Out Extension Lock lt Electronic Extension Lockout gt Allows an extension user to lock their extension so that other users cannot make outside calls until it is unlocked Any 4 digit code can be used to lock and unlock an extension a A lt Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL gt ER The operator and manager can cancel Electronic Extension Lockout of all extensions at one time lt Remote Extension Lock Control gt The operator and manager are given the privilege of controlling Electronic Extension Lockout at any extension by using the DSS console The operator and manager can see the status of each extension locked or unlocked by the pre assigned DSS button LED on the DSS console For example this feature is useful for a small hotel or motel when guests are checked out 3 36 Features 3 Features E The Remote Extension Lock Control overrides the Electronic Extension Lockout If the operator or manager sets Remote Extension Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user the user cannot unlock it A call barring class can be assigned to an extension which has set the Electronic Extension Lockout and Remote Extension Lock Con
304. ne i gt Reorder tone dialled number other than Host PBX access codes Carrier excepted codes and 1st carrier access code 3 The dialled number is sent to the Local Exchange Is the dialled number a call barring denied code No Does the dialled number include The dialled number other than the 1st carrier the 1st carrier access code access code is sent to the Local Exchange No gt Does th d A TA Does the area code match a et UO TS Route 1 is i i match a Route 1 and adding to the Route 1 selection code 4 i selected exception code dialled number No oo Does the area code Removing from match a Route 2 and adding to the exception code dialled number Route 2 is selected Does the area code match a Route 2 selection code oo Route 3 is ckk i i selected Does the area code Removing from Does the area code match a i match a Route 3 and adding to the Route 3 selection code exception code dialled number No oo Route 4 is ckk i 7 selected Does the area code Removing from Does the area code match a a match a Route 4 and adding to the Route 4 selection code exception code dialled number No Are 7 digits other than Host PBX access codes Carrier excepted codes and 1st carrier access code dialled 15 The dialled number is sent Goes to to the Local Exchange 3 8 Features 1
305. nection Reference 2 15 OGM FAX Detection Card Installation Required System Programming 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch 502 OGM Mode Selection 506 DISA Busy Mode 523 UCD Busy Mode Related Feature References Direct Inward System Access DISA Uniform Call Distribution UCD Operating Instructions Reference 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Outgoing Message OGM Features 3 51 O 3 Features Outside Calling Allows an extension user to make a call to an external party by using one of the following line access methods lt Automatic Line Access gt Allows an extension user to select an available exchange line automatically from the assigned lines in program 419 by pressing the Automatic Line Access number 0 or 9 For a proprietary telephone a Line Access Key assignment S CO G CO O CO in the Proprietary Telephone Settings is required If Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in the Proprietary Telephone Settings the user can access an idle line only by going off hook lt Individual Line Access gt Allows a proprietary telephone user to select the desired exchange line by pressing the line key assigned as the S CO key A Line Access Key assignment S CO is required before use lt Trunk Group Access gt Allows an extension user to select an idle line within a designated trunk group A trunk group is assigned in program 404 To specify a trunk group dial the feature
306. ng to one trunk group yn HF AE HE SH 1 Enter program address A04 2 Press NEXT 3 Enter the exchange line number 1 through 6 or press to gt Feature Reference select all exchange lines Section 3 Features 4 Enter the trunk group number Outside Calling a through 6 a ee ae 5 Press STORE YNYR Additional information l 6 Press END To continue assigning another exchange line number press SELECT instead of END and repeat from step 3 You can also continue assigning by pressing PREV or NEXT instead of END You can go to the previous or next exchange line and repeat from step 4 i Provides the factory default setting If you change the setting psa iwrite the programmed data in the programming table listed in isection 7 Programming Tables Additional Information e When you press for example in step 3 in program 404 if all exchange lines have been assigned as trunk group 1 CO X TRK GRP 1 will be displayed If each exchange line has been assigned to a different trunk group CO X Mixed will be displayed You can press the SELECT button repeatedly to select the desired parameter if available You can use the or button to move to the next previous step if available System Programming 4 2 System Programming 000 001 000 Date and Time Setting eS Sets the current date and time onia ee E
307. ng up Lift the Talk to the line key or INTERCOM new caller handset new caller e The current call is placed on hold The current call is placed on hold I PT SLT SLT If both the current call and new call are extension calls you do not have to press the INTERCOM button The default is OFF When Call Waiting is enabled a Call Waiting tone is sent to the user under the following conditions 1 When an outside call except a doorphone call is received or 2 When another extension executes the Busy Extension Signalling feature Setting Data Line Security temporarily cancels this feature You can change the desired Call Waiting tone Tone 1 or Tone 2 If a Call Waiting tone is heard and the line Key or INTERCOM indicator does not flash this tone indicates Call Waiting from the Local Exchange In this case see External Feature Access If Hold 2 or Hold 3 is assigned in System Programming you must dial 50 after pressing the Recall button You cannot transfer the new call while holding the current call If you want to do so first park the original call using the Call Park feature hang up then take the new call 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Call Waiting Tone Selection 1 3 Making Calls Sending a Call Waiting Tone to a Busy Extension Busy Extension Signalling 1 5 During a Conversati
308. nied codes programmed in 303 programmed in 306 4 20 denied codes programmed in 302 plus 40 exception codes code numbers 01 40 20 denied codes programmed in 303 plus programmed in 306 20 denied codes programmed in 304 5 20 denied codes programmed in 302 plus 20 exception codes code numbers 01 20 20 denied codes programmed in 303 plus programmed in 306 20 denied codes programmed in 304 plus 20 denied codes programmed in 305 Flow chart of Call Barring The user makes a toll call y Is it a System Speed Dialling number 1 Yes No y What is the COS number COS2 5 Is the dialled number found in applicable denied codes Yes Is the dialled number found in applicable exception codes No The call is denied A reorder tone is returned to the user No or Equal 1 System Speed Dialling numbers are assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialling Entry 2 The system speed dialling boundary class is assigned in program 301 Call Barring System Speed Dialling Boundary Class The call is allowed 3 12 Features 3 Features C Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class Allows assigning a call barring class for extensions where the Electronic Extension Lockout or Remote Extension Lock feature has been set An extension user usually cannot make an outside call at a locked extension however if a call barring class is assigned in
309. nnecting the first call or placing it on hold Setting Cancelling for outside calls Any Telephone GCC re A 4 BoA re cba Lift the handset or press To set Dial 7311 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7310 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of Setting Cancelling for intercom calls Any Telephone 5 WAB To set 1 ff s gt i 3 2 o To GT y Glan Lift the handset or press To set Dial 73214 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 7320 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of ff To talk to the new caller by terminating the current call While hearing a Call Waiting tone While hearing a Call Waiting tone co INTERCOM 9 g Q E or r ching EY a Press the flashing Talk to the Hang up Lift the handset Talk to the new caller line key or INTERCOM new caller The current call is disconnected The current call is disconnected Operations 1 45 suoneuodo oiseg 1 5 During a Conversation To talk to the new party holding the current call While hearing the Call Waiting tone While hearing a Call Waiting tone and the line key or INTERCOM indicator is flashing rapidly pi HOLD ho a co nero b9 J Gla cet A 0 Press HOLD Press the flashing Talk to the Press Recall Dialtone Ha
310. ns One is on the DSS console and the n other is flexible line key on your proprietary telephone assigned as a DSS button LE e Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone DSS Direct Station Selection Button 1 9 DSS Console Features Initial Settings One Touch Dialling Assignment 006 Time Day Night Lunch Service Changing Mode Selects changing the day night and lunch service manually or automatically For manual changing refer to the Operating Instructions For automatic changing set the next program 007 Time Day Night Lunch Service Start Time aAa Cex ass Gee ue Man Auto Default Manual np Feature Reference Section 3 Features Time Day Night Lunch Service 4 8 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 007 008 007 Time Day Night Lunch Service Start Time Sets the starting time on a week day basis when Automatic is selected in program 006 Time Day Night Lunch Service Changing Mode y y AH AE HY eee AH AH HR ces H x1 i Lo o 7 NEXT i NEXT or PREV or x SELECT Sun Sat Every day Day Night op ea oe 77977909199107 Lunch S Lunch E To go to another day of the week To go to another mode BE i m 2 mus on ce i 1 12 00 59 AM PM lt If you press the SELECT button gt To assign every day of the week to one selection press the x b
311. number 8 and the desired trunk group number 1 through 6 A proprietary telephone user can also specify a trunk group by pressing a G CO key A Line Access Key assignment G CO is required before use If Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in the Proprietary Telephone Settings the user can access an idle line only by going off hook Each extension requires System Programming to access exchange lines After an exchange line is seized the system waits for the assigned time in program 206 before dialling I np Reguired System Programming 206 Dialling Start Time 400 Exchange Line Connection Assignment 404 Trunk Group Assignment 405 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day Night Lunch 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access Related Feature References Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Line Access Keys Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Line Access Keys 1 3 Making Calls Outside Calling 3 52 Features 3 Features P Allows an extension user to make a voice announcement to several people at the same time The message is announced over the built in speakers of proprietary telephones and or the external pager The paged person can
312. number 5 is the lowest That is COS number 1 allows all toll calls COS numbers 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls by combining pre programmed deny and exception codes shown in the table on the next page Denied Codes An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a call barring COS number between 2 and 5 is first checked against the assigned denied codes in program 302 305 If the first digits of the dialled number not including the line access code are not found in the class the call can be made Each class can store up to 20 denied codes each consisting of 11 digits Exception Codes These codes are used to override a programmed denied code A call denied by the denied codes is checked against the selected exception codes assigned in program 306 If a match is found the call can be made Up to 80 exception codes each consisting of 11 digits can be stored The available number of codes depends on the COS number Emergency numbers such as the police or fire station should be stored in program 309 Emergency Dial Number Set so that they are exempt from call barring If a stored Host PBX access code in program 403 Host PBX Access Codes or a stored carrier code in program 300 Carrier Excepted Code Assignment is found in the dialled number the subseguent telephone numbers will be checked for call barring The interdigit timer assigned in program 208 Interdigit Time applies until the call
313. o Line Preference J 1 I STORE Setting a new line preference feature will cancel the previous setting The user can override the Idle Prime Line Preference temporarily to select a specific line To select it press the desired line access Key INTERCOM or line key before going off hook or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button If there are only 3 lines in the system exchange line numbers 4 through 6 cannot be used i Operations 1 5 suoneuodo oiseg 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Preferred Line Assignment Incoming No Line Preference When an incoming outside call is received the extension user must go off hook and then press the flashing line key Prime Line Preference When incoming exchange line calls are received at the same time you can receive the call on the preferred exchange line first only by going off hook Ringing Line Preference When an incoming outside call is received you can receive the default call ringing at your telephone by going off hook SELECTION PROGRAMMING INPUT AUTO DIAL O No Line Preference L J Gn 71 STORE exchange line no AUTO DIAL Q Prime Line Preference 2 3 Enter the exchange line CT number 1 through 6 AUTO DIAL Q Ringing Line Preference L 2 CL Setting a new line preference feature will cancel the previous setting e In Prime Line Preference mode if incoming exchange line calls are received at the same time except for
314. o continue seuzcr Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Disable J The exchange lines if set to Enable in this program always set the DISA Delayed Answer timer to 6 seconds even if 0 sec or 3 sec is selected in program 504 DISA Delayed Answer Time 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment Assigns your area code up to 5 codes which is required to use the Caller ID feature If the received caller s number has one of the assigned area codes it is recognised as a local call If the area code is different it is recognised as a long distance call By assigning your area code the system records the caller s number modified in programs 902 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls or see Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls te yg Y IE ENE dyn TY NEXT or PREV lt eee To continue BA ien roe swp 1 5 6 digits max 0 9 To continue a d To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one a Default Not stored 1 8 Installation 902 1 3 System Programming 902 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls Assigns the removed digits and added number for a received local call number which has one of area codes programmed in 901 Caller ID Area Code Assignment This program makes the final number which will be recorded in memory The extension user can call back th
315. o continue AA nes sor Stone De Enable Disable To continue us Extension port number 01 through 24 All extension ports Default All extension ports Disable IEN e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND System Programming 4 73 610 611 4 2 System Programming 610 Parallelled Telephone Connection Enables or disables a single line telephone SLT to be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone FY Y A Y En a aera Paba aa To continue DE nem lseuecr stone 01 16 X Enable Disable To continue Bus Extension port number 01 through 16 X All extension ports Default All extension ports Disable iF e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Parallelled Telephone Connection 611 TAM Telephone Answering Machine Extension Assigns the port number of an extension connected to a telephone answering machine TAM to activate the Call Retrieving from TAM feature eaenee n 4 OOO w BG oe ae O1 24 Enable Disable To continue gas Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports Default All extension ports Disable not connected lr Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Pickup 4 74 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 612 613 612 Room Monitor Assignment Enables or disables which extension s can be monitored using the Room Monitor feature
316. oc o o to 7 34 Programming Tables Programming Tables 502 503 OGM Mode Selection FAX Connection Selection MODE 1 MODE2 MODE3 MODE4 MODE 5 MODE6 Extension port no 01 24 Disable Default Vv Disable Not assigned Change 504 505 DISA Delayed Answer Time DISA Waiting Time after OGM Selection O sec 3 sec 6 sec 12 sec O sec 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec Default v Vv Change 506 507 DISA 508 DISA Busy Mode Intercept Mode DISA Ringing Time before Intercept Selection Disconnect Call Waiting DISA 2 Intercept Disconnect 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 1120 sec Default v Vv Vv Change 7 7 509 510 DISA Ringing Time after Intercept DISA No Dial Mode DISA 1 DISA 2 Selection 10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec r Intercept Disconnect Intercept Disconnect Default Vv v v Change 513 Cyclic Tone Detection Selection Disable 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times Default Vv Change 514 FAX 515 Intercept Time 517 Tone Detection for Internal DISA DISA AA Wait Time Selection 1 Time 2 Times 3 sec 6 sec 9 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec 5 sec Default y Vv A Change 7 35 Programming Tables 7 Programming Tables 516 DISA Incoming Assignment
317. of Service Assignment Day Night Luneh j 2 jccisiegsiaiviesdcasasecesacacesecetasassedeseess 4 69 604 Extension Name setting wn Fd y y ga 4 70 605 Account Code Entry Mode 0 ec ceeeeeeenceceeeeceeceeceeeeecseeeeesaes 4 71 606 Call Transfer to an Exchange Line 000 ce eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeees 4 72 607 Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 4 72 608 Executive Busy Override 0 0 0 ceeececeesceceeececeeeeeceeeeecsteeeenaes 4 73 609 Do Not Disturb Override cccccccceseseseseeeseresesessssserssereeees 4 73 610 Parallelled Telephone Connection eecceceececseeeeeeeeeeees 4 74 611 TAM Telephone Answering Machine Extension 4 74 612 Room Monitor Assignment ceecceceesceceereeceeeeeceeeeecsteeeesaes 4 75 613 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection 4 75 614 Internal Pulse Detection eeeuuuuiui enir rrr AL FI Hei 4 76 615 LCD Language Assignment cee eeeeeeceeneeceeceeeeteeeesteeeeeees 4 77 700 702 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 4 78 703 705 Door Opener Assignment Day Night Lunch 4 79 706 Doorphone Ringing Tone Pattern Selection 4 80 707 Doorphone Access Tone Selection ceescecesseeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 4 80 708 Doorphone Ringing Time cee eeeeeeeeneeceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeseeeenaes 4 81 709 Door Opener TIm
318. ogram assignment lt Example gt Trunk group which connects with the least expensive carrier for a long distance call Long distance calls start with 0 Carrier code 131 Trunk group which connects with the least expensive carrier for an international call International calls start with 00 Carrier code 1620 Trunk group connected to a mobile telephone No modification of the dialled number is necessary To specify how to modify the dialled number and specify a trunk group for each route Program Address 355 360 361 364 Ary 358 Route 1 07 O digit 131 trunk group number 1 Route 2 00 O digits 1620 trunk group number 1 Route3 079 0 digit trunk group number 2 To specify exchange lines in the trunk groups KX TA624 Exchange Line 2 3 First Carrier Program 419 Automatic Address 404 Trunk Group Designated 350 Exchange Assignment Exchange Line Line No Access trunk group number 1 Enable Enable trunk group number 1 Enable Enable 3 trunk group number 2 Enable Disable Local Call Second Carrier 131 Long Distance Call G 1620 International Call Carrier 3 6 Features Features A Example 5 Long distance call using Route 1 trunk group number 1 lt Dialled number gt lt Modified number gt 9 01633 877 467 m m 131 01633 877 467 Example 6
319. on Placing a Call in System Parking Area Call Park 1 7 Useful Features Data Line Security 1 7 Useful Features External Feature Access See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Waiting 1 46 Operations 1 5 During a Conversation Call Splitting Allows you to talk to two different parties alternately If a call is received while you are already on the line you can place the current call on hold and have a conversation with the other party Having a conversation while another call is on exclusive hold Between one extension and one outside line HOLD co INTERCOM or Press HOLD Press line key or INTERCOM Between two outside lines HOLD co a Press HOLD Press line key Between two extensions HOLD Press HOLD CR Press Recall iy e Repeating these operations steps 1 and 2 alternates between the callers e Repeating these operations steps 1 and 2 alternates between the callers e Pressing the HOLD button alternates between the callers The first held call is released e Pressing this button alternates between the callers This feature does not work during a doorphone call or paging PT During a 5 party conference you cannot use this feature IE e 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call on Hold Call Hold 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call on Hold Exclusively Exclusive Hold e See the Instal
320. on Card is reguired to perform the UCD feature The Log In or Log Out status can be set on an extension basis There should be at least one extension that is in Log In status in the UCD group An extension which sets the Call Forwarding All Busy or No Answer or the Do Not Disturb DND feature is skipped during circular calling When all extensions in the UCD group are busy a busy message is heard and then Music on Hold is activated If any extension in the UCD group is not available within the programmed time period then 1 an OGM will be heard and the call is disconnected or 2 the call will be sent to pre programmed extension s in 408 410 System Programming is reguired for this operation Refer to the Flow chart of possible cases and results for UCD calls Connection Reference 2 15 OGM FAX Detection Card Installation Reguired System Programming 111 Hold Music Selection 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch 502 OGM Mode Selection 513 Cyclic Tone Detection 520 UCD Group 521 UCD Busy Waiting Time 522 UCD OGM Message Interval Time 523 UCD Busy Mode 524 UCD Intercept Mode 525 UCD Ringing Time before Intercept 526 UCD Ringing Time after Intercept 600 Extension Group Assignment Related Feature References Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb DND Extension Group Log In Log Out Features 3 67 U 3 Features
321. on port number which has already been assigned as a paired telephone in program 004 Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console is not available in this program rE e Feature Reference Section 3 Features DSS Console i 004 Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console Assigns a port number for an extension paired with the DSS console OO so I 1 2 01 16 To continue NEXT or PREV Default Extension port number paired with DSS console 1 Disable Not stored Extension port number paired with DSS console 2 Disable Not stored J A single line telephone SLT cannot be paired with the DSS console M e To not assign an extension port number press the CLEAR button in the extension port number step e The extension port number which has already been assigned as a DSS console in program 003 DSS Console Port Assignment is not available in this program gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features DSS Console System Programming 4 7 005 006 4 2 System Programming 005 One Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button Selects how an outside call is transferred to any extension using the DSS button With Transfer Press the DSS button to transfer an outside call Without Transfer Press the TRANSFER button then the DSS button to transfer an outside call PIE fe faa go oe With Transfer Without Transfer Default With Transfer This program is effective for 2 kinds of DSS butto
322. one RS Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring System Programming 4 33 306 309 4 2 System Programming 306 Call Barring Exception Codes Assigns up to 80 exception numbers which are allowed to make outside calls on a class of service COS basis even when denied codes are programmed in 302 305 Call Barring Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes AEE Haa aa a aa a a ee aae To continue 3 6 hee rore amp w 01 80 11 rae 0 9 efo continue ee Default All codes Not stored J x press the PAUSE button substitutes any number wild card a Each phone number should consist of 11 digits To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one n gt Feature Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring 309 Emergency Dial Number Set Assigns up to 5 emergency numbers for example a police station or fire station Calls with these numbers are free from restrictions for example call barring Account Code Forced Verify All mode and Electronic Extension Lock To ues HoA ex sore mw 11 digits max Oe To continue fa Default Code 01 999 Code 02 112 Other codes Not stored To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one i n gt Feature References Section 3 Features Emergency Call Call Barring 4 34 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 310 311
323. ons Disabled Options COS Levels 2 3 4 5 Disabled 400 CO Line Connected Assignment Defines connected CO s CO1 6 Connected Options 10 20 pps 404 CO Line Group Assignment Trunk Group assignment of CO s CO 1 Trunk Group 1 through to CO 6 Trunk Group 6 4 14 Outside Line Mode NORMAL Follows programming steps 408 410 NORMAL to Day Night Lunch DIL Assigns one ext to receive I C CO call 416 must be used if Call FWD is required DISAI The caller will hear a Tone or OGM DISA2 The caller will hear two different OGM Call will be rec d via UCD function UCD 4 CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls Enables CPC detection during an outside call Disable If CPC is detected the system disconnects the line disconnection time Program Step 420 423 CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection Incoming CO Line ringing pattern Double 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Without AA System accepts Ext Access No Without AA eee 4 With AA System accepts Ext Access AA No Y DISA Built in Auto Attendant Assigns Auto Attendant numbers 0 9 0 9 Not stored Ree peewee to extension jacks i e O Jack Ol OGM Mode Selection Mode 1 6 DISA or UCD functions can be used Mode 1 FAX Connection Assigns an extension to receive FAX calls All Jacks Disabled DISA Delayed Answer Time Assigns delay in DISA answering a call 3 secs eal Options 0 3 6 12 secs 505 DISA Waiting Time after OGM Selects time the system waits for DTMF 5 secs
324. or CNG tone after OGM played Options 0 5 10 15 secs DISA Busy Mode Sets DISA response to a dialled busy extensions Disconnect ier ld Options Call waiting Disconnect play OGM 2 DISA Intercept Mode Sets DISA response to unanswered calls Intercept Eor ___ g Options Disconnect Intercept FF ed Sets DISA Intercept time for unanswered calls 20 secs Options 10 20 30 40 60 120secs El DISA Ring time After Intercept Sets the ring time at the Intercept destination 20 secs Options 10 20 30 40 60 120secs 510 DISA No Dial Mode Selects action taken by DISA if no response is received DISAI Intercept after OGM e g DTMF or CNG DISA2 Intercept Options Intercept Disconnect 2 Cyclic Tone Detection Sets the number of times Cyclic Tone has to be detected 4 times OGM option KX TA62491 reguired before the system regards the call as complete Options Disable does not detect 2 3 4 times 501 502 503 504 506 507 508 509 13 5of 6 NEW Programming Steps with reference to the KX T30810 61610 Program Title Feature Description Default Fax Tone Detection Sets the number of times the FAX CNG tone has to be KX TA62491 option required detected Options 1 2 Times 5 Intercept Time for Internal DISA Sets intercept time for an internal DISA call 3 secs DISA Incoming Assignment All jacks Enable accept 517 DISA AA Wait Time Sets AA second digit wait time 2 secs If no dig
325. order Tone When a VPS dials an invalid extension number or when a VPS is accidentally connected to another Voice Mail Port 4 DND When an extension a VPS has dialled sets the DND Do Not Disturb feature 5 Answer When an extension which a VPS has dialled answers the call Forwarded to When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS the call can be Voice Processing forwarded to another available VPS In this way the first VPS System typically an Auto Attendant can release the call to another Ringing VPS and receive another incoming call 7 Forwarded to When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS and no VPSs Voice Mail Busy are available to receive the call 8 Forwarded to When a called extension is forwarded to another non VPS Extension extension 9 Confirmation Tone When a VPS has successfully turned a message waiting lamp on or a message waiting lamp off 9 Disconnect When the calling party disconnects 4 16 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 104 105 104 Hold Mode Selection You can select how to hold a line and transfer a call to another extension with a single line telephone SLT Hold 1 Hold 2 or Hold 3 If the following occurs freguently with an SLT select Hold 2 or Hold 3 Nobody answers when a call is received A busy tone is heard even though nobody is using the exchange line If a call is not terminated after going on hook the above cases occur To avoid these problems select Hol
326. orphone Call DSS Console iy The Direct Station Selection DSS Console provides direct access to extensions a busy lamp display as well as 16 PF Programmable Feature buttons The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone PT The port number of the DSS Console and its associated PT are assigned in programs 003 and 004 Up to 2 consoles can be installed per system If a feature like One Touch Dialling is assigned to a DSS button or PF button accessing the feature can be done easily by pressing the corresponding button This is very useful for an operator or manager Refer to the Operating Instructions for more details Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone Indicating the Forward FWD or Do Not Disturb DND status of corresponding extensions using a DSS button indication is programmable in 112 Connection Reference 2 8 Extension Connection Required System Programming 003 DSS Console Port Assignment 004 Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console 112 DSS Console Indication Mode Operating Instructions Reference 1 9 DSS Console Features Features 3 31 E 3 Features Emergency Call Allows an extension user to access a pre assigned emergency number which can be dialled regardless of any restrictions J Up to 5 emergency numbers can be stored k An emergency call is allowed even in the following cases in Account Code Mode
327. p Denying allowing your calls to be picked up Call Pickup Deny See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Group See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Pickup 1 36 Operations 1 4 Receiving Calls Retrieving Calls Answered by a TAM Telephone Answering Machine Allows you to answer an incoming call received by a TAM System Programming is reguired to use this feature Any telephone While the TAM is answering a call V R my te Lift the handset or press Enter the TAM number Busy tone Dial 4 Talk SP PHONE MONITOR When you try to pick up a call and hear a reorder tone the TAM is not answering a call or the dialled extension is not the TAM extension A TAM number is the 3 digit extension number of the TAM i np See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Pickup Denying allowing your calls to be picked up Call Pickup Deny Allows you to prevent another extension from picking up your calls using the Call Pickup feature Setting Cancelling Any Telephone h AI 4 s gt MAY To GR W Ga Lift the handset or press To set Dial 721 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To cancel Dial 720 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of i lp 1 4 Receiving Calls Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup 1 4 Receiving Call
328. pt to insert wires pins etc into the vents or other holes of this unit If there is any trouble disconnect the unit from the telephone line Plug a single line telephone into the telephone line If the telephone operates properly do not reconnect your system to the line until the system has been repaired If the telephone does not operate properly chances are that the problem is in the telephone network and not in your system Do not use benzine thinner or the like or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet Wipe it with a soft cloth WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET OUTLET IS LOCATED INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE TO PREVENT THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Precautions For your future reference SERIAL NO DAT
329. r For a PT user even if your extension is not assigned as the operator or manager you can use your display to check the current mode Confirming the current mode with a display PT only When the telephone is idle a The display shows the current mode for 3 seconds The Day Night Lunch mode is automatically switched at a predetermined time default 9 00 a m for every day 5 30 p m for every night if the automatic mode is selected i IL 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Time Day Night Lunch Service Setting See the Installation Manual Section 3 Time Day Night Lunch Service 1 74 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Joining or Leaving a Call Distribution Group Log In Log Out Allows you to assign the Log In mode or Log Out mode within a hunting DISA ring or UCD group When in Log Out mode you can leave the group temporarily preventing group calls from ringing at your extension The lighting patterns of the Log In Log Out button on a proprietary telephone and status are as follows Off Log In mode Red Log Out mode UCD Group Hunting Group Log In Log Out Using the Log In Log Out button DISA Ring Group LEN ola Lift the handset or press Press the flexible button Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR assigned as the and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Log In Log Out button The indicator light turns off in Log In mode or turns steady red in Log Out
330. r IRNA np Reguired System Programming 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 507 DISA Intercept Mode l 508 DISA Ringing Time before Intercept 509 DISA Ringing Time after Intercept 510 DISA No Dial Mode sg 523 UCD Busy Mode EA N 524 UCD Intercept Mode Bx VA 525 UCD Ringing Time before Intercept E 526 UCD Ringing Time after Intercept Related Feature References Direct Inward System Access DISA Uniform Call Distribution UCD Intercom Calling Allows an extension user to make a call to another extension J An extension number and a name can be assigned in programs 009 and 604 If assigned they will be shown on the display proprietary telephone during an intercom call The DSS buttons permit a proprietary telephone user one touch access to an extension The DSS function can be assigned to a flexible line key in the Proprietary Telephone Settings The DSS buttons on the DSS console can also be used An extension user can press the DSS buttons directly to make an intercom call without going off hook This can be enabled by program 126 e Required System Programming 009 Extension Number Assignment 126 DSS Off Hook Mode 604 Extension Name Setting Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone DSS Direct Station Selection Button 1 3 Making Calls Intercom Calling 1 9 DSS Console Features
331. r Dialled Last Number Redial 1 3 Making Calls Redialling the Saved Number Saved Number Redial Ringing Pattern Selection A ringing pattern can be selected depending on the type of call such as an outside call intercom call and doorphone call Available ringing patterns are as follows sme S Liou LL T L Double UL WL STUL Triple ULL Doorphone only Private calls can be distinguished from business calls by assigning different ringing per exchange line Moreover by assigning different ringing intercom calls and doorphone calls can be distinguished from other calls Therefore careful attention should be applied to all ringing assignments np Reguired System Programming 115 Extension Ringing Pattern Selection 423 Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection 706 Doorphone Ringing Tone Pattern Selection Related Feature Reference Exchange Line Ringing Selection 3 60 Features 3 Features R i Allows a proprietary telephone or single line telephone with a MUTE button to monitor a room or the front door through another proprietary telephone or doorphone without them knowing The access tone will not be sent to the monitored proprietary telephone when monitoring starts The extensions that can be monitored must be programmed in 612 before operation is possible If a doorphone is used as a room monitor the access tone will be heard when monitoring starts as the default setting
332. r a number from the caller during the time assigned in program 505 When the system detects a FAX CNG tone during the programmed time the call is sent to the FAX extension When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal during the programmed time the call is disconnected After the DISA Wait Timer After OGM or the Intercept Timer for Internal DISA expires the system regards that nothing was dialled The system treats the call according to program 510 as follows Disconnect the call is disconnected Intercept the call is sent to the extensions programmed in 408 410 If all extensions are assigned to Disable the call will be disconnected The DISA Ring Timer After Intercept starts The destination telephone s will ring for the time programmed in 509 If the call is not answered during the programmed time the call will be disconnected The FAX extension assigned in program 503 receives the call When the extension is busy the system sends a busy tone to the sending FAX If the call is not answered after 40 seconds the call will be disconnected Program 514 sets how many times the FAX CNG tone must be detected before the system recognises the incoming signal as facsimile data Features 3 27 D 3 Features Display Contrast Adjustment KX T7130 only Allows a display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast with the CONTRAST selector mr Operating Instructions Refe
333. r monitoring Monitoring using a PT At the monitored telephone pa _ Ss Z2 Gen J es Lift the handset or press Dial 7351 Confirmation tone Hang up or press Press SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR AUTO ANSWER MUTE The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator is flashing moderately Monitoring PT and SLT SP PHONE AUTO ANSWER For a PT A _ MUTE Room monitoring extension no Q MUTE Ensi starts amp CJ For a PT Press SP PHONE and AUTO ANSWER MUTE Enter the monitored extension For an SLT Lift the handset and press the MUTE button number 100 through 199 Paging a monitored room Cancelling a monitor temporarily At the monitored telephone AUTO ANSWER Q E C___ tho ee AUTOANSWER The AUTO ANSWER MUTE ane MUTE indicator turns Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE Talk Press off or lift the handset AUTO ANSWER MUTE Cancelling amp 2800H bc Lift the handset or press Dial 73507 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR 1 76 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Monitoring through a doorphone PT and SLT SP PHONE AUTO ANSWER For a PT a MUTE GIU Monitoring starts cC MUTE gt gt For an SLT For a PT Press SP PHONE and AUTO ANSWER MUTE Dial 31 Enter the monitored For an SLT Lift the handset and press the MUTE button doorphone number 1 through 4 The doorphone access tone can be eliminated by System Programming PT System Pro
334. r the time programmed in 508 DISA Ringing Time before Intercept expires If the call is not answered within the programmed time the call will be disconnected a0 Ce face son om 10 20 30 40 60 120 sec Default 20 seconds I Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing 4 62 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 510 513 510 DISA No Dial Mode I Selects the operation when the system does not receive either DTMF signals or a FAX CNG tone after a programmed length of time If the optional card is installed then use program 505 DISA Waiting Time after OGM If the optional card is not installed then use program 515 Intercept Time for Internal DISA Intercept or Disconnect is available Intercept The call is directed depending on programs 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Intercept Routing No Answer feature The destination telephone s will ring for the time programmed in 509 DISA Ringing Time after Intercept Disconnect The call is disconnected D00 ses fe om me DISAI _ Intercept DISA2 _ Disconnect lt To continue fer Default DISA 1 and DISA 2 Intercept e Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA Intercept Routing 513 Cyclic Tone Detection Assigns the number of times a cyclic tone is detected while the DISA outgoing mess
335. rator Manager Service Features Remote Extension Lock 2 8 Operations 23 Display Example Due to the Trilingual Selection Feature you can select the display in English Spanish or Portuguese by System Programming The left part is the English display and the right part is the Spanish display ENGLISH DISPLAY SPANISH DISPLAY DESCRIPTION CID Log Clear RID Despejado Cleared all logs Incoming Log Off Registro ID Off Cancelled Incoming Call Log Incoming Log On Registro ID On Incoming Call Log is set Locked xxxx Bloqueado Completed setting Electronic Extension Lockout New 02 Old 03 Nue 02 Ant 03 Confirming the number of logged calls Unlocked Desbloqueada Cancelled Electronic Extension Lockout Operations 2 9 Panasonic Business Systems U K Panasonic House Willoughby Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 8FP Printed in the United Kingdom PSQX1744YA KK1099CM1109SM Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System Operating Instructions MODEL NO KX TA624 Panasonic Please read this manual before connecting the Advanced Hybrid System Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Telephone System Model No System Components Description Service Unit KX TA624 Advanced Hybrid System Telephone KX T7020 KX T7130 KX T7050 Proprietary T
336. rcom call and hear a busy tone 2 Wait for an answer and talk l To answer from the calling extension see Call Waiting in this manual a If you hear a reorder tone when you set this feature the called party has not permitted call waiting to be used This feature is only available if the called extension has set the Call Waiting feature IE 1 5 During a Conversation Call Waiting See the Installation Manual Section 3 Busy Extension Signalling Operations 1 29 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Making Your Telephone Ring Back Automatically When a Line Becomes Free Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Allows you to receive callback ringing when the dialled line becomes idle When you answer the callback ringing For an extension The called extension starts ringing without dialling For an exchange line The line is seized Setting Any Telephone If you hear a busy tone 5 Wait for o G the Camp On recall Confirmation tone Hang up or press and reorder tone SP PHONE MONITOR Answering an intercom recall Any Telephone If you hear the telephone ringing Q You hear a ringback tone and the called Q extension rings automatically Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR Answering an exchange line recall Any Telephone If you hear the telephone ringing R Lift the handset or press Dial tone Enter the phone number SP PHONE MONITOR Cancelling
337. rding Start Time 607 Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line Related Feature Reference Limited Call Duration Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone FWD DND Forward Do Not Disturb Button 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Forwarding a Call Call Forwarding Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection The Calling Party Control CPC signal is a disconnect signal sent from the Local Exchange for an outside call The CPC signal detection is activated by programs 420 and 421 Program 420 is for incoming outside calls and 421 is for outgoing outside calls I Reguired System Programming 420 Calling Party Control CPC Signal 421 CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls Features 3 15 C 3 Features Call Park Allows an extension user to place a held call into a system parking area Any extension user can retrieve the parked call to perform other operations Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time If a parked call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program 200 a ring tone or an alarm tone will be heard If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes it will be automatically disconnected e This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call with a proprietary telephone or more than one intercom call or outside call with a single line telephone During a 5 party conf
338. re 1 Complete all the reguired extension wiring Confirm that dialling can be done from all the extensions using a touch tone telephone If dialling fails the polarity between the extension and the system must be reversed Reverse as shown Unplug the system Connect all exchange lines Confirm that dialling can be done on the following extension using a touch tone telephone Extension A B of port 01 Exchange line 1 If dialling fails the polarity between the system and the exchange line must be reversed Reverse as shown Every time an extension telephone is replaced repeat the procedure above Installation 2 15 2 13 Printer and PC Connection A user supplied printer or personal computer PC can be connected to the system These are used to print out or refer to the SMDR call records and system programming data Connect the printer cable or the PC cable to the Serial Interface RS 232C connector The cable must be shielded and the maximum length is 2 m Serial Interface RS 232C D SUB 9 pin _ MT Printer Computer Arrange the cables so that the printer will be connected to the system as shown in the appropriate chart on the following page The pin configuration of the Serial Interface RS 232C Connector is as follows Pin Signal Name Circuit Type No EIA CCITT 2 RXD Received Data BB 104 3 TXD Transmitted Data BA 103 4 DTR Data Termina
339. re Reference Section 3 Features Call Barring System Programming 4 69 604 4 2 System Programming 604 Extension Name Setting Assigns a name to each extension which will be displayed when making or receiving an intercom call Y AH nn Y YH yi NEXT or PREV m Oemma Cf EE errereen 4 To continue Hoa sex rose eno 01 24 10 characters To continue ure Extension name Combination Table Pressing SELECT Times fo B Ju ee fale hal lt u w i lt a g gt lo XKICIAIZIAL Dim wI NI wo zZ lx fe jn Blm mlelic n a _ _ ohhel eol aioein us gt o t OoO 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 x lt Example gt To enter Mike 1 Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter M 2 Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter i 3 Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter K 4 Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter e Default All extension ports Not stored e To erase all letters press the CLEAR button To erase 1 letter press Each name has a maximum of 10 characters i IL e Feature References Section 3 Features Intercom Calling 4 70 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 605 605 Account Code Entry Mode Selects the account code input mode Option Forced Verify All or Verify Toll
340. rea of current system programmed data is printed out The areas are as follows All Para System Para CO Para Ext Para DSS Para Speed Dial Stop Output Prints out all data Prints out all data except for the following 4 parameters Prints out programs 400 through 403 and 405 through 424 If the extension is a proprietary telephone programs 102 516 600 through 613 and 615 will be printed out The assigned data on the PF Programmable Feature buttons and line keys will also be printed out If the extension is a single line telephone programs 102 516 and 600 through 614 will be printed out The assigned Personal Speed Dialling numbers are also printed out Prints out the assigned data in the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS console Prints out the System Speed Dialling numbers and names assigned in programs 001 and 011 Stops printing lt To select All parameters System parameter Speed dial and or Stop output gt 5 0 4 ne All System CO Ext DSS Para Speed Dial Stop Output To continue 4 84 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 804 805 lt To select the CO exchange line parameter gt EIJE er sm sw IEG now oe All System CO Ext 1 6 DSS Para Speed Dial To continue Stop Output lt To select the Extension parameter gt Oa aes se Son All System CO Ext 01 24 X DSS Para Speed Dial To continue S
341. red You can enter account codes in the following 4 modes Verify All mode You must always enter a pre set account code Verify Toll Call Barring mode You can enter a pre set account code so that you can override call barring Option mode An account code can be entered when a record of the account code is reguired It can be any number Forced mode You must always enter an account code It can be any number Making calls with account codes except in the Option mode PT and SLT FWD DND PAUSE or For a PT a line access code 4 2 or For an SLT Lift the handset or press Press line key or enter a line For a PT Press FWD DND or PAUSE SP PHONE MONITOR access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 For an SLT Dial 49 or XX hy h D ps ey i W phone no Dial tone 3 Enter an account Dial tone Enter the phone number code 4 digits Making calls with account codes in the Option mode and receiving calls During a conversation or while hearing a reorder tone after the other party hangs up within 30 seconds FWD DND _ account code Press FWD DND Enter an account code 4 digits You can keep talking Operations 1 67 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 in PT Useful Features In the Verify All mode you must always enter a pre set account code when making an outside call In the Verify Toll Call Barring mode you can enter a pre set account code only
342. rence 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Display Contrast Adjustment Distinctive Dial Tones An extension user will hear 3 types of dial tone patterns which give information about the features activated on the telephone Dial Tone 1 This is a normal dial tone None of the features listed in Dial Tone 2 are activated ls ea Dial Tone 2 Sent when any of the following features are set Absent Message Capability Background Music BGM for proprietary telephones only Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Electronic Extension Lockout Message Waiting for proprietary telephones only Pickup Dialling Remote Extension Lock Control for single line telephones only Timed Reminder 1s _ gt as Dial Tone 3 Sent when making an Account Code Entry and answering a Timed Reminder call Also sent when going off hook with a single line telephone which has a message in a Voice Processing System np Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Distinctive Dial Tones 3 28 Features 3 Features D Do Not Disturb DND lt Do Not Disturb DND gt Allows an extension user to prevent other parties from disturbing them The extension will not receive intercom or outside calls lt Do Not Disturb DND Override gt Allows an extension user enabled in program 609 to call an extension which has set the Do Not Disturb DND feature
343. ride Deny 1 7 Useful Features Conference 3 party 1 7 Useful Features Data Line Security See the Installation Manual Section 3 Executive Busy Override Operations 1 31 suoneuodo oiseg 1 3 Making Calls Executive Busy Override Exchange Line Allows you to connect to an existing outside call or add a third party to your existing conversation System Programming is reguired to use this feature co A three party conference I is now established Lift the handset or press Press the desired line key Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR whose indicator is lit red optional To leave the conference gy The other two parties ra continue their conversation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR To terminate one party and talk to the other h par co INTERCOM we Cd or C Press the line key or INTERCOM Confirmation tone optional to which you wish to remain connected PT This feature does not work when Data Line Security or Executive Busy Override Deny is set at the extension engaged in the existing outside call PT When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call or vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all parties Removing the tone is possible through programming i i e 1 3 Making Calls Denying Interrupting an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Deny 1 7 Useful Features Conference 3 party 1 7 Us
344. ringing at any other extension Any telephone hr 3 8 fn Lift the handset or press Dial 4 Enter the extension number Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR where the call is ringing optional j Doorphone calls can be picked up by extensions that are not programmed to answer F doorphone calls e You hear a confirmation tone when the call is picked up The tone can be disabled If a ringing extension sets the Call Pickup Deny feature you will hear a reorder tone IE 1 4 Receiving Calls Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension Call Pickup Denying allowing your calls to be picked up Call Pickup Deny See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Allows you to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone within your extension group Any telephone h C PR amp 2 amp Go 9 Lift the handset or press Dial 40 Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR optional I l You can pick up an incoming outside intercom or doorphone call but you cannot pickup a Camp On recall or hold recall You will hear a confirmation tone when the call is picked up The tone can be disabled If a ringing extension sets the Call Pickup Deny feature you will hear reorder tone You can pick up a call just by going off hook even though your extension is not ringing It can be done by System Programming L e 1 4 Receiving Calls Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension Call Picku
345. rs STORE for other DSS buttons Press the desired Dial 1 Enter the desired extension Press DSS button number AUTO DIAL STORE Repeat these steps One Touch Dialling Assignment You can assign a DSS or PF button as a One Touch Dialling button The number can be an extension number or a telephone number Up to 24 digits can be stored in each memory location PT and DSS Console DSS Console and Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone Gd 2 AUTO DIAL Repeat these steps PE L to program numbers C_ STORE for other DSS or PF Press the desired DSS button on the DSS Enter the desired Press butions Console and dial 2 on the paired telephone number AUTO DIAL STORE or press the PF button on the DSS Console When you assign an outside phone number you must enter a line access code first One Touch Access Assignment for System Features You can assign a desired feature to a DSS or PF button PT and DSS Console DSS Console and Paired telephone Paired telephone Paired telephone ad L AUTO DIAL Repeat these steps PF to program numbers Co STORE for other DSS or PF Press the desired DSS button on the DSS Enter the desired Press buttons Console and dial 2 on the paired telephone number AUTO DIAL STORE or press the PF button on the DSS Console If you wish to access the Paging All extensions feature enter feature number 330 Operations 1 99 1
346. rvice Changing Mode Default Selection Default Selection With Transfer Vv Manually Vv Without Transfer Automatically 007 Time Day Night Lunch Service Start Time Default Change Every day Every day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Day 9 00 AM Night 5 30 PM Lunch S None Lunch E None 010 LCD Time Display Selection Default Selection 12 HOUR Vv 24 HOUR 008 Operator Assignment Default Port no Operator Jack 01 7 2 Programming Tables Programming Tables SPD no 001 System Speed Dialling Entry 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting Telephone number 32 digits max Name 16 characters max Default All Not stored 00 Ol 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Continued Programming Tables 7 3 7 Programming Tables SPD no 001 System Speed Dialling Entry 011 System Speed Dialling Name Setting Telephone number 32 digits max Name 16 characters max Default All Not stored 40 41 42 43
347. s Picking up a Call Ringing at Another Extension Call Pickup Group Call Pickup See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Pickup Operations 1 37 suoneuodo oiseg 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call on Hold Call Hold Allows you to place a call on hold Placing a call on hold During a conversation During a conversation h hy y J pe 9 Press HOLD Confirmation tone Press Recall Confirmation tone and dial tone and dial tone e You may replace the handset e You may replace the handset The corresponding line key or INTERCOM light flashes green slowly Retrieving a call on hold At the holding extension At the holding extension co INTERCOM qd or I Press the line key or INTERCOM Press Recall which is flashing green slowly e If the handset is replaced just The line key or INTERCOM indicator light go off hook to retrieve the call turns steady green To retrieve a call on hold at another extension refer to Retrieving a Call on Hold Call Hold Retrieve If a held call is not retrieved within a pre determined time default 30 seconds ringing or an alarm tone will be heard Hold Recall Hold Alarm If the hold recall time is set to Disable the call will not recall If a held outside call is not answered within 30 minutes it will be automatically disconnected When going off hook Before recalling A dial tone will be heard while t
348. s SP PHONE MONITOR 0000 through 9999 twice and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of i Unlocking Any Telephone y Lift the handset or press Dial 77 Enter the same lock code Dial Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR you used to lock the and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR extension e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of if J If another user tries to access an exchange line and attempts to dial from a locked extension a the user will hear a reorder tone and for PT users Restricted is shown on the display However calls can be made at a locked extension depending on system programming System programming determines which COS number applies to calls at the locked extension An extension assigned as an operator or manager can cancel this function for all extensions Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL Remote Extension Lock Control overrides this feature If the operator or manager sets Remote Extension Lock on the extension you have already locked you cannot unlock it e The lock code must be 4 numerical digits The F and x digits may not be used You can make intercom calls and receive intercom or outside calls at a locked extension You can make outside calls depending on the level of call barring ESF e 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL A
349. s Verify All and Forced modes in any call barring COS number and in Electronic Extension Lockout mr Reguired System Programming 309 Emergency Dial Number Set Related Feature References Account Code Entry Call Barring Extension Lock Operating Instructions Reference 1 3 Making Calls Making Emergency Calls Emergency Call Exchange Line Ringing Selection When an outside call is received at an extension the user can select whether their extension will ring or not J e Select Enable in programs 408 410 np Reguired System Programming 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Operating Instructions Reference 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Exchange Line Ringing Selection 3 32 Features 3 Features E Executive Busy Override lt Executive Busy Override Extension gt Allows an extension user enabled in program 608 to interrupt an existing intercom call A 3 party conference will be established lt Executive Busy Override Exchange Line gt Allows a proprietary telephone user enabled in program 608 to interrupt an existing outside call or add a third party A 3 party conference will be established lt Executive Busy Override Deny gt Allows an extension user to prevent other extension users from interrupting their conversation J The Executive Busy Override feature will not work if the extension en
350. s been placed on hold by another extension Retrieving an outside call on hold PT and SLT At the other extension At the other extension M gt GJL exchange line no os Lift the handset or Dial 53 Enter the held exchange Confirmation Press the line key whose press line number 1 through 6 tone indicator is flashing red slowly SP PHONE MONITOR The line key light turns steady green Retrieving an intercom call on hold PT and SLT At the other extension fn d Lift the handset or press Dial 5 Enter the holding extension Confirmation tone SP PHONE MONITOR number Fo GG seme A Calls held in Call Park or Exclusive Hold cannot be retrieved by this feature You can hear a confirmation tone when the call is retrieved by entering the feature number I I 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call on Hold Call Hold See the Installation Manual Section 3 Hold 1 40 Operations 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call in System Parking Area Call Park Allows you to place a held call into a system parking area so that you can perform other tasks The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user Up to 10 calls can be parked PT and SLT During a conversation HOLD For a PT Uj fe 3 L6 parking zone no CR For an SLT y For a PT Press HOLD Confirmation tone Dial 36 Enter a parking zone number Confirmation tone For a
351. s connected to the system set M the A A1 relay switch on the telephone or answering machine to the OFF position Extension ports are at TNV 2 10 Installation 2 8 Extension Connection Connection Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 2 or 4 conductor wiring into the ports JACK 01 through 08 on the system View of TEL Port Extension To extensions JACK 01 08 J System extensions must be located within the same building as the KX TA624 Installation 2 11 External Pager Paging Equipment Connection One external pager user supplied can be connected to the system as illustrated below Use an EIAJ RC 6701 A plug 2 conductor 3 5 mm in diameter Output impedance 600 Maximum length of the cable 0 8 mm 1 3 mm Under 10 m Oo PAGING Amplifier Paging Equipment To adjust the sound level of the pager use the volume control on the amplifier Paging port is at SELV RP Required System Programming Section 4 2 System Programming 106 External Paging Access Tone Feature Reference Section 3 Features Paging Installation 2 10 re External Music Connection One music source such as a radio user supplied can be connected to the system as illustrated below Insert the plug to the earphone headphone port on the external music source Use an EIAJ RC 6701 A plug 2 conductor 9 3 5 mm i
352. s other extension users from retrieving your held call Only the user who held the call can retrieve it Placing a call on exclusive hold During a conversation HOLD HOLD The line key or INTERCOM light flashes green moderately Press HOLD Press HOLD again The current call is placed on exclusive hold The line key or INTERCOM light flashes green slowly The current call is placed on hold Retrieving a call on exclusive hold INTERCOM e The line key or INTERCOM light turns steady green The held call is released co ad or I Press the line key or INTERCOM which is on exclusive hold Operations 1 39 suoneuodo oiseg 1 5 During a Conversation PT _ During a 5 party conference you cannot use this feature PT If a held call is not retrieved within a pre determined time default 30 seconds ringing will be heard Hold Recall PT If an outside call is placed on hold and not retrieved within 30 minutes it will be automatically disconnected PT With outside calls you can put multiple calls on exclusive hold However with intercom calls you can put only one call on exclusive hold i ll e 1 5 During a Conversation Placing a Call on Hold Call Hold 1 7 Useful Features Conference 5 party e See the Installation Manual Section 3 Hold Retrieving a Call on Hold Call Hold Retrieve Allows you to retrieve a call that ha
353. seconds 519 DISA OGM Mute Time 0 second 520 UCD Group Group 1 521 UCD Busy Waiting Time 10 minutes 522 UCD OGM Message Interval Time 1 minute 523 UCD Busy Mode Intercept 524 UCD Intercept Mode Intercept 525 UCD Ringing Time before Intercept 20 seconds 526 UCD Ringing Time after Intercept 20 seconds 600 Extension Group Assignment All extension ports EXT GRP 1 601 603 Call Barring Class of Service Assignment Day Night Lunch All extension ports COS 1 Day Night Lunch Appendix 5 5 5 1 Default Values Address Program Default 604 Extension Name Setting All extension ports Not stored 605 Account Code Entry Mode All extension ports Option 606 Call Transfer to an Exchange Line All extension ports Disable 607 Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line All extension ports Disable 608 Executive Busy Override All extension ports Disable 609 Do Not Disturb Override All extension ports Disable 610 Parallelled Telephone Connection All extension ports Disable 611 TAM Telephone Answering Machine Extension All extension ports Disable 612 Room Monitor Assignment All extension ports Disable 613 Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection All extension ports Disable 614 Internal Pulse Detection All extension ports Enable 615
354. seconds Exchange line no T T T T T T T T T 1 5 25 35 45 80 100 160 300 600 900 1200 Default All V i WR AIL EU TIR DPI eee TUEDD SF 2 a Tn EE ee 3 i i i i i i i i 4 5 6 x 419 Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access 420 Calling Party Control CPC Signal 421 CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls Exchange neo Selection Selection 00 Disable Selection Enable Disable 00 22 msec 75 614 msec Enable Disable Default All J 00 Disable 1 2 3 i i 4 5 6 Programming Tables 7 33 7 Programming Tables 422 423 Exchange Line 424 Reverse Polarity Disconnect Time Ringing Pattern Selection Circuit Assignment Selection seconds Selection Selection Exchange line no T T T T gt T 0 5 2 0 4 0 Single Double Triple Enable Disable Default All 1 Sf 4 1 Sf 1 i 2 i i i i 3 i i i i i 4 5 7 6 x 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection Selection Without AA With AA Default A Change 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant Auto attendant no Jack Extension port no 01 24 Selection GRP Extension group no 1 8 Default All Not stored 0 coo au
355. sent by the caller If nothing is entered by the caller during this time the system will regard it as Nothing is dialled The time is assigned in program 515 The system can accept the following numbers 200 through 299 as an extension number 0 or 9 as the operator call number when the operator is assigned in program 008 Operator Assignment and Without AA is assigned in program 500 Even if With AA is assigned O or 9 is regarded as the operator call number if nothing is assigned to 0 or 9 in program 501 0 through 9 as a built in auto attendant number when With AA is assigned in program 500 The DISA AA Wait timer starts after receiving the first 1 digit number If the timer expires the system will assume that the first digit is an AA number The time is assigned in program 517 The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts The destination telephone s will ring for the time programmed in 508 The system treats the call according to program 507 as follows Disconnect the call is disconnected Intercept the call is sent to the extensions programmed in 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch If the call is still not answered within the time programmed in 509 it will be disconnected If the destination extension belongs to a hunting group and all extensions in the group are busy the system will check the DISA Busy Mode If the destinatio
356. setting B Dial 92 dial tone You may press the flexible button assigned Single line telephone users can dial as the FWD DND button instead 0 instead of iF Cancelling PT and SLT Co For a PT i For an SLT Lift the handset or press For a PT Press FWD DND Dial 90 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial 71 and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of F You may press the flexible button assigned as the FWD DND button instead Operations 1 85 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Listening to a stored message You can listen to the messages stored in your mailbox easily There are two operations to play back messages Using the Message Waiting MESSAGE button ay MESSAGE 7 o C You can listen to the stored message by following the Voice Mail prompts Lift the handset or press Press MESSAGE SP PHONE MONITOR By manual dialling Any Telephone y y Y Voice Mail extension no Lift the handset or press Enter the Voice Mail extension number SP PHONE MONITOR e When you use an SLT you will hear You can listen to the stored message by dial tone 3 if there are messages following the Voice Mail prompts To forward your calls to your mailbox by the Call Forwarding feature you have to set Call Forwarding All Calls or Call Forwarding Busy or No Answer
357. sfer to Extension Operations 1 43 suoneuodo oiseg 1 5 During a Conversation Transferring a Call to an Exchange Line Call Transfer to Exchange Line Allows you to transfer a received intercom call to an external party System Programming is reguired to execute this feature During a conversation co qa phone no TRANSFER Press TRANSFER Confirmation tone Press a line key or Enter the phone Wait for Announce Hang up or and dial tone enter a line access code number where the an answer press 9 0 or 81 through 86 call will be transferred SP PHONE The current call is placed on hold The call is transferred J PT If you want to return to the held call press the TRANSFER button or INTERCOM button N before the destination party answers PT If you want to join the conversation after transferring the call press the corresponding line key A conference call is established PT To change the party where the call is transferred before hanging up press the line key whose indicator is flashing slowly to retrieve the call then repeat the Call Transfer procedure See the Installation Manual Section 3 Call Transfer to Exchange Line a 1 44 Operations 1 5 During a Conversation Call Waiting During a conversation a Call Waiting tone informs you that there is a call waiting You can answer the second call by disco
358. sign auto M attendant number s which correspond to the operator number 0 or 9 IEN e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 58 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 502 502 OGM Mode Selection Selects how the 2 outgoing messages OGM1 and OGM2 are used MODE1 through MODE6 Mode OGM1 OGM2 Description 1 DISA1 DISA1 The system can receive 2 incoming calls via the DISA feature at the same time This is useful when receiving many calls 2 DISA1 DISA2 An example DISA1 is used in the day mode and DISA2 is used in the night mode 3 UCD UCD The system can hold up to 2 incoming calls via the UCD feature at the same time until any extension is available 4 UCD UCD The system disconnects an incoming call via the UCD feature END when the assigned waiting time in 521 UCD Busy Waiting Time expires 5 UCD DISA1 An example UCD is used in the day mode and DISA1 is used in the night mode 6 UCD DISA The system leads an incoming call via the UCD feature to the DISA feature by OGM2 when the assigned waiting time in 521 UCD Busy Waiting Time expires and Intercept is selected in 523 UCD Busy Mode 5 Jo 2 wer bee erore ew MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 Default MODEI1 l e Programs 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch are used to assign a DISA1 DISA or UCD to each
359. sion is logged into the hunt group Group Log Out Salida de Grupo You are logged out of the hunt group In a Meeting Estoy en Reunion Absent Message 6 Locked 1234 Bloqueada 1234 Electronic Extension Lockout is set Lunch Mode Modo Almuerzo Lunch mode status Time Day Night Lunch Service Message Cancel Mensaje Desact Absent Message cancelled Appendix 2 9 2 4 Display Example ENGLISH Display SPANISH Display DESCRIPTION MW at Ext 201 ME en Ext 201 Message Waiting has been left at extension 201 MW Not Accepted ME No Aceptado The Message Waiting setting was not accepted MW Cancelled ME Cancelado Message Waiting cancelled Night Mode Modo Nocturno Night mode status Time Day Night Lunch Service No Held Call No Retenidas There is no held call when attempting to retrieve a call on hold or parked call No Incoming Call No Entrante There is no incoming call when trying to pick up a call No Page No Hay Voceo When trying to answer a page there is no call or someone has already answered the page Not Valid No Valido Operation not permitted Out Until 12 12 Fuera has 12 12 Absent Message 5 Paging Al Voceo a Todos Paging All extensions amp External accessed Paging All Ext Voceo Tod
360. substitutes any number wild card n To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one rE e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 37 355 359 4 2 System Programming 355 358 Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are not applied to the ARS feature for each route eee Next NEXT or PREV si FE E lee To continue EE ner EE AED 5 8 01 80 7 digits max 0 9 X 8f lt To continue mw X Program address selection number 5 355 for Route 1 6 356 for Route 2 7 357 for Route 3 8 358 for Route 4 Default All codes Not stored d e x press the PAUSE button substitutes any number wild card z To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one rE e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 359 Ist Carrier Selection Code BT Line Access Code Assigns the first carrier access code When the code is dialled the first carrier is always selected even if the ARS feature is enabled AOS be a 4 digits max 0 9 Default 121 British Telecom Line access code I To correct a wrong entry press the CLEAR button and enter the new one IF Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 38 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 360 361 360 A
361. t Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Disable Feature Reference Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 422 Disconnect Time ce Determines the amount of time to send the disconnect signal from the system to the Local Exchange or host PBX The time you select must be longer than the requirement of your Local Exchange or host PBX ea enee n 2222 22 22 84 ie oag Dmm Ea ea e5 1 6 0 5 2 0 4 0 sec To continue Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines 2 0 seconds e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Recall 4 54 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 423 423 Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection Selects the incoming outside call ringing pattern Single Double or Triple for each exchange line This is useful for distinguishing private calls from business calls et Sy Single i i 1 i 1 1 Double Triple EEE E 23 222 een eee eee i NEXT or PREV lt SE era To continue DAE ser SEMEN sur 1 6 X Single Double l Triple To continue aaj Exchange line number 1 through 6 x All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Double When selecting the ring pattern illustrated above we recommend that other ring patterns of n the syst
362. t Allows you to lock your extension so that the Call Log Incoming feature is not shown on the display when you press the Caller ID Indication button if you do not want others to see the information This feature also prevents others from making outside calls from your extension Locking F same code 3 hy pai y lock code lock code P cls Lift the handset or press Dial 77 Enter the 4 digit lock code Dial Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR 0000 through 9999 twice and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Locked xxxx Lock Code Unlocking gt Lift the handset or press Dial 77 Enter the same lock code Dial Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR you used to lock the extension and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR lt PT Display Example gt Unlocked PT The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL PT Remote Extension Lock overrides this feature If the operator or manager sets Remote Extension Lock on the extension you have already locked you cannot unlock it E mp Operating Instructions Section 1 Operations 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Locking Your Telephone Electronic Extension Lockout e 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL 1 8 Ope
363. t All routes X All trunk TRK groups Programs 351 354 Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes Leading Digits should be considered when assigning this program e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 4 381 384 4 2 System Programming 381 384 Routes I through 4 Authorisation Codes Registers an authorisation code applied to the exchange line s aa mu a a cigar a fe TS a a continue 3 8 x next NEXT code STORE eno 1 4 1 6 19 digits max 0 9 To continue UE X Program address selection number 1 351 for Route 1 2 352 for Route 2 3 353 for Route 3 4 354 for Route 4 Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Default All exchange lines Not stored The registered codes are not shown on the display of a proprietary telephone and printout by program 804 System Data Damp after programming Already Set will be shown instead of the registered codes I 4 42 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 385 389 385 388 Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill Enables or disables to add an extension number assigned in program 389 Itemised Bill Code Assignment after the authorisation code for an exchange line s This is useful for billing purposes y next NEXT or PREV lt pee yN OE To continue 3 x sen seiscr stone
364. t stored At Ext 201 En la Ext 201 Absent Message 3 Appendix 2 7 2 4 Display Example ENGLISH DISPLAY SPANISH DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Back at 11 00AM Regreso 11 00AM Absent Message 4 BGM off Musica Desact Back Ground Music has been turned off BGM on Musica Ambiental Back Ground Music has been turned on Busy Ocupado The doorphone or external pager called is in use Busy Ovrde Allow Intrmision Permt Executive Busy Override Deny has been turned off Busy Ovrde Deny Intrmision NEG Executive Busy Override Deny has been turned on C Pickup Allow Permite Recoger Call Pickup Deny has been turned off C Pickup Deny Recoger Negado Call Pickup Deny has been turned on Call on CO 1 Sonando LN 1 An exchange line is ringing at your extension Call Prked at 1 Estacionada 1 A call has been parked Callback All COs ilamar Todas LN Callback when free has been set for the first available exchange line Callback CO 1 Callback when free has been set for line 1 Callback CO G1 LN Gl Callback when free has been set for trunk group 1 Callback Ext 201 lamar a Ext 201 Callback when free has been set for extension 201 An idle exchange line is selected CO 1 O01 15 LN 1 04015 The duration of an incoming call CO 1 amp CO
365. t202 Conference with two extensions Enter ACCNT Code Entrar Codigo Pressing the FWD DND or PAUSE button Account Code Entry Ext Data Clear Borrar Data Ext Extension Feature Clear completed External Page Voceo Externo Paging External accessed FWD ALL All COs DSV Todas a LN Call Forwarding to Exchange Line set Confirming the key programming on the FWD DND button FWD All CO G1 DSV Todas GLN 1 Call Forwarding to Exchange Line to trunk group set Confirming the key programming on the FWD DND button FWD ALL Ext201 DSV Todas Ext201 Call Forwarding All Calls set Confirming the key programming on the FWD DND button FWD B NA Ext201 DSV O NC Ext201 Call Forwarding Busy or No Answer set Confirming the key programming on the FWD DND button FWD From Ext201 DSV desde Ext201 Call Forwarding Follow Me set FWD DND Cancel Cancela DSV No M Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb DND cancelled FWD V M Off DSV V M Off Call Forwarding to Voice Mail cancelled FWD V M On DSV V M Act Call Forwarding to Voice Mail setting A set FWD V M 6 On DSV V M 6 On Call Forwarding to Voice Mail setting B set Gone Home Se Fue a Casa Absent Message 2 Group Log In Entrada de Grupo Your exten
366. tension The message is cleared after the line connects you to the selected message sender the conversation Clearing all messages by the message receiver y HOO G B Lift the handset or press Dial 700 Dial Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR All messages are cleared PT i PT PT PT I Each extension can have a maximum of 8 simultaneous messages If you try to set the ninth message you will hear reorder tone If the MESSAGE indicator does not go out after returning a message there is another message If multiple message notifications are left at your extension call back is executed in the order received If you select a specific message to call back the other call backs will be executed in the order received starting with the one selected eg 5 gt 6 7 8 gt 1 2 3 4 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone Restoring the MESSAGE Button See the Installation Manual Section 3 Message Waiting 1 66 Operations 1 7 Useful Features Calling with Account Codes Account Code Entry An account code is used to identify outside calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR call record For incoming outside calls account codes are not reguired For outgoing outside calls account codes are often regui
367. tension No DURING A CONVERSATION e Call Hold Call Splitting Press the Recall button Call Hold Retrieve Outside calls 5 3 Exchange Line No Call Hold Retrieve Intercom calls 5 Extension No e Call Transfer to Extension Press the Recall button Extension No e Call Waiting Answering On hook Off hook e Paging All Extensions and Transfer Press the Recall button 3 Paging Answer 4 3 e Conference 3 party Press the Recall button Phone No Press the Recall button e Call Transfer to Extension Press the Recall button Extension No e Call Waiting Answering On hook Off hook e Paging All Extensions and Transfer Press the Recall button Paging Answer 4 3 e Conference 3 party Press the Recall button Phone No Press the Recall button RECEIVING CALLS l RECEIVING CALLS Quick Reference Cards For Single Line Telephones MAKING CALLS e Intercom Calling Extension No e Operator Call 0 or 9 Outside Calls Automatic Line Access 9 or Phone No e Outside Calls Individual Trunk Group Access Trunk Group No 81 86 Phone No e System Speed Dialling X System Speed Di
368. the handset or press Dial Enter the personal speed SP PHONE MONITOR dial number 0 through 9 e You may dial 1 X instead of An account code must be stored by pressing x x and entering the account code after the line access code You can store an extension number telephone number or feature number of up to 24 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 A pause can be stored by pressing the X key However in the account code verify all verify toll call barring and forced modes xX is not regarded as a pause To store the telephone number of an external party a line access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 must be stored as the first digit The number of Personal Speed Dialling numbers corresponds to the number of PF buttons assigned as One Touch Dialling PF buttons are on a proprietary telephone You cannot assign both the One Touch Dialling and Personal Speed Dialling features For example if you assign One Touch Dialling to the PF 1 button and then Personal Speed Dialling 0 the Personal Speed Dialling O feature will overwrite the One Touch assignment A rotary telephone cannot use this feature i SLT nr 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Button on Your Telephone One Touch Dialling Button See the Installation Manual Section 3 Personal Speed Dialling 1 24 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Checking the stored personal speed dialling numbers
369. the phone number Pulse mode Dial X Enter the desired number Tone mode l e You cannot change from Tone to Pulse dialling mode a ESP See the Installation Manual Section 3 Pulse to Tone Conversion Operations 1 81 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Cancelling Features Extension Feature Clear Allows you to reset the following extension features to the default settings a Absent Message Capability k Message Waiting b Automatic Callback Busy Camp On All messages will be erased c Background Music BGM 1 Pickup Dialling d Call Forwarding The stored telephone number will be e Call Pickup Deny erased f Call Waiting m Paging Deny g Data Line Security n Room Monitor h Do Not Disturb DND o Timed Reminder i Executive Busy Override Deny p Voice Mail Integration j Log In Log Out Clearing the current feature settings Any Telephone C 3 ee BAH gida Lift the handset or press Dial 79 Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of i ES See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Feature Clear Alternate Calling Ring Voice Voice Call which is set at the called party s extension can be switched to Tone Call ringing and vice versa This feature must be set beforehand at the called party s extension Refer
370. ther doorphone number X Program address selection number 00 700 for day 01 701 for night 02 702 for lunch Doorphone number 1 through 4 X All doorphones Extension port number 01 through 24 X All extension ports Default All doorphones all extension ports Enable ESP e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Doorphone Call 4 78 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 703 705 703 705 Door Opener Assignment Day Night Lunch Enables or disables accessing to up to 4 door openers in the day night and or lunch modes for each extension Y Y NT PE yT Seles A HF HR Y AAE To continue Go to next or prev are number ER no Disable To continue pra to another port number s To continue Go to another door opener number X Program address selection number 03 703 for day 04 704 for night 05 705 for lunch Door opener number through 4 x All door openers 2 Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports Default All door openers all extension ports Disable L Feature Reference Section 3 Features Door Opener System Programming 4 79 706 707 4 2 System Programming 706 Doorphone Ringing Tone Pattern Selection Selects the doorphone ringing pattern Single Double Triple or S Double ls lt gt Single T LST LST L__ Double U L N U LNU L Triple _ lll _ nnan NNN
371. ther in night mode or they can be used for different exchange lines If an optional OGM FAX Detection Card is not installed the caller will hear a short beep instead of the OGM Internal DISA 3 22 Features I Features D DISA1 or DISA 2 must be assigned to exchange line s as the exchange line mode in programs 414 through 416 After the DISA Delayed Answer Time assigned in program 504 expires and a ringback tone is returned to the caller a DISA call will be answered The caller can dial during the message or after the tone This system can store up to 10 programmable DISA built in auto attendant numbers in program 501 Each number is 1 digit The DISA built in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other numbers extension number etc To avoid confusion the system waits for the second digit for a preprogrammed amount of time in program 517 default 2 seconds If the timer expires the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built in auto attendant number Only one OGM FAX Detection Card can be installed Connection Reference 2 15 OGM FAX Detection Card Installation Reguired System Programming To enable the DISA feature 414 416 Exchange Line Mode Day Night Lunch 420 Calling Party Control CPC Signal 500 DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection 501 DISA Built in Auto Attendant 502 OGM Mode Selection 503 FAX Connection 506 DISA Busy Mode 510 DISA No
372. ting Instructions Page 1 7 3 of 6 NEW Programming Steps with reference to the KX T30810 61610 Step Program Title Feature Description Default 002 System Password Replaces the PBX Programming Switch System Prog Installation Manual Page 4 3 1234 Password 008 Operator Assignment Assigns the System Operator Telephone Jack 01 009 Extension Number Assignment Allows the extension numbering scheme to be changed Jack 01 Ext 201 24 Ext 224 010 LCD Time Display Selection 12 24 hour clock display options 12 HOUR 011 Speed Dial Number Set Used for Speed Dials and Call ID Feature 01 Alternative Feature Number Plan Replaces feature with a code 50 59 Enables Station Hunting for Extension Groups All groups Disabled Station Hunt Type Assigns Hunting Type for Extension Groups All groups Terminate Voice Mail Port Enables Jacks assigned as Voice Mail Ports Jacks 07 08 15 16 to send DTMF signalling to Voice Mail Disabled Voice Mail Port Enables signalling of Call Status information to Disabled DTMF Integration Voice Mail ports busy answered ringing etc Hold Mode Selection Assigns Call Hold Mode for SLT extensions HOLD 1 Example HOLD 1 Recall on hook Conference Tone Confirmation Tone sent at the Start and End Enable send of a Conference Call Recall Mode of a Station Locked Allows locked extensions to send a Recall signal whilst Disabled not allowed Extension talking to an external c
373. ton and then Personal Speed Dialling O the Personal Speed Dialling O feature will overwrite the One Touch assignment I L 1 7 Useful Features Secret Dialling CONF Conference Button n AUTO DIAL a 3 LL STORE Press the programmable button Press STORE L 1 7 Useful Features Conference 3 party 1 7 Useful Features Conference Unattended 1 7 Useful Features Conference 5 party Operations 1 11 suoneuodo oiseg 12 Proprietary Telephone Settings FWD DND Forward Do Not Disturb Button AUTO DIAL g 4 i aaa STORE Press the programmable button Press STORE n gt 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Forwarding a Call Call Forwarding e 1 7 Useful Features Rejecting Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND SAVE Button AUTO DIAL o 5 tie STORE Press the programmable button Press STORE Les 1 3 Making Calls Redialling the Saved Number Saved Number Redial Log In Log Out Button AUTO DIAL U tl STORE Press the programmable button Press STORE ESP 1 7 Useful Features Joining or Leaving a Call Distribution Group Log In Log out See the Installation Manual Section 3 Log In Log Out 1 12 Operations 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Restoring the MESSAGE Button Allows you to restore the message waiting feature to the MESSAGE button AUTO DIAL MESSAGE IL qd L STORE Press MESSAGE Press STO
374. top Output lt To select the DSS parameter gt CG er fax see CEA ro ce All System CO Ext 1 2 X DSS Para Speed Dial To ge Stop Output Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports 3 DSS console number 1 through 2 X Both DSS console numbers d e This program and 999 System Data Clear are not included a LE e Feature Reference Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 805 SMDR Account Code Selection Selects printing out the account code stored in program 310 Account Codes or just the index of the account code on SMDR printout CODE INDEX Default CODE J The printing of the index of the account code only occurs if the extension user entered their account code in the Verify All or Verify Toll Call Barring input mode as programmed in 605 Account Code Entry Mode I Feature References Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 85 806 998 4 2 System Programming 806 SMDR Language Assignment Selects the language English Spanish or Portuguese used for an SMDR printout a00 bar fae giw te English Spanish Portuguese Default English n gt e Feature References Section 3 Features Language Selection Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 998 ROM Version Conf
375. tored one 2 beeps fe will be heard If Plan 2 or Plan 3 is selected the default extension numbers will change automatically as follows Plan 2 extension ports 01 through 24 extension numbers 201 through 224 Plan 3 extension ports 01 through 24 extension numbers 21 through 44 If Plan 2 or Plan 3 is selected some feature numbers will also change Refer to the attached leaflet for details A double entry of the extension number is invalid If the programmed extension number is the same as a previously stored one 2 beeps will be heard when the STORE button is pressed When extension number 203 has already been assigned to port number 03 to assign extension number 203 to the port number 05 change the extension number of port number 03 to another one Then assign extension number 203 to port number 05 If a Voice Processing System VPS is connected to the system select Plan 1 or Plan 2 in this program and Enable in 103 DTMF Integration so that the DTMF integration between VPS and the system can be enabled If a rotary telephone is used at any extension select Plan 1 in this program lly Feature Reference Section 3 Features Intercom Calling 4 10 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 010 010 LCD Time Display Selection Selects how the current time and date will be displayed on a proprietary telephone while idle Either 12 hour or 24 hour military time can
376. transferred without waiting for an answer Screened Call Transfer PT and SLT During a conversation For a PT Gj yn i i CR For an SLT fy a cbs For a PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation Enter the destination Ringback Waitfor Announce Hang up or press For an SLT Press Recall tone and extension number tone an answer SP PHONE dial tone TRANSFER C_ e The other party is placed on hold The call is transferred Unscreened Call Transfer PT and SLT During a conversation D Es ys CR For an SLT Gla For a PT Press TRANSFER Confirmation Enter the destination Ring back Hang up or press For an SLT Press Recall tone and extension number tone SP PHONE dial tone e The other party is placed on hold e Ringing starts at the destination extension 1 42 Operations 1 5 During a Conversation Call Transfer using a DSS button Allows you to perform a Screened or Unscreened Call Transfer by using a DSS button There are 2 operations depending on whether or not One Touch Transfer is set One Touch Transfer allows you to hold an outside call and transfer it to an extension by pressing one key This feature provides automatic hold and transfer without pressing the TRANSFER button System Programming is reguired to use this function With Transfer mode During a conversation a Press the flexible button assigned as the DSS button e The other party is placed o
377. trol features in program 312 Call Barring Extension Lock Boundary Class Certain types of outgoing outside calls are allowed depending on the assigned call barring class i n gt Operating Instructions References 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Locking Your Telephone Electronic Extension Lockout 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Electronic Extension Lockout CANCEL ALL 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Remote Extension Lock 1 9 DSS Console Features Initial Settings Extension Lock Button Assignment Operator Manager only Extension Password System Password The extension password assigned by the manager extension port 01 to each extension can be used for the Walking COS feature The system password is used for entering System Programming and also before assigning the extension password ll Reguired System Programming 002 System Password Related Feature References Walking COS Operating Instructions Reference 1 8 Operator Manager Service Features Extension Password Set Manager only Features 3 37 3 Features External Feature Access i Allows an extension user to access special features e g Call Waiting offered by the Local Exchange or host PBX This is done by placing the current call on hold and sending a recall signal using either the RECALL button or the feature number This feature is effective only during an outside call e When
378. ts the extension ringing pattern when an intercom call received either Single Double or Triple 1 1 S 1 lt gt Single L L S Triple pipip nn nn CWE ser Ea em te Single Double Triple Default Single The length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone SLT is determined in program 124 SLT Ringing Mode Selection The extension ringback pattern is determined at the same time I Rp Feature Reference Section 3 Features Ringing Pattern Selection 116 Conference Pattern Selection Selects the maximum number of external parties which can attend a conference The maximum number of conference parties is 5 3 party C 0 E 3 No external parties can attend a 3 party conference 3 party C 1 E 3 One external party can attend a 3 party conference 3 party C 2 E 3 A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 3 party conference 5 party C 2 E 5 A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 5 party conference LV Ile xec men cwe me 3 party C 0 E 3 3 party C 1 E 3 3 party C 2 E 3 5 party C 2 E 5 Default 5 party C 2 E 5 I e Feature References Section 3 Features Conference 3 Party Conference 5 Party System Programming 4 21 117 119 4 2 System Programming 117 Call Pickup Tone rE Enables or disables the confirmation tone when the Call Pickup feature is activated nc aes ae Enable Disable Default Enable e Feature
379. tton The FWD DND indicator light flashes red assigned as the FWD DND button slowly instead e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of F Operations 1 53 suoneuodo oiseg 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk Busy or No Answer You can forward your calls to another extension when your extension is busy or if you do not answer the call within a pre determined time Setting PT and SLT For a PT 2 extension no J For an SLT Lift the handset For a PT Press FWD DND Dial 2 Enter the destination Dial Confirmation Hang up or press or press For an SLT Dial 71 extension number tone and SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone FWD DND cC gt Won mey press LEE lime ssy The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly NII FAES DDINI Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of instead yp mp 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising Your Telephone Functions Intercom Alert Assignment To Exchange Line You can forward intercom calls to an external party System Programming is reguired to execute this feature Setting PT and SLT FWD DND XH Cc For a PT F 3 3 me access code phone no t 9 J For an SLT Lift the handset For a PT Press Dial 3 Enter the line Enter the Dial Confirmation Hang up or press or press FWD DND access code phone number tone and SP PHONE MONITOR SP PHONE MONITOR
380. tton is off To program set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM After programming return the MEMORY switch to the SET position The extension number is displayed in the order of the port number when you press the NEXT or PREV button To erase an incorrect entry press the CLEAR TRANSFER button and enter a new number n 1 7 Useful Features Calling Using Your Privileges from Another Extension Walking COS See the Installation Manual Section 3 Extension Password System Password See the Installation Manual Section 3 Walking COS a Operations 1 97 suoneuodo ajosuoy ssd sabeuey 10 e19dO 1 9 i DSS Console Features With a Direct Station Selection DSS Console model KX T7040 you can make or transfer calls and access system features with the touch of a button The DSS Console must be connected to a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System and paired with a PT System Programming is reguired to designate the extension ports of the DSS Console With a paired telephone you can carry out the following operations using the DSS Console Direct access to an extension Direct Extension Dialling Ouick access to an external party One Touch Dialling Ouick access to a system feature One Touch Access for System Features Easy transfer to an extension Call Transfer Ouick access to the day mode Time Day Night Lunch Service Operator Manager only Ouick access
381. uctions Reference 1 5 During a Conversation Paging Features 3 53 3 Features Parallelled Telephone Connection Any analogue proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a single line device such as a single line telephone facsimile and data terminal System Programming is required a mp Connection Reference 2 11 Parallelled Telephone Connection Reguired System Programming 610 Parallelled Telephone Connection Related Feature Reference Power Failure Transfer Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Parallel Connection of a Proprietary Telephone and Single Line Telephone Parallelled Telephone Connection Personal Speed Dialling Allows an extension user to store up to 10 speed dialling numbers 0 through 9 with a maximum of 24 digits per number An extension number telephone number or feature number can be stored For example storing extension numbers for each room in a house can be useful 1 Living Room 2 Kitchen etc To make a call dial ff and the number Proprietary telephone users cannot use this feature if One Touch Dialling buttons are assigned to PF buttons If the user assign a personal speed dialling number the number stored in the One Touch Dialling button will be overwritten and vice versa PF Buttons F1 through F10 correspond to the speed dialling numbers as follows Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 0 1 2 3 4 F6 5 F7
382. uring a handsfree conversation The user can hear E the other party s voice during Microphone Mute in Operating Instructions Reference 1 5 During a Conversation Turning off the Microphone Microphone Mute Features 3 45 M O 3 Features Music on Hold Background Music BGM While an external party is on hold music is automatically generated Operations such as Call Hold and Call Transfer activate Music on Hold F e A user supplied external music source such as a radio must be connected to the system when External is selected in program 111 One external music source can be connected to the system The music source is used for Music on Hold and or BGM e When Tone is selected in program 111 the cyclic tone is used only for Music on Hold and the external music source is used for BGM ESP Connection Reference 2 10 External Music Connection Required System Programming 111 Hold Music Selection Related Feature References Hold Call Transfer to Exchange line Call Transfer to Extension Uniform Call Distribution UCD Operating Instructions Reference 1 7 Useful Features Turning on the Background Music BGM One Touch Dialling Allows a proprietary telephone user one touch access to a desired party or system feature This is done by storing an extension number telephone number or a feature number up to 24 digits in a One Touch Dialling button One Touch Dialling
383. urned to the user the extension being used Reguired System Programming 310 Account Codes 605 Account Code Entry Mode 805 SMDR Account Codes Selection Related Feature References Account Code Entry Call Barring Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Walking COS 3 14 Features 3 Features C Call Forwarding Allows an extension user to transfer incoming calls automatically to another extension or to an external destination The following types are available All Calls All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension Busy or No Answer All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension when the extension user does not answer within the programmed time in 202 or when the extension is busy To an Exchange Line Allows an extension user enabled in program 607 to forward all incoming intercom calls to an external party Follow Me Allows an extension user to set the Call Forwarding All Calls feature from another extension Extensions which have already been assigned as a a forwarded destination cannot set the Call MV Forwarding feature PM ss Sr If the Do Not Disturb DND feature has ym FA FA already been set setting the Call Forwarding feature will cancel DND When using the call forward to an exchange line feature the quality of service may be adversely affected by the attenuation across the public telephone network Required System Programming 202 Call Forwa
384. utton If the SELECT button is pressed the display will show the previous entry If the previous setting was None press the SELECT button to enter the starting time If you do not need to change the time service Keep pressing the SELECT button until None is displayed For example if Monday s day mode is set to None the day mode will not be turned on Monday Default Everyday Day 9 00 AM Night 5 30 PM Lunch S starting None Lunch E ending None Rp Feature Reference Section 3 Features Time Day Night Lunch Service 008 Operator Assignment Assigns an extension port number for the operator OME be o 01 24 Default Jack O1 I Feature References Section 3 Features Operator Manager Extension Operator Call System Programming 4 9 009 4 2 System Programming 009 Extension Number Assignment Selects an extension numbering plan Plan 1 Plan 2 or Plan 3 and assigns an extension number to each extension Plan 1 Available extension numbers are 200 through 299 Plan 2 Available extension numbers are 100 through 499 Plan 3 Available extension numbers are 10 through 49 Don se Fee ene gt Plan 1 2 3 HEFFER i NEXT or PREV as To continue 01 24 To continue jl Default Plan 1 extension ports 01 through 24 extension numbers 201 through 224 I If the selected extension numbering plan is the same as the previously s
385. wer Supplies Primary 230 V AC 240 V AC 50 Hz 0 5 A Secondary Circuit Volt 5 V 26 V Dialling Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialling DTMF DP Intercom Paths 4 Connector Exchange Lines 2 pin Modular Connector RJ11 Extensions Doorphone 4 pin Modular Connector Pager Music Source EIAJ RC 6701 A plug two conductor 3 5 mm in diameter Extension Connection Cable KX T7020 KX T7130 KX T7050 Single Line Telephones Srann broke 2 pair wire A B H L FD a de debe OE ee 1 pair wire A B SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Interface Serial Interface RS 232C D SUB 9 pin Output Equipment Printer Detail Recording Date Time Extension Number Exchange Line Number Dialled Number Call Duration Account Code Extension Loop Limit KX T7020 KX T7130 KX T7050 0 2 ee 40 Q Single Line Telephones 600 Q including set Doorphones ue saan YY A YW TYN NN Bes 209 Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 O Maximum Number of Extension Instruments per Line 1 for a KX T7020 KX T7130 KX T7050 or single line telephone 2 for by parallel connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone Ring Voltage 80 Vrms at 25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load Local Exchange Loop Limit 1 600 Q max Environmental Reguirements Recall Timing Range 0 C 40 C 10 90 relative humidity 80 ms 1 0
386. where the tone and SP PHONE MONITOR message will be left dial tone e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of If the called extension is busy or does not answer MESSAGE cS Gha Press MESSAGE Confirmation tone and dial tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR Cancelling a message Any Telephone y S y3 5 Z ooa ap g ola Lift the handset or press Dial 702 Enter the extension number Dial Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR where you left a message tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone e Single line telephone users can dial 0 instead of Cancelling using the MESSAGE button 4 pe gt MESSAGE MESSAGE SM one Lift the handset or press Enter the extension number Press MESSAGE Confirmation Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR where you left a message twice tone and SP PHONE MONITOR dial tone Operations 1 65 suoneuodo pooueApy 1 7 Useful Features Checking and Selecting a message by the message receiver If there is a message the message waiting lamp MESSAGE indicator light will be on When the telephone is idle and on hook MESSAGE The stored messages are shown on the display in the order they were received Press MESSAGE repeatedly until the desired message appears Calling back the message sender y MESSAGE Lift the handset or press Press MESSAGE SP PHONE MONITOR If you have more than one message at your ex
387. xchange line 2 etc lt Trunk Group G CO Key gt Receiving or making outside calls is on an trunk group basis The trunk group is assigned in program 404 Any incoming call from any exchange line in the trunk group arrives at the G CO key To make an outside call the user can access an idle exchange line in the group by simply pressing the assigned G CO key lt Single Exchange Line S CO Key gt Receiving or making outside calls is done using a specific exchange line An incoming call from the specific exchange line arrives at the S CO key To make an outside call the user can access the specific exchange line by simply pressing the assigned S CO key lt Other Exchange Line O CO Key gt Exchange lines which are not assigned to an S CO or G CO key can be assigned to a flexible line key as the O CO key An incoming call on an exchange lines arrives at the O CO To make an outside call the user simply presses the assigned O CO key Features 3 43 L 3 Features d The same trunk group can be assigned to more than one G CO key on the same PT a The same line can be assigned to an S CO key and G CO key The S CO key has priority Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming calls disable can be selected by programs 408 through 413 on an extension exchange line basis A ringing pattern can be selected for each exchange line by program 423 np Reguired System Programming 400 Exchange Line Connection Assignment
388. y The call is not Music on Hold is heard 2 answered Busy Call Is Intercept Routing employed 9 3 y Yes ui Wi Q o o Dn zZ o y Has the UCD Busy Waiting Time expired 10 Yes Disconnect No Goes to A Whatis the 6 OGM Mode MODE3 or MODES MODE4 MODE6 lt The call is not g answered x Doa 9 Yes Lo 4 OGM is heard r Goes to DISA Note The explanation for 1 through 11 is on the next page Features 3 69 1 aD 33 4 5 6 7 8 Q 10 11 3 Features An OGM is sent to the caller When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal while the OGM is being sent the call is disconnected Music on hold is selected in program 111 as follows External Uses an external music source such as a radio Tone Uses the cyclic tone equipped with the system When an extension in the UCD group is available The system holds the call until the assigned time in program 521 expires OGM repeats the assigned time intervals in program 522 within the assigned time in program 521 The OGM Mode is selected in program 502 The system treats the call according to program 523 as follows when the assigned time in 521 expires Disconnect The call is disconnected Intercept The call is sent to the extensions programmed in 408 410 The system treats the
389. y Telephone Settings You may press a line key to select a desired exchange line before pressing the One Touch Dialling button Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling and manual dialling can be used together You can store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by dividing and storing it into 2 One Touch Dialling buttons A pause is automatically entered after the stored line access code 9 0 or 81 through 86 when dialling To confirm the current status of the button press the button while on hook 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone One Touch Dialling Button See the Installation Manual Section 3 One Touch Dialling 1 22 Operations 1 3 Making Calls Dialling Using System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling Allows you to make a call using pre programmed speed dial numbers This system supports 100 speed dial numbers which are available to all extension users PT and SLT AUTO DIAL For a PT STORE t ial no y For an SLT system speed dial no Lift the handset or press For a PT Press AUTO DIAL STORE Enter a system speed dial number SP PHONE MONITOR For an SLT Dial X 00 through 99 e You will not hear a tone The AUTO DIAL STORE indicator The AUTO DIAL STORE indicator lights light turns off System Speed Dial numbers must be stored by System Programming Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling and manual dial
390. y belong to one trunk group Feature Reference Section 3 Features Outside Calling 4 46 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 405 407 405 407 Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment Day Night Lunch Determines which extension s can make an outside call in the day night and or lunch modes Pes eee Smee eee ee oe eee eee aay i NEXT Jor PREV lt c lt To continue L 4 Go to next or prev line number Em H To continue Go to next or prev port number 01 24 X Enable Disable To continue Go to another port number H x ner 05 07 1 6 To continue Go to another line number X Program address selection number 05 405 for day 06 406 for night 07 407 for lunch Exchange line number 1 through 6 X All exchange lines Extension port number 01 through 24 x All extension ports Default All exchange lines all extension ports Enable Hy Feature Reference Section 3 Features Outside Calling System Programming 4 47 408 410 4 2 System Programming 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Determines which extension s will ring for incoming outside calls in the day night and or lunch modes BY Hu CH HR Y y i NEXT or PREV lt To continue EG a FD EU 4 Go to next or prev line number PEA A A UF e ee ne ee ne ene een To continue Go to next or prev port number
391. y going off hook A proprietary telephone user can also receive a call by pressing the rapid flashing CO or INTERCOM button and talk handsfree mode if the telephone has the SP PHONE button A proprietary telephone user can select the Line Preference for incoming outside calls See Preferred Line Assignment Incoming in this section i np Reguired System Programming 408 410 Flexible Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch 411 413 Delayed Ringing Assignment Day Night Lunch Related Feature Reference Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Operating Instructions Reference 1 4 Receiving Calls Receiving Calls Features 3 59 R 3 Features lt Last Number Redial gt Every extension automatically saves the last telephone number dialled so that the extension user can make a call to the same party later using a simple operation lt Saved Number Redial gt Allows a proprietary telephone user to save the current external telephone number in the SAVE button during a conversation so that the extension user can redial the same party later using a simple operation The saved number can be redialled until another number is stored A flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings mp Operating Instructions References 1 2 Proprietary Telephone Settings Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone SAVE button 1 3 Making Calls Redialling the Last Numbe
392. yed on the LCD and printed on the printer SMDR 20A ser faa siw oe 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 sec after dial Instantly Default 10 seconds after dialling l If reverse signal detection is enabled in program 424 Reverse Polarity Circuit a Assignment the system will automatically start the timer immediately after an external party answers a call IF Feature References Section 3 Features Polarity Reverse Detection Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 206 Dialling Start Time Assigns the minimum length of the pause time the system waits before dialling after seizing an exchange line Idle ser mes sr mo 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 ms Default 0 millisecond np Feature Reference Section 3 Features Outside Calling 4 28 System Programming 4 2 System Programming 207 208 207 Recall Timing Range Selection Sets the hookswitch recall time range sent from an extension to the system MODE 1 50 to 180 milliseconds MODE 2 80 to 180 milliseconds MODE 3 80 to 650 milliseconds MODE 4 80 to 1000 milliseconds MODE 5 200 to 1000 milliseconds OG es fe sow me MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 MODE4 MODES Default MODE 1 mc Feature Reference Section 3 Features Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone 208 Interdigit Time Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits for an outgoing outside call a00 ser Bess Gem oe 5 10 15 20 sec Defau

KXTA624 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents